Engineering constructionmethodsguidelinescbs(2)

A work based on personal experience
for improving young engineers /
students knowledge
Engineering Construction Method Statements Revision No: Original Work by
P Eng Suraj Singh April 11, 2006 Page
1 of
Civil Engineering
Buildings Practice
Construction Method Statements
General Activities
P Eng Suraj Singh
Contents index
For navigation please click these pasted hyperlinks
Construction Method Statements for various
activities within civil engineering for plants works
Site Preparation & Earth Work PROTECTION OF EXISTING
SERVICES
RE-ROUTING OF 33KV CABLES
Concrete Pipe Culverts
CONCRETE PIPE CULVERT CROSSINGS TO AVENUE
Statements were written by Professional Eng Suraj Singh Project Manager as well as Senior Project Engineer. Most of these were approved by EPC Contractor & Company (no sketches
have been included with these for AUTO CAD ) References too have been eliminated from the statements for secrecy requirement of the contract These presents to be used only for
acedemical / knowledge exchange purpose. The works were executed for major oil companies. All these statements constitute management documents.

students knowledge
2 of
CONCRETING TO WALLS OF
CENTRAL CONTROL BUILDING /
LABORATORY
CULVERTS E AND MAIN HIGHWAY.
PLACING CONCRETE ON
SERVICE
WATER TANK 58-TK-205
FOUNDATIONS
CONCRETE REPAIR
Top
CONSTRUCTION OF PIPE
RACK BASES
EXCAVATION IN Operating
Authority CONTROLLED AREAS
CONSTRUCTION OF MAIN
SUBSTATION
REMOVAL OF HAZARDOUS
MATERIALS
CONSTRUCTION OF FLOOR SLAB
CENTRAL CONTROL BUILDING
MORTAR FOR BLOCKWORK CONTROL OF CAMP SEWAGE SYSTEM
STRUCTURAL STEEL-PIPERACKS COMPRESSORS’ STRUCTURES
RCC COLUMN PLATE INSERTS
EXCAVATION FOR
132KV CABLE INTERCONNECTION
ROAD CROSSING FOR 132
KV ROUTE
NIGHT SHIFT WORKING -
EARTHWORKS
GROUTING TO PIPE RACK FOUNDATION
BASES
CEMENTITIOUS GROUTING TO
FOUNDATION BASES
ETYLENE COMPRESSOR
MASSIVE FOUNDATION (CONCRETE
POUR
PROPANE COMPRESSOR
MASSIVE FOUNDATION (CONCRETE POUR)
PROPANE COMPRESSOR
POUR)
PROPANE COMPRESSOR
POUR
PROPANE COMPRESSOR
MASSIVE FOUNDATION (CONCRETE POUR
PROPANE COMPRESSOR
POUR
SEAWATER BASIN
(WATER TIGHTNESS BS 8007 : 1987 )
SEAWATER BASIN
SEAWATER BASIN
ADMINISTRATION BUILDING
STAIR LANDING EXTENSION AT GRID 4
J
STAIR LANDING EXTENSION AT GRID 4 J
STAIR LANDING EXTENSION AT GRID 4
J
FENCING
Top
CERAPlant Operating Authority TILES
FLOORING SYSTEM
FLOORING SYSTEM
PLASTERING AND RENDERING
ROOFING SYSTEM
ROOFING SYSTEM BUILDINGS
ROOFING SYSTEM
CRACKED GAS COMPRESSOR TABLE TOP
CONCRETE POUR
WATER TIGHTNESS TESTS FOR THE
COLLECTION SUMPS ACCORDING TO
BS 8007 : 1987 SECTION 9
WATER TIGHTNESS TESTS FOR THE
COLLECTION SUMPS ACCORDING TO
BS 8007 : 1987 SECTION 9
MARBLE FLOORING
ETHYLENE GAS COMPRESSOR
TABLE TOP POUR
PROPANE GAS COMPRESSOR
TABLE TOP POUR
EXPANSION JOINTS IN DITCHES
EXPANSION JOINTS IN DITCHES
Top
CONCRETE COATING
USING MASTER SEAL 550
DEWATERING FOR THE 84” GRE PAIR
LINE PARALLEL TO
CORNICHE ROAD EAST WEST

students knowledge
3 of
CERAPlant Operating Authority WALL
TILES FIXING
BEDDING AND GRAVEL FILLING
BENEATH 60 “ DIA PIPE COOLING
WATER PIPE
EXTERNAL CONCRETE PROTECTION
ABOVE GROUND CONCRETE
PROTECTION
USING MASTERSEAL 300 H
PROTECTION
USING MASTERSEAL 300 H
HAND EXCAVATION TO INSTALL
TELEPHONE DUCTS BETWEEN BOX NO. 20
TO TELECOM CENTRE
BACKFILLING OF THE WEST SIDE OF
THE QUENCH TOWER FOUNDATION –
(RIB)
EXCAVATION -
COOLING WATER OUTFALL CHAMBER
DRILLING OF HOLES ON
PIPE RACK & STRUCTURES ON SITE
SITE OFFICE ESTABLISHMENT Welding of Earthing Lugs on
East West Piperack (SR0099A &B)
FILLING AROUND ALL THE PIPES WITHIN THE
Plant AREA
PRECASTING MAN HOLES
CATCH BASIN AND
VALVE CHAMBERS
TERMINATION DETAIL TO
PROTECTIVE MEMBRANE AROUND
RCC COLUMNS SUPPORTING THE
STRUCTURAL STEEL
COLUMNS FOR PIPE RACKS
CASE (1) WITH ALUMINIUM BEAD
CASE (2) WITH REBATE
CASE (3) GRAVEL FILL
CASE (4) PAVING
TERMINATION DETAIL TO PROTECTIVE
MEMBRANE AROUND RCC COLUMNS
SUPPORTING THE STRUCTURAL STEEL
COLUMNS FOR PIPE RACKS
CASE (4) PAVING
Top ROAD CROSSING FOR LAYING 2 PIPES
1 FOR 20” RAW ETHANE & 1 FOR 6”
PROPANE
FIRST STREET Operating Authority
ENTRY
ROAD CROSSING FOR LAYING 2 PIPES
1 FOR 20” RAW ETHANE
&
1 FOR 6” PROPANE
FIRST STREET Operating Authority ENTRY
DIRECTIONAL BORING
FOR LAYING SLEEVES FOR
2 PIPES
1 # 20” RAW ETHANE
&
1 # 6” PROPANE
Operating Authority Plant REFINERY
ENTRY
2 #s ROAD CROSSINGS
FOR LAYING
1 FOR 14” DESALINATED WATER
1 FOR 8”POTABLE WATER
&
1 FOR 8” NATURAL GAS
1 FOR 6” PROPANE
AVENUE ‘C’
AT FIRE STATION
2 #s ROAD CROSSINGS
FOR LAYING
1 FOR 14” DESALINATED WATER
1 FOR 8”POTABLE WATER
&
1 FOR 6” PROPANE
AVENUE ‘C’
AT FIRE STATION
GRC
PANEL FIXING
PAINTING ADMINISTRATION BUILDING PAINTING ADMINISTRATION BUILDING
Top

students knowledge
4 of
ROAD CROSSING FOR LAYING 2 PIPES
&
1 FOR 6”PROPANE
AVENUE ‘C’
EARTHWORKS SURVEY
SYSTEM
ROAD CROSSING FOR LAYING
84”G R E PAIR SEAWATER
COOLING LINES
AT
AVENUE ‘D’ / CORNICHE
JUNCTION
ROAD CROSSING FOR LAYING
84”G R E PAIR SEAWATER
COOLING LINES
AT
AVENUE ‘D’ / CORNICHE
JUNCTION
TENNIS COURTS SURFACING
Top
PRECASTING LIGHTING POLES
FOUNDATIONS
LIGHTING POLES
FOUNDATIONS
SEA WATER SURGE BASIN
CONCRETE PROTECTION
MASTER SEAL 550
CONCRETE COATING OF STRUCTURES
USING MASTERSEAL 550
PROTECTION
SEAWATER SURGE BASIN
SEA WATER SURGE BASIN JOINT
SEAL
PAINTING
SUB STATIONS
PAINTING
SUB STATIONS
ELECTRICAL & INSTRUMENTATION
TRENCHES
ELECTRICAL & INSTRUMENTATION
TRENCHES
PULL PITS
ROAD CROSSING TO MAKE GOOD
WEARING COURSE OVER COMPLETED
1# FOR 14” DESALINATED WATER
&
1# FOR 8”POTABLE WATER
AVENUE ‘C’
PULL PITS
ROAD CROSSING TO MAKE GOOD
132 KV ELECTRIC CABLE
AVENUE ‘C’
PULL PITS
ROAD CROSSING
TO MAKE GOOD (temporarily)
132 KV ELECTRIC CABLE
AVENUE ‘C’
DRINKING WATER
CONNECTION
Top
PROTECTION TO TRANSFORMER
FOUNDATION SIDES IN SUB STATIONS
WITH ALUMINIUM BEAD
TERMINATION FOR BELOW GROUND
AND MASTERSEAL 300H FOR ABOVE
GROUND IN GRAVEL FILL AREA
TIMBER DOORS FIXING
GROUTING TO STEEL TANKS
BEARINGS ON RING BEAMS
GROUTING TO STEEL TANKS
BEARINGS ON RING BEAMS
EXCAVATION FOR CCB UNDERGROUND
WATER TANK
EXCAVATION FOR CCB
UNDERGROUND WATER TANK
SOAKAWAY CHAMBERS EPOXY FLOORING
BUILDINGS
EPOXY FLOORING
BUILDINGS
EPOXY FLOORING
BUILDINGS
VINYL WALL COVERING
BUILDINGS
DRY WALL LININGS
BUILDINGS
RUBBER FLOORING
(BUILDINGS)
RUBBER FLOORING
(BUILDINGS)
RUBBER FLOORING
(BUILDINGS)
RUBBER FLOORING
(BUILDINGS)
RUBBER FLOORING
(BUILDINGS)

students knowledge
5 of
SUSPENDED CEILINGS
ALL BUILDINGS
PIT 21 WATER CONNECTION
Top
CEMENT BASED NON SHRINK GROUTING TO
FOUNDATION BASES
USING MASTERFLOW 928 T
REPAIR OF CONCRETE FLOOR
SCREEDS
Top
REPAIR OF CONCRETE FLOOR
SCREEDS
EPOXY GROUTING TO
VIBRATING INSTALLATION BASES
USING MASTERFLOW 648 CP
GENERAL FOUNDATIONS
KERBS & INTERLOCKING BLOCKS
PAVING AROUND BUILDINGS
ERECTION OF STEEL STRUCTURES
(FOR HIGHER LEVELS)
VINYL FLOORING
BUILDINGS
CONCRETE PAVING CENTRAL CONTROL BUILDING
FLOORING SYSTEM
CONCRETE PLACEMENT
PRECAST RCC COVERS
CABLE & INSTRUMENTATION
TRENCHES
BLACK TOP REPAIR
IST STREET BETWEEN
AVENUE C & B
REPAIR OF
SINGLE LEAF SWING GATES
REPAIR TO
FLOOR SCREED LEVELS
RESIN INJECTION TO LEAKING JOINT
FIRE WATER LINE EXCAVATION
AROUND CONSUMER RECEIPT
STATION
ROAD CROSSING
FOR LAYING
1 FOR 6” PROPANE
FIRST STREET
ROAD CROSSING
FOR LAYING
1 FOR 6” PROPANE
FIRST STREET
2 #s ROAD CROSSINGS
FOR LAYING
1 FOR 6” PROPANE
&
1 FOR 14”DESALINATED WATER
1FOR 8” POTABLE WATER
AVENUE -D
TREATMENT TO MOVED EXPANSION JOINTS
Top
TESTING OF FRESH CONCRETE ON
SITE
Top
ROAD CROSSING
TO INSTALL CULVERT FOR
1# 14” DESALINATED WATER
CORNICHE ROAD / ROAD C
AT GUP GATE NOTH
ROAD CROSSING
TO INSTALL CULVERT
FOR
1 # 14” DESALINATED WATER
AVENUE ‘C’ ROAD GUP GATE EAST
MAIN ENTRANCE

students knowledge
6 of
ROAD CROSSING
TO INSTALL CULVERT
FOR
MAIN ENTRANCE
ROAD CROSSING
TO INSTALL CULVERT
FOR
MAIN ENTRANCE
REPLACEMENT OF MISALIGNED ANCHOR
BOLTS
IN
FOUNDATION 55-VV-906
USING RENDEROC LAX TRA
REPLACEMENT OF MISALIGNED
ANCHOR BOLTS
IN
FOUNDATION 55-VV-906
USING RENDEROC LAX TRA
BUILDINGS
SCREEDS FOR VINYL AND EPOXY
FLOOR FINISHES
BUILDINGS
FLOOR FINISHES
BUILDINGS
FLOOR FINISHES
DIRECTIONAL BORING AT 3#
LOCATIONS FOR 14”DESALINATED
WATER PIPE CORNICHE ROAD
NORTH OF Operating Authority
DIRECTIONAL BORING AT 3# LOCATIONS
FOR 14”DESALINATED WATER PIPE
CORNICHE ROAD
NORTH OF Operating Authority
NORTH OF GUP
NORTH OF GUP
EPOXY SKIRTING IN
CENTRAL CONTROL BUILDING
& SUB STATIONS ON DRY LINING
EPOXY SKIRTING
ON DRY LINING
EPOXY SKIRTING
ON DRY LINING
ROAD SURFACE
REINSTATEMENT
OVER BOX CULVERT CROSSINGS
Top REPAIR TO LIFT
CLADDING PANEL
FIXING SHEETING PANELS
WALL & ROOF CLADDING
FIXING SHEETING PANELS
WALL & ROOF CLADDING
ROAD CROSSING
AT FIRE STATION- FIRST STREET
FOR LAYING
2 # 100 mm SLEEVES
FOR TELEPHONE CABLES
CLOSING THE STRUCTURAL GAP
ON THE ROOF, WALL & BASE SLAB
HDPE PIPES
BUTT FUSION
ROAD CROSSINGS
TO CONSTRUCT BOX CULVERTS OFH
2 & 3
CORNICHE ROAD
ETHYLENE EXPORT
ROAD CROSSINGS
TO INSTALL CULVERTS OFH 4 & 5
CORNICHE ROAD ETHYLENE EXPORT
MDPE DRINKING WATER LINE – NY
LINES
ROOF & SIDE CLADDING – Plant AREA FOUNDATIONS ALONG FENCE BELOW
‘FERTIL OVER HEAD CONVEYOR’
FOR PIPE RACK LEADING TO SEA
REINSTATEMENT TO
‘DAMAGE CAUSED
FLARE PIPE RACK
COLUMN MEMBER 01537’
AT GRID 19A
REINSTATEMENT TO
‘DAMAGE CAUSED
FLARE PIPE RACK
COLUMN MEMBER 01537’
AT GRID 19A
Maintenance Warehouse
Overcoating
To Epoxy Painted Surface
With
Mastertop Top Coat 44P
Access to Corridors & Walkway
Roads
Bituminous Concrete Surfacing
Roads
Bituminous Concrete Surfacing
Excavation for 200 pair Telecom Route
(Direct Buried)
parallel to Avenue D & 3rd
street
Hand Excavation for 200 pair Telecom
Route
(Direct Buried)
parallel to Avenue C
200 pair Telecom Road Crossing
at Avenue D / 3rd
Street Intersection
along E 676976
Manual Excavation
@ Access road to GASCO camp
@ C / L, co-ordinate N 2666305 / avenue C

students knowledge
7 of
Manual Excavation
@ Access road to Operating Authority
camp
@ C / L, co-ordinate N 2666940 /
avenue C
REMOVAL OF CONTAMINATED
SOIL
BLINDING CONCRETE
REINFORCEMENT RECEIVAL &
FABRICATION
REINFORCEMENT PLACEMENT FORMWORK ERECTION
CONCRETE TO PAVED AREAS EXCAVATION & BACKFILL TO
STRUCTURES
TELEPHONE CABLE TO SITE OFFICE
ELECTRIC CABLE FROM RLIP
SUBSTATION TO Civil Contractor
CAMP
WATER SUPPLY TO Civil Contractor
CAMP
ADMINISTRATION BUILDING SUBSTRUCTURE
WASTE MANAGEMENT SEA WATER BASIN EXCAVATION FOR
ETHANE & PROPANE
GAS PIPELINE INTERCONNECTION
GENERAL
Top
#1
Site Preparation & Earth Work
Top
Index
Scope - Reference documents – Definitions – Responsibilities – Safety – Method – Equipment
- Attachment
Scope
The purpose of this method statement is to define the sequence of activities for the site
preparation works related to the Company Petrochemical project. The extent of these activities
are defined upon the attached site plan (Not included with this statement). Refer to indicative
google photos.
Reference documents
Specifications for:
Site preparation,Excavation & backfill for underground installations,Fill, Grading and
Paving,Testing Laboratory,Geotechnical Investigation
Definitions
GE Geotechnical Engineer
PSM Project Site Manager
SE Site Engineer
SO Safety Officer
QM/QE Quaity Manager/Quality Engineer
IS Infrastructure Superintendent
ST Survey Team
PPE Personal Protective Equipment

students knowledge
8 of
Responsibilities
It is an overall responsibility of the PSM to ensure that the site preparation activities are
conducted according to the project specifications. PSM shall arrange all required resources.
The IS shall ensure that the site preparation activities are conducted according to this method
statement as well complying with all specifications.
The GE shall ensure that the activities are conducted according to the project specifications
and this method statement.
Safety
Prior to the commencement of any activities, the workforce shall receive a toolbox talk on the
project site as well as on general safety requirements. SO shall ensure that the persons being
inducted on site are well aware of the safety procedure to be implemented on site for the
activity concerned.All persons upon the site shall wear PPE issued to them. Where possible
hazards may arise from excavation activities, the necessary safety measures shall be taken to
prevent accident or injury at all times. This may include provision of signage, barriers,
watchman and lighting.Where work upon existing services is required, the necessary authority,
permits and safety equipment shall be attained prior to the activity commencing. Scanning of
existing services shall be conducted by suitable methods.
Method
The survey team shall locate and mark all services that are present upon the site (This
includes above ground services as well as buried services). These services, (Electric,
telephone, gas, oil, chemical, water etc), shall be clearly marked using stakes and warning
tapes, reflected upon a site drawing and the issues raised with the client.
The survey team shall also mark upon the site plan all obstructions, structures and
developments. Any obstruction encountered during excavation activities shall be plotted and
recorded.
Where hazardous material is encountered, it shall be identified and isolatedin compliance with
the safety procedures under SO supervision. The client shall be informed & hazardous
material be collected and removed to a licensed tipping place. The details of the material and
tipping arrangements shall be documented for review by the client as appropriate. Refer to
Method statement Removal of hazardous materials.
Existing structures, fences and developments shall be demolished in a safe manner as site-
stripping activities proceed. The necessary permits, approvals and permission shall be
obtained from the concerned authorities prior to the commencement of the activity. The
method of removal of these existing elements shall usually be conducted by dozer or breaker.
Where necessary otherwise, discussions on site shall be made concerning alternate methods
of removal when the full extent of these structures are exposed.
The removal of the topsoil shall include all vegetation and rubbish material from the work site.
Prior to the start of topsoil removal, the surveyor shall peg out the haul roads to be used by the
construction equipment to execute all the site preparation activities. These roads shall be
constructed by leveling of the existing terrain. Grade pegs shall be set to an agreed grid to

students knowledge
9 of
indicate existing grade and reduced grade. Dependant upon the quality of the existing soil
where the roads is to be built, suitable compactable fill may be imported or re-located from
other parts of the site. The material shall be approved by the GE & QM/QE jointly.
These roads shall be maintained as the work proceeds.
Where required, water shall be spayed for dust control.
For general removal of the topsoil activities using appropriate equipment, the areas concerned
shall be excavated and graded to levels that ensure adequate surface water drainage. The
GE/QM/QE shall monitor the activity to ensure that the topsoil material is removed. Sampling
and testing of the resultant material shall be conducted for specification compliance & proper
compaction.
Upon completion of the topsoil removal activities where appropriate, the exposed surface shall
be scarified, moistened and compacted to achieve the required density criteria. The areas shall
be divided into manageable sections that be defined upon sketches. The GE shall monitor and
test all sections. The results of the tests shall be recorded upon the relevant QC format. The
number of tests conducted shall reflect the specification requirement.
In excavation areas, the GE shall review the material to be excavated to ascertain its suitability
for re-use as fill material. This excavated material shall be transported to areas that require
filling. The material shall be deposited onto the areas to receive filling, leveled, moisture
conditioned and compacted. If necessary, stockpiling may be required.
The excavated areas shall be divided into manageable sections, which be defined upon
sketches. The excavated areas shall be monitored by the GE to ensure that any unsuitable
material does not appear. Where unsuitable material appears, it shall be removed. The
excavated formation surface shall be treated by scarification, moistened and compacted
according to the specification criteria. All areas shall be tested and the results recorded.
Where areas are to receive fill, the material that has been excavated shall be transported to
the fill area, tipped, leveled, moisture conditioned and compacted. The material shall be spread
and leveled in 200mm layers. The areas to be filled shall be divided into manageable sections
that be defined upon a sketch. The fill layer shall be moistened and compacted to achieve the
required specification criteria. No further fill activity shall be conducted upon an area that has
not been approved and released by the GE. Attention shall be observed at edges and slopes,
to ensure that compaction criteria are achieved. Additional layers of fill material shall be placed
similarly as described above until the desired elevation has been achieved.
Production procedure.
Verification exercise for fill activity had been conducted to establish the economical and
effective method for the fill activity.
Import and place fill to controlled areas of approximately 25m wide by 100 - 150m long.
Spread and level the imported fill.

students knowledge
10 of
Add water to the fill layer by passing the water tanker over the fill layer. The water tanker
should pass over the layer twice.
A time gap of approximately two hours is allowed for the water to soak into the fill material.
The layer is now mixed with the grader until a uniform blend of moist material is achieved.
Additional water is added by passing the water tanker over the layer in a uniform sequence. A
time period of approximately one-hour is allowed for this water to soak into the fill layer.
The fill layer is mixed again with the grader leaving the fill level to the correct grade.
Vibrating rollers shall now compact the fill layer in a logical sequence that compacts the fill
layer uniformly.
Testing of the layer shall be conducted according to specification requirements.
Equipment
Dozers & Graders, Vibrating drum rollers, Dumper trucks, Excavators & Loaders, Water
tankers
Attachment
None. Refer to indicative google photos as incuded as a facility. Assume there was nothing
prior to construction & whole site was filled for preparationworks.
#2
Protection of existing services
Top
Index
Scope - Reference documents – Definitions – Responsibilities – Safety – Method – Equipment -
Attachment
Scope
The purpose of this method statement is to define the procedure that can be implemented, for
the identification, protection and / or removal / relocation of existing services upon the site.
Reference documents
Specifications: Site preparation…, Fill…, Grading and Paving...(certain sections re to record
services within the specifications)
Definitions
SE Site Engineer
SO Safety Officer
ST Survey Team

students knowledge
11 of
Responsibilities
It is the overall responsibility of the PSM to ensure that the identification, protection and / or
removal / rerouting to existing services are conducted in a safe methodical sequence as
defined by this method statement as well as directed by the relevant authorities.
The IS shall coordinate investigation of existing services with the Plant authorities.
The ST shall accurately plot and record all existing services upon the site.
The SE shall ensure that the excavation is rightly carried out.
The SO shall ensure that excavations are safely carried out.
Safety
Prior to the commencement of any activities, the workforce shall receive a safety induction talk
on the project site safety requirements.
The necessary permits that may be required to work near these services shall be obtained.
Any special conditions imposed upon these permits shall be implemented.
The use or restriction of specific mechanical equipment whilst locating these services shall be
implemented. Generally, where appropriate, only manual excavation shall be carried out.
Method
From the existing record drawings provided by the relevant authorities controlling Plant,
existing services shall be located and exposed by hand excavation.
The ST shall check and accurately record these services. A line of pegs shall be positioned to
indicate the route of the existing services. The warning tape and / or nylon cord to indicate
and protect the route of the service shall be provided. The ST shall inform the IS about the
exact location of the services relative to the warning flags.
Should an existing service be disbanded or made redundant, that shall be exposed to allow for
the inspection as well as confirmation of its status by the authorities. The IS through the EPC
Contractor representative shall request the relevant authority to review the excavated service
to confirm the status as well as instruct for necessary action required for removal or diversion.
The redundant service shall be removed under the supervision of the IS according to the
agreed criteria of that relevant authority.
Where an existing live service remains working or serving during the site preparation activity
such as the 33KVA electric cable, that existing live service shall be protected in compliance
with the regulations.
Upon location of the live service, the ST shall mark that location upon the ground using spray
paint or small pegs. At necessary locations along the route of the existing live service indicated
by the ST, small hand dug pits shall be excavated to expose live service to ensure its location.
On ten meters (10m) either side of the route of the existing live service shall be erected posts
at suitable centres. A nylon cord with warning tape streamers shall be strung between the
posts to clearly indicate the service and its route.
Signboards that indicate what exactly the live service within the marked corridor is, shall also
be displayed at sufficient locations conveniently within the view along the route.

students knowledge
12 of
Where temporary roads cross existing cables, sufficient suitable fill material shall be placed on
top of the cables to afford adequate protection by distributing the axle loadings safely.
The Safety Officer shall periodically check the condition of the barriers where necessary
refurbishment is conducted.
Equipment
Excavation Tools, Survey Equipment, Pegs, Nylon cord, Warning tape.
Attachment
None. Attachments depends on the available record drawings.
#3
Re-routing of 33kv cables
Top
Index
Scope- Reference documents- Definitions- Responsibilities- Safety- Method- Equipment-
Attachment
Scope
The purpose of this method statement is to define the procedure that can be implemented for
re-routing of the existing 33KV electric cable that crosses the project site. This method
statement includes the location, excavation, isolation, re-routing, jointing, testing and backfill.
Reference documents
Site drawing, Record Drawings
Definitions
SE Site Engineer
SO Safety Officer
ST Survey Team
Responsibilities
The EPC Contractor PSM shall ensure the required permits from Operating Authority are
obtained prior to the commencement of this activity.
It is the overall responsibility of the PSM to ensure that the identification, protection and / or
removal / rerouting to existing services are conducted in a safe methodical sequence as
defined by this method statement as well as directed by the relevant authorities.
The IS shall coordinate investigation of existing services with the Plant authorities.
The ST shall accurately plot and record all existing services upon the site.
The SE shall ensure that the excavation is rightly carried out.

students knowledge
13 of
The SO shall ensure that excavations are safely carried out & ensure that all safety issues are
addressed as defined upon the work permits.
Safety
Prior to the commencement of any activities, the workforce shall receive a safety induction talk
on the project site safety requirements.
The necessary permits that may be required to work near these services shall be obtained.
Any special conditions imposed upon these permits shall be implemented.
Only specifically approved mechanical equipment whilst locating these services shall be used.
Generally, where appropriate, only manual excavation shall be carried out.
Method
The existing route of the 33KV cable shall be identified, marked & a barrier erected on either
side clearly defining the route across the site.
The route proposed for the new 33KV cable on the AFC drawing shall be identified & marked
with pegs by the ST. Excavation shall commence to the line and required level.
The appropriate sand bed shall be placed within the trench.
The new cable supplied by EPC Contractor shall be laid into the trench according to
established methods and standards that would include placing of the cable drum on a cable
trolley and rollers. The cable shall be unwound from the cable drum by pulling. If required, a
cable tugger fitted with load cell control may be utilized.
The new cable shall be correctly placed to line and level upon the sand bed. Wherever joints
occur, sufficient cable overlap to allow for the jointing shall be provided.
The insulation value of the new cable shall be tested by 5KV motorized megger.
Upon the EPC Contractor Electrical Engineers approval, the cable shall be covered with dune
sand to the required thickness evenly. Cable tiles shall be placed on top of the sand above the
new cable.
The trench shall be backfilled with approved material. The backfill activity shall continue until
the trench is completely filled. Route markers shall be placed with the splice joints surveyed
and recorded.
Where joints occur to the cable either at the two termination points with the old cable or along
the length of the new cable, the same technique shall be adopted.
An experienced cable jointer under the supervision of an electrical engineer shall conduct all
the jointing.
Approved jointing kits shall be utilized. The manufacturers recommendations relating to the
installation of these jointing kits shall be followed.

students knowledge
14 of
Upon completion of the jointing of the new cable length, the entire length of the new cable shall
be tested. The cable shall be subjected to a pressure test of 67KV DC for 15 minutes on the
cable between each core and earth. The remaining cores shall be connected to earth. The
engineer shall measure the leakage current. All readings shall be recorded upon the
appropriate form. The testing shall be witnessed by the EPC Contractor engineer.
Prior to the excavation at the points where the new cable is to be connected to existing 33KV
cable, the necessary permits shall be obtained. EPC Contractor method statement for
conducting cable Diversion shall be complied with.
The old cable shall be hand dug. An area sufficient to conduct the jointing of the cable shall be
excavated.
Electrical engineer in coordination with the EPC Contractor engineer shall ensure that the old
cables are identified and isolated under the supervision of the Refinery Supervisor within the
appropriate substation. The necessary earthing and isolation to the cables shall be conducted
prior to the commencement of jointing the old cable to the new.
The cables shall be jointed in the same manner as described previously.
Once the cables have been jointed, these shall be tested by mega test at 5KV and HV test at
53KVDC to establish its integrity and insulation.
The disbanded cable shall be removed from the new jointed cable by excavating and rolling
the cable to allow the new cable route corridor to be covered with sand, cable tiles and backfill
material.
Upon completion of the cable testing activities, the Refinery Electrical engineer shall authorize
the energizing of the new cable route.
The disbanded cable route shall be excavated to expose the old cable. The old cable shall be
removed onto the surplus cable drums from which the new cable was coiled. These drums
shall be stored on site for EPC Contractor disposal.
A program to be developed by all parties of power outage windows shall be produced for the
tie-in activities of the cables.
Equipment
Excavator,Dump trucks,Cable drum trolley,Cable rollers,Cable tugger with load cell
Attachment
EPC Contractor standard method statement for cable diversion.
(Since this statement may be submitted by the Civil Works subcontractor on behalf of the EPC
contractor, the EPC standard method statement is required to be attached)

students knowledge
15 of
Top
Concrete Pipe Culverts
Index
Scope-Reference documents-Definitions-Responsibilities-Safety-Method-Equipment-Attachment
Scope
The purpose of this Statement is to define the sequence and methodology for the laying,
jointing and testing of the concrete pipe culverts.
Reference documents
Specification….,Drawing No….
Definitions
SE Site Engineer
SO Safety Officer
ST Survey Team
Responsibilities
The CS shall Plan and Resource the concrete culvert laying activities to ensure that these are
Carried out complying with the contract documents.
The Construction Foreman shall actually execute the works controlling the workforce as
necessary all according to the directions by the site engineer or the superintendant.
Safety
Prior to the commencement of any activities, the labour force shall receive a toolbox talk on the
Project Site Safety requirements. Any adopted process that may have a particular Safety risk,
shall be assessed, shortcomings analysed and addressed accordingly meeting the operational
requirement.
Method
Setting Out
The edge co-ordinates of the concrete pipe shall be calculated from the information on IFC
drawing. Allowing for the 1:1.5 slope, the edges shall be fixed in such a way that full length of
pipes are used avoiding unnecessary cutting. The center line and the actual trench width shall
be set out by marking on ground.
Excavation
The trench shall be excavated to the correct width, length and formation by using a Hydraulic
backhoe. Once the bulk excavation is completed, wooden pegs with elevation marked on them
shall be used for indication to complete the remaining excavation to accurate formation levels.
The formation shall be watered and compacted with a plate compactor to achieve compaction

students knowledge
16 of
of 90% of MDD in accordance with specification documents. The compacted formation shall be
inspected and field tested prior to the commencement of the Bedding activity.
Bedding
Once the excavation is approved, Bedding material shall be placed to a thickness of 150mm,
watered and compacted in accordance with the specification. The compacted surface shall be
inspected & field samples tested for approval.
Pipe Work
The socket positions shall be marked on the Bedding and Hand excavated to ensure that the
barrel of the pipe rests firmly on the bedding with spigot ends remaining clean for installing the
gaskets.
The concrete pipes shall be transported from the store to the location of the trench and gently
lowered keeping the socket end upstream into the trenches with a crane using belt slings only.
The pipes shall be laid back to back to the correct orientation. The spigot end of the pipes shall
be cleaned using a cloth with special care taken to clean the recess which shall be lubricated
with liquid soap following gasket placement in position.
Supports shall be placed at one end. The spigot shall be so placed that the gasket is in contact
with the entry taper at the socket evenly all around.
The spigot shall then be drawn into the socket using a 5 tonTirfor. Jointing shall be carried out.
Upon completion of the Jointing operation, the Bedding material shall be packed below the
pipes so that the barrel rests firmly on the bedding keeping the pipe intact. The top elevation of
the pipe shall be checked to ensure that the pipe lebvel is accurate. The operation shall be
repeated until all the pipes are laid. The completed pipework shall be inspected and approved.
Each joint shall be visually inspected from inside the pipe.
Backfill
Once the pipes are laid to the True gradient and alignment as described above, Bedding
Material shall be carefully placed along the sides and in between the pipes by means of a
backhoe. The bedding and surround material shall be placed in layers and watered and
compacted until the bedding and surround material reaches 300mm above the top of the pipe.
Excavated suitable material shall then be placed in 200mm layer, compacted, inspected and
tested.
A list of Do’s and Don’t’s provided by the manufacturer is attached herewith.
Equipment
Crane 20Ton 1 No / Flat Bed TrailorPart time / Excavator Backhoe1 No / Trifor 5 To
2Nos / Fork liftParttime / Plate Compactor1 No / Water Tanker Part time
Labour
ForemanNo. 1 / PipefitterNos. 2 / LabourersNos. 4
Attachment
Manufacture’s datasheet.
Top

students knowledge
17 of
#5
Concreting to walls of
Central control building / laboratory
Super – structure activities
Top
Index
Scope / Reference documents / Definitions / Formwork Design / Method
Scope
The purpose of this method statement is to define the procedure that shall be adopted for the
erection of formwork and placement of structural concrete to the wall sections of the CCB.
Reference documents
Specification Concrete Construction, Formwork and Coating.
Specification Concrete Buildings.
Drawing No.
Definitions
E Engineer
PSM Project Site Manager.
CM Construction Manager.
Formwork system
The basic formwork supporting system shall be as designed and supplied by M / s. Giffin
Scaffco. The supplier of formwork shall provide all design drawings for approval as well as for
implementation. Additional bracing and support props shall be added by Civil Contractor in
compliance with the formwork design provided by the supplier. Surface forming materials such as plies
& timber scantlings etc. shall be added by the civil contractor. Upon completion of the suspended slab
formwork system particularly, Civil Contractor Site Engineer shall check and confirm the adequacy of
the system. If so required, the whole form work shall then be checked by the supplier’s expert & the
adequacy certified in as by third party.
Method
The surveyor shall set out, check the line and levels to establish the correct positions. The wall
starter bars shall be installed in place in accordance with the IFC drawings for the foundations.
The kicker to the base of the wall sections shall be planned to be cast along with the
foundation.
The vertical and horizontal reinforcement to the wall shall be installed according to the IFC
drawings. Where service inserts (ducts pipes etc) are shown on IFC drawings, these shall be
securely located,installed as well as checked.
The continuity testing of the reinforcement for the cathodic protection requirement shall be
conducted and witnessed by the QC department. The results shall be recorded. Connection
bosses shall be fixed as detailed on the approved drawings.

students knowledge
18 of
One side of the formwork shall be erected and braced. A safe means of access to a working
platform as well as working platform shall be erected for this formwork. This access shall allow
the steel fixers, carpenters and concrete crew a safe working area.
All service openings shall be boxed for block outs / ducted onto the formwork.
The height and width of the wall section shall be agreed with EPC Contractor/ Engineer. The
wall height shall terminate near the underside of the roof slab, where the remaining top part of
the wall can be cast along with the roof slab.
The walls shall be prepared and cast in sections not exceeding 6.0m length where a
construction and or contraction joint shall be formed using plywood. After all the inspections of
the preparatory works, the concrete pouring activity shall be carried out in lifts not more than
450 mm layers. This concrete surface at joint location shall be scabbled prior to the next
section is formed formed. Where applicable, the laboratory portion outer wall form shall be
erected with the profile strips prefixed to the formwork. The remaining wall form shall be
erected and braced. A safe means of access to a working platform as well as working platform
shall be erected for this formwork. This access shall allow the steel fixers, carpenters and
concrete crew a safe working area.
The surveyor shall check the alignment of the wall.
The preparatory works shall be checked by the site engineer who then request the QC.
The finished reinforcement and formwork configuration shall be inspected on an ongoing basis
by the Civil Contractor QC department who in turn obtain concrete pouring permission from
EPC Contractor. Having obtained approval, the structural concrete shall be poured by
pumping. Curing shall be carried out according to the specification requirements.
Equipment
Crane.
Concrete Pump.
Vibrators
Hand Tools.
Attachment
None.
#6
Concrete pipe culverts
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Definitions
Responsibilities
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment

students knowledge
19 of
Scope
The purpose of this Method Statement is to define the sequence and methodology for the
laying, jointing and testing of the concrete pipe culverts.
Reference documents
Specification
Specification
Drawing No.
Definitions
E Engineer
CS Construction Superintendent
Responsibilities
The CS shall Plan and Resource the concrete lining activities, to ensure that they are
Constructed according to the Drawings and Specification.
The Construction Foreman shall actually execute the works, directing the workforce as
necessary.
Safety
Project Site Safety requirements. Any process that may have a particular Safety risk, shall be
assessed and addressed as required in consultation with the safety engineer.
Method
Setting Out
The edge co-ordinates of the pipe shall be calculated from the information on the drawing as
well as allowing for the 1:1.5 slope & fixed in such a way that full length of pipes are used
without pipe cutting. The center line and the actual width shall be marked on ground.
Excavation
The trench shall be excavated to the correct width, length and formation by using a Hydraulic
backhoe. Once the bulk excavation is completed, wooden pegs shall be used showing the
elevations marked on them to guide & complete the excavation to required formation levels.
The formation shall be watered and compacted using a plate compactor to achieve compaction
of 90% of MDD in accordance with specification. The compacted formation shall be inspected
and field compaction tested prior to the commencement of the Bedding activity.
Bedding
Once the excavation is completed & approved, Bedding material shall be placed to a thickness
of 150mm, watered and compacted in compliance with the specifications. The compacted
surface shall be inspected, tested and approved.
Pipe Work
The socket positions shall be setout on the Bedding. Manual excavation shall be carried out for
socket portion to ensure that the barrel of the pipe rests firmly on the bedding. It shall also be
ensured that spigot ends remain clean to the same standard as were while installing the
gaskets. The concrete pipes shall be transported from the store to the location of the trench
and gently lowered into the trenches with a crane using belt slings only. The socket end shall
be placed upstream. The pipes shall be laid back to back to the correct orientation. The spigot

students knowledge
20 of
end of the pipes shall be cleaned using a cloth with special care taken to clean the recess
which be lubricated with liquid soap following which the gasket placed in position. Supports
shall be placed at one end. The spigot shall be so placed that the gasket is in contact with the
entry taper/bevel at the socket evenly on circumference. The spigot shall then be drawn into
the socket using a 5 tonTirfor. Upon completion of the Jointing operation, the Bedding material
shall be packed below the pipes so that the barrel rests firmly on the bedding and the pipe
doesn’t move. The top elevation of the pipe shall be checked to ensure that the laid pipe is
accurately placed to the correct alignment and elevations. The operation shall be repeated
until all the pipes are laid. The completed pipework shall be inspected and approved. Each
joint shall be visually inspected from inside the pipe if accessible.
Backfill
Once the pipes have been laid to the True gradient and alignment as described above,
Bedding Material shall be carefully placed along the sides and in between the pipes by means
of a backhoe. The bedding and surround material shall be placed in layers, watered and
compacted until the surround material reaches 300mm above the top of the pipe. Excavated
suitable material shall then be used in compacted layers of 200mm inspected and tested until
the backfilling operations are completed.
A list of Do’s and Don’t’s provided by the manufacturer is attached herewith.
Equipment
Crane 20Ton 1 No.
Flat Bed Trailor Part time
Excavator Backhoe 1 No.
Trifor 5 Ton 2 Nos.
Fork lift Part time
Plate Compactor 1 No.
Water Tanker Part time
Labour
Foreman No. 1
Pipefitter Nos. 2
Labourers Nos. 4
Attachment
#7
Culvert crossings to avenue e and main
highway.
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents

students knowledge
21 of
Definitions
Responsibilities
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
The purpose of this statement is to define the sequence and methodology for the excavation,
placement of culvert pipes, backfill and reinstatement to the culvert crossings on avenue E and
the main highway next to the retention pond.
Reference documents
Drawing No:
Drawing No:
Definitions
E Engineer
Responsibilities
The CM shall plan and resource the culvert construction operation, including the permissions
required from all authorities concerned.
The Construction Foreman shall control and monitor these activities, directing the workforce as
necessary.
Safety
Prior to the commencement of any activities, the labour force shall receive a tool box talk on
the project site safety requirements. Any process that may have a particular safety risk, shall
be assessed and addressed as required.
Method
The route of the culvert trench shall be set-out by the surveyor. The existing services such as
the fibre optic cable shall be located and protected. The cable shall be supported across the
excavation, placed within a PVC duct, wrapped with polythene & tied to the support.
The traffic diversion scheme wilth all signs installed shall be implemented according to the
attachment and monitored regularly by the safety department to ensure a smooth traffic
management. Concrete barriers shall be placed at the head of the diversion. The ditch along
the side of the diversion shall be barricaded with nylon rope bearing warning tape.
The initial excavation shall commence at the drainage ditch to the west side of avenue E and
extend across avenue E up to the fibre optic cable location.
The trench shall be excavated using appropriate equipment while dump trucks collect the
surplus excavated earth to be removed from site to the spoil area. Material that is to be reused
shall be stockpiled. The excavated asphalt shall be deposited at the tip area in the pre-agreed
location. Any damage to the existing asphalt shall be repaired during the reinstatement
operation.

students knowledge
22 of
The sides of the excavation shall be sloped where the excavation depth exceeds 1.2 m. A
ladder shall be provided for ingress and egress of the excavation. Ladder shall be located
every 8 m if so required depending on length of excavation.
A banksman shall be provided to monitor the excavation machine operations.
The bottom of the excavated trench shall be inspected by the EPC Contractor engineer prior to
the compaction activity commences. All unsuitable material shall be removed.
Inspection and testing of the compaction shall be conducted by the site test laboratory. The
field density test results shall be submitted for approval.
The surveyor shall monitor the line and level of the excavation regularly & provide level pins for
the pipe bedding.
Approved bedding material shall be placed and compacted to the required levels and density
values. The site test laboratory shall conduct the field density tests & reported accordingly.
The concrete culvert pipes shall be placed correctly to the line and level as shown on the IFC
drawing.
The pipes shall be inspected for damage prior to placement. No damaged pipes shall be
placed. The spigot head on the culvert pipe shall be on the up stream end of the pipe. A pair of
nylon strap shall be used to lift the pipes using a 50 ton crane and place the pipes correctly in
to the trench. Backfill material shall be placed around the pipes in layers of 150mm thickness
duly compacted & tested by the laboratory. Backfill operations shall continue up to the existing
road formation level.
When the backfill activity is completed, asphalt repair to the existing highway shall be
conducted & avenue E road construction shall be reinstated. The traffic management scheme
shall be removed to allow the re-use of avenue E.
A temporary security fence outside the existing RRD area shall be erected to allow the culvert
construction to continue east towards the retention pond. The temporary security fence shall
be erected to the agreement and requirements of the security police. When this activity is
completed and approved by the security police, the existing security fence can be cut and
rolled back sufficiently to allow the construction activities to be conducted.
The next section for the culvert trench shall be excavated taking care of where existing
services have been exposed to be well protected.
The trench formation shall be inspected, compacted and tested as previously described.
Pipe bedding shall be placed, compacted and tested as previously described.
The pipes shall be installed within the trench after inspection for transit damage is completed.
Backfill around the pipes shall be placed, compacted and tested.
The backfill shall be reinstated above the pipe surround up to existing ground level.
Reinstatement of any existing services shall be done. The fibre optic cable shall be left
protected by the PVC duct and polythene sheet, then surrounded with concrete.
The existing security fence shall be replaced. The existing fabric shall be re-erected onto the
existing poles which shall be re concreted in position. The barbed wire shall be re placed using
new material where required.
The temporary security fence shall be removed.

students knowledge
23 of
The final section of the culvert trench shall be set-out and excavated in the same sequence as
the previous sections.
The compaction and testing of the pipe bedding shall be carried out.
The placement of the pipes to the correct line and level shall be carried out.
The backfilling of the pipe surround shall be conducted. The reinstatement of the backfill above
the pipe surround material shall be conducted. The site test laboratory shall conduct the field
density testing. The inlet and outlet chambers of the crossing shall be constructed. Refer to the
method statement for chambers. This procedure shall be similarly followed in principle for any
other culvert crossings on avenue E.
Equipment
Excavators.
Dump trucks.
Compactors.
Attachment
None.
#8
Placing concrete on service
Water tank 58-tk-205 foundations
Top
Index
Scope
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
The purpose of this method statement is to define the sequence and methodology for the
placing of concrete on service water tank foundations.
Reference documents
Specification
Definitions
E Engineer
Responsibilities
The CM shall plan and resource the concrete repair activities, to ensure that they are
implemented according to this method statement.
The Construction Foreman shall monitor the concrete repair activities, directing the workforce
as necessary.

students knowledge
24 of
Safety
Prior to the commencement of the concrete pour, the labour force shall receive a tool box talk
on safety requirements with special care taken to ensure adequate lighting arrangements are
made. We propose to use 2 Nos. Tower lights each with 4 X 1000 Watts bulbs. Accers
platforms shall be provided all around the ground beam on the outside formwork, 2 Nos.
Aluminium ladders shall be placed at opposite ends to reach the Accers platforms from the
ground levels. The accers platform shall be provided with Hand Rails all around.
Method
Preparatory works shall be carried out for the form works in circular profile for which due
provisions shall be made for the specialist form. This form shall be well supported & anchored
to resist ecpected forces during the our. As parallel activity, rebars shall be placed & fixed in
the correct positions duly inspected.
It is proposed to cast the Ring beam in two pours. Stopend forms shall be placed at opposite
locations across the full width and depth to establish construction joints. The concrete shall be
poured onto the section in one go 300 to 450 mm high around and compacted with suitable
vibrators. Care shall be taken to ensure that concrete is placed and compacted in its final
position within the time permissible form the time of batching to the time it should be
compacted in accordance with the concrete production specification that may be generally 1 to
2 hours. Concrete delivery shall be planned accordingly to quantity & duration of pour to
enable a smooth concreting operation. Concrete shall be continually poured from the start to
the concrete por finish. No cold jointshall be allowed to form. All flash setting shall be avoided
by keeping the rebars lower than the air temperature. Proper vibration shall be effected. After
the concrete is completed, proper method of curing shall be carried out & continued for
specified number of days. All tests for on site concreting shall be conducted by the RMC
laboratory staff duly recorded.
Equipment
Concrete pump, concrete trucks, vibrators,
Attachment
None.
#9
Concrete repair
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Definitions
Responsibilities
Safety
+Method
Equipment
Attachment

students knowledge
25 of
Scope
The purpose of this method statement, is to define the criteria for the concrete repair to all
structures.
Reference documents
Specification
Definitions
E Engineer
Responsibilities
The CM shall plan and resource the concrete repair activities, to ensure that they are
implemented according to this method statement.
The Construction Foreman shall monitor the concrete repair activities, directing the workforce
as necessary.
Safety
the project site safety requirements. Any process that is adopted that may have a particular
safety risk, shall be assessed and addressed as required.
Method
Upon removal of the formwork, the concrete surface shall be inspected by the Site engineer &
foreman to check surface defects.
Where no surface imperfections have occurred, the concrete surface shall be cured according
to the relevant procedure. Minor defects as described in A – D below shall be repaired as soon
as practical. More significant defects as described in E – H shall be subject to joint
inspection / agreement between Civil Contractor, EPC Contractor and Company.
A.
Pin holes / blow holes
Where small defects to the concrete surface has occurred such as pin holes or holes smaller
than 3mm in diameter or depth, the surface shall be repaired using Nitomortar FC with an
approved bonding agent. This surface repair shall be conducted as soon as the formwork is
removed whilst the concrete is still green. The repair shall then be cured in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions or agreed procedures using water or curing agent as appropriate.
B.
Sand runs / scouring
Water movement inside the shutter can result in a streaky appearance giving loose sandy
finish. Where this occurs, any loose material shall be removed by stiff brushing and then
repaired as described in A above.
C.
Plastic shrinkage cracks
Cracking caused by plastic shrinkage due to inadequate curing and protection of horizontal
surfaces usually results in a series of diagonal cracks. These should be repaired by brushing
dry cement powder directly into the cracks while the concrete is less than 3 days old and
covering with damp hessian.

students knowledge
26 of
D.
Minor misalignments (Typically Less than 2cm)
Misalignments due to shutter movements etc, should be ground back to provide a smooth
transition between areas. Where occurring at joints between panels, the ground profile length
should be 2-3 times the size of the maximum misalignment. Following grinding, the surface
should be reinstated as in A above. Care should be taken to ensure that concrete cover is
maintained per specifications at all times.
E.
Honey combing / segregation / minor voids
The repair shall be conducted as soon as the formwork is removed and the repair method
agreed with EPC Contractor / Engineer. It shall require chipping the repair area free of laitance
and exposing any voids. The repair area shall then be soaked, an approved bonding agent
applied followed by working on with an approved mortar such as Master Flow 544 before the
area dries out.. The materials shall be mixed using the bonding agent and not water. The
mixed material shall be trowelled firmly into the repair area. Incase, the depth of the repair
exceed 15mm, the repair shall be conducted in two layers providing a scratch coat on the first
layer. The repair shall then be cured in accordance with the agreed procedure using water or
curing compound as appropriate.
F.
Major voids (Typically Deeper than 5cm)
This repair shall consist of chipping the affected area to remove any laitance and voids. Where
reinforcement is exposed in a void, the surrounding concrete shall be chipped away to provide
adequate space to place fresh concrete around the reinforcement including removal of all soft
concrete. (Note- a distance of one and a half times the stone size must be allowed around all
exposed reinforcement). Formwork shall be provided to retain the fresh concrete. The chipped
area shall be soaked in and primed with a bonding agent. The bonding agent shall not be
allowed to dry. Fresh concrete of the same grade as the surrounding concrete shall be used to
fill in the void. The repair shall be water cured along with the parent concrete. The surface
finishes to the repair shall be as the same standard as the surrounding concrete.
G.
Plastic settlement cracks
Cracking caused by settlement of concrete usually in deep lifts or at changes in section can
result in a series of cracks which mirror the reinforcement pattern in horizontal surfaces or
appear to arch on vertical surfaces. Any such cracks should be chased out to a depth of 10-
15mm and filled with an epoxy mortar such as Nitomortar FC as in A above.
H.
Pourous / spongy surface
Where inadequate vibration and poor finishing techniques have caused excessive bleeding,
horizontal surfaces can appear spongy and pourous. In this case all affected surfaces should
be ground back to good concrete usually only 2-3mm below the surface. The surface should
then be reinstated using Nitomortar as in A above. This type of defect often occurs with plastic
settlement cracks which should be treated as In G above.

students knowledge
27 of
All repairs noted above shall be recorded on the post-pour inspection form (QCF). It is not
necessary to raise a non-conformance report provided the repairs are carried out as indicated
above and agreed with EPC Contractor where necessary. Any repairs not covered by the
above procedure shall be dealt with on a case-by-case basis and agreed with EPC Contractor
and Company before commencing repairs.
Equipment
Hand Tools.
Attachment
None.
#10
Construction of pipe rack bases
Top
Index
Scope
Reference Documents
Definition
Responsibilities
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
Construction of the pipes rack bare foundations.
Documents
Specifications
Drawing No:
Definitions
E Engineer
CM Construction Manager
Responsibilties
The CS shall plan and resource the Construction of Pipe Rack Bases activities, to ensure that
they are Constructed according to the Drawings and Specification.
necessary.

students knowledge
28 of
Safety
Prior to the commencement of any activites, the labour force shall receive a toolbox talk on the
Project Site Safety requirements. Any process that is adopted that may have a particular
Safety risk, shall be assessed as required.
Method
It is proposed to cast the pipe rack bases and the columns at actual locations at site. The
method of Construction of the pipe rack bases can be summarized in the following activities.
Setting Out
Excavation
Blinding Concrete
Formwork
Steel Reinforcement
Concrete Construction
Concrete Protection
Construction of Columns with Anchor Bolts
Backfilling
Grouting
Setting Out- Pipe Rack Bases
The center lines of the Anchor bolt group shall be set out and offset provided 2m on either side
of the foundation as reference line for blinding using manual methods of setting out.
Excavation
The bases shall be excavated with excavator, sides trimmed to avoid caving in. The formation
shall be compacted, inspected, field tested and approved prior to the commencement of the
blinding.
Blinding Concrete
The formation area to receive the blinding shal be prepared to the design levels & profiles. C20
PBFC grade concrete shall be placed to a minimum thickness of 50mm and the top surface
smoothened by steel trowel. Curing shall be carried out for the blinding concrete for at least
two days. Prior to the placement of the precast pipe rack base on it, mass concrete infill shall
be placed as required in accordance with the drawings as necessary.
Site Precast Yard for foundations
A precast yard shall be constructed on site at the location indicated in the attached sketch.
A wind shield fence 2m high shall be erected on the Northern boundary as indicated in the
proposed location in accordance with clause ………………… of the specification.
Steel Formwork
Steel Forms as shown in the attached sketch shall be used for casting the pipe rack base
foundations. The forms should be easily struck as well placed in position.
Separate forms shall be used for the bases and columns . The base slab formwork shall have
100mm high suspended kicker.
Fosroc reebol mould release oil shall be used. The template for anchor bolts for piperack base
type1, 3 & 5 shall be a 100mm wide strip of steel plate across the width of the column steel

students knowledge
29 of
formwork at the top. The template for piperack type 2, 4, 6, & 7 shall be similar in Construction
type with 2 plates and a connecting piece.
Anchor Bolts & Steel Reinforcement
Steel Reinforcement cut and bent to the required shape and size shall be available on site.
Reinforcement shall be timely fixed in place on the casting beds.
Lifting Hooks
Lifting hooks shall be inserted into the correct location & properly fastened so as not to be
dislocated during concrete pouring.
Casting Concrete
Formwork applied with a fresh coat of mould release oil shall be placed in position around the
already assembled steel reinforcement. Lifting recess plugs shall be installed in position with a
Template. All supports shall be fixed in position. Inspection shall be conducted to the ITP
requirement. The Base shall be poured and compacted with vibrators. The surfaces shall be
smoothened with steel trowel. Curing shall ne carried out. Formwork for the column shall be
installed the following day. The plumb and alignment shall be checked and the anchor bolts
with sleeves installed and held in position by the template . The widths of the template shall be
kept to the minimum to allow room for concrete vibrators. Once the column is cast, the
formwork shall be stripped after 36hrs and the concrete cured for a minimum period of 7 days.
Protective Coatings
Once the curing is completed as stated above, the polythene sheets and hessian shall be
removed and the concrete faces allowed to dry for atleast 24hrs during which time minor
repairs such as filling up of blow holes etc. shall be carried out. The faces shall be wiped clean
with a wet sponge and surface prepared to receive the first coat of protective painting.
Fosroc Nitocote ET 402 shall be mixed with a slow speed electric drill and spray applied with
an airless sprayer equipment to the required thickness of 1mm as a single high build coat in
accordance with the manufacture’s instructions.
The column and the top sides of the boxes, vertical faces shall be painted as described above.
The bottom of the base slab shall be left without painting.
Traceability
The pipe rack bases shall be numbered and the date & time of casting marked on the
concrete.
Lifting, Transportation and Installation
After completion of the curing, certified cranes of required capacity shall be used to lift the pipe
rack base from the casting bed to the flat low bed trailor. The bases shall be transported to the
actual location of installation.
On location preparatory pf preceeding activities shall be completed prior to the transportation
of the bases. The screed shall be cast accurately to the actual dimension of the bone of the
pipe rack foundation. Using a jack of adequate capacity, the unit shall be moved to the correct
position accurately. The crane shall be used to lift the pipe rack base from the Trailor down
onto the screed surface.
The position of Anchor bolts shall be rechecked with a Theodalite and accuracy of the
installation certified by a surveyor.
Back filling

students knowledge
30 of
Once the pipe rack base is installed, Backfilling with selected suitable fill material shall
commence. The fill material shall be pre mixed with water 3% more than the optimum moisture
content for the daily requirement. Layers of premixed fill material shall be placed to a thickness
of 200 mm and compacted properly. The compacted surface shall be inspected, field tested
and these operations repeated until the Backfilling operations are completed.
Anchor Bolts shall remain protected with PVC sleeves until completion of the Backfilling
operations and only exposed at the time of installation / erection of steel works.
Equipment
Crane 50Ton 2 No.
Flat Bed Trailor 40 Ton 1 No.
Water Tanker 1 No.
Labour
Casting Engineer 1 No.
Placing Engineer 1 No.
Casting Foreman 1 No.
Placing Foreman 1 No.
Carpenters 20 Nos.
Steel fixers 30 Nos.
Masons 20 Nos.
Laborers 40 Nos.
Attachment
#11
Excavation in Operating Authority controlled areas
Top
Index
Scope
Reference Documents
Definition
Responsibilities
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
The purpose of this method statement is to define the methodology that shall be implemented,
for construction activities that shall be conducted in areas under Operating Authority control.
These areas shall primarily be the easement areas.

students knowledge
31 of
Documents
All applicable Operating Authority easement drawings.
All applicable EPC Contractor project Drawings.
All applicable EPC Contractor project specifications.
Definitions
E Engineer
CF Construction Foreman.
Responsibilities
The CM shall plan and resource the construction activities, to reflect the conditions imposed
upon the “Permit to Work” system.
The CF shall actually execute the construction activities, directing the workforce as necessary.
Safety
Prior to the commencement of any of the construction activities, the labour force shall receive
a toolbox talk on the Project Site Safety requirements. Any activity that is conducted that may
have a particular Safety risk, shall be assessed as required.
Method
The Construction Manager shall assign an Engineer and Construction Foreman to be
responsible for the relevant activities.
The Engineer shall be responsible for producing a method statement for the activities to be
carried out. This method statement shall contain the procedure defined below.
When the method statement has been agreed with EPC Contractor, a work permit covering the
work activities within area of work shall be obtained from Operating Authority & duly registered
into the work permit log.
The Work area shall be surveyed to establish existing services location using the Operating
Authority easement drawings and the cable detector. These services shall be exposed by hand
dug trenches along the route. Where the existing service may cross the route of the proposed
work activity, adequate protection and warning of that existing service shall be provided.
The method of excavation for the work activity shall be defined upon the work permit. Where
mechanical methods are accepted, a banksman shall be deployed with all mechanical
excavation equipment to check for any existing service and advise the operator of the
excavation machine.
The excavated material where possible shall be stockpiled in a controlled area location. Any
unsuitable material shall be removed from site to the spoil area immediately.
Where soil conditions dictate, the sides of the trench shall be sloped.
During the duration of the work activities, the site shall be kept clean.& tidy
The Civil Contractor QC department shall conduct the required inspection and test regime
required under the ITP.
Upon completion of the work activity, all rubbish shall be removed from the work site. The
easement area shall be left graded.
Equipment
Cable scanner.

students knowledge
32 of
Dump trucks
Excavators as applicable.
Compactors.
Attachment
Checklist MS
#12
Construction of main substation
Top
Index
Scope
Reference Documents
Definition
Responsibilities
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
Construction of the Main Substation.
Documents
Specifications
Definitions
E Engineer
Responsibilities
The CS shall plan and resource the Construction of Main Substation activities, to ensure that
they are Constructed according to the Drawings and Specification.
necessary.
Safety
Safety risk shall be assessed as required.
Method
This method statement details only the Structural Concrete works. Finishes, Steel Sheet
Roofs, Ladders, Access Platforms, Internal and External Insulation, Galvanised Steel Mesh etc
are not Included in this Method Statement.

students knowledge
33 of
The Main Substation structure is to be constructed in the following stages.
Stage 1:
Earthworks, blinding, waterproofing, screed protection up to defined Elevation
Stage 2.
Footing pad construction including kicker up to 100mm above top of footing.
Stage 3.
Stub columns / walls including anchor bolts for galvanised screen mesh up to underside of
floor slab / ground beam – defined Elevation.
Stage 4.
Ground slab of HVAC room including anchor bolts for ladder / access platforms TOC
Stage 5.
Floor slab for Main Building TOC (Top of Concrete)
Stage 6.
Wall construction up to bottom of roof slab / roof beam elevation
Stage 7.
Roof slab construction including kicker for parapet wall.
Stage 8.
Parapet wall construction.
The Transformer Bays and the Foundation are to be constructed in the following sequence:
Stage 1
Earthworks, blinding, waterproofing, screed protection.
Stage 2.
Footing pad construction and kicker 100mm above the top of footing including water stop bar
for transformer bay partition wall and boundary wall footings.
Stage 3.
Transformer bay partition walls full height of 10m including cast in anchor plates for Roof truss.
Stage 4
Transformer bay boundary wall including cast in sleeves for Fence Posts.
Stage 5.
Transformer foundation bases including bases for Sump and Valve Pit.
Stage 6.
Gravel Fill between foundations and walls.
Stage 7.
Steel Roof Trusses and Roof.
Setting Out
Grid line (1) to (13) and (A) to (D) shall be offset 3m away from the edge of the walls. The
points shall be marked by a nail driven on top of wooden pegs driven into the ground and set in
concrete.
STAGE I
Excavate whole area to Formation Level.
Further excavate for transformer bay partition wall. Foundations to required elevations.
Create Access ramp at either short ends to allow Heavy equipment to get in and out.
Using grader and 12T Formation roller, Scarify and compact formation to elevation + 20mm.

students knowledge
34 of
Test for degree of Compaction and get approved.
Set out grid lines (1) – (13) and (A) to (D). Use steel pins to be 2m away at outer edge of
Concrete face.
Mark Grid lines with chalk powder.
Use Timber reapers to construct edge forms and place blinding Concrete to Elevation 98.50
200mm wider than required. Cure the concrete according to specifications requirements.
Apply waterproofing membranes in sections one day prior to fixing formwork for base pads.
STAGE II
Place Formwork directly on Waterproof membrane.
Formwork height shall be the height of Footing Pad + 30mm for protection screed. Timber shall
be placed on top of the base formwork to act as kicker for Columns / Walls.
Place Steel Reinforcement with Starter bars for Columns / Walls.
Place timber reapers on bothfaces of the formwork for Contraction Joint at location indicated in
the attached sketch No. 1. Care would be taken to ensure that contraction joints in west wall
would be hidden behind GRC Facia
Care to be taken to ensure that waterbars are placed at the right position on the edge of Pad
Concrete for Transformer Bay partition walls and East wall.
Isolated footing bases shall be cast. Bases for wall foundations shall be cast as per sequence
shown in attached sketch no. 2.
STAGE III
Place Reinforcement for Stub Columns and Walls up to Floor Level.
Place Formwork for Stub Columns and walls up to Floor Level.
Vertical Construction Joints shall be located at same positions as indicated in the attached
sketch No. 1. The distance from the corner shall not exceed 4.5m and the distance between
intermediate ones shall not exceed 6m.
Horizontal Construction Joints shall be at locations shown in Drawing No. as described in this
Method Statement.
Cast Stub Columns and Walls up to underside of Floor Slab.
STAGE IV & V
Install Formwork for floor beams and floor slab including 100mm Kicker for main walls.
Construction Joints for floor slab shall be as shown in attached sketch No. 3.
Install Reinforcement for floor beam and Floor slab.
Place steel channels and Box outs for openings in floor slab for switchgear control panels.
Penetration sleeves / ducts shall be boxed out for cables and utility services
Cast Floor slab in alternate panels. Construction Joints shall be located within the middle third
point of slabs and beams as shown in the attached sketch No. 2.
STAGE VI
External Formwork for vertical walls shall be placed in position, aligned and supported.
Box outs for Bus duct penetration, rebates for Personnel and Equipment, Blast door frames,
Air Conditioner openings and others shall be Boxed out.
Cast in items such as Anchor plates for Roof truss shall be fixed in position.
Timber reapers for Contraction Joints shall be fixed to the outer formwork face.
Steel Reinforcement shall be installed as required.

students knowledge
35 of
Inner Formwork not exceeding 6m lengths shall then be placed after inspection approval of
rebars up to the bottom of Roof slab level. Design calculations included as attached.
The wall section shall be cast. Formwork design is similar to the ones used at Seawater surge
basin. The rate of pour shall not exceed 2m vertical height / hr.
STAGE VII
Roof Slab scaffolding shall commence even as the wall construction activity is in progress on
completed sections of walls.
Roof Slab Construction Joints are shown in the attached sketch.
Suspended kickers shall be placed for parapet wall.
The Roof slab shall be cast. A set of four cubes shall be taken for each pour.
Scaffolding shall not be removed for 14days and until the full design strength of concrete is
reached. Cubes shall be crushed for 7,14 and 28 day strength.
STAGE VIII
Rainwater chutes shall be boxed out on parapet wall formwork. Reinforcement shall be placed
and concrete cast in the same manner as for main wall.
CURING
Every pour be it a footing, stub column, wall, floor or roof, shall be wet cured with Hessian,
covered with polythene sheet and kept wet for a minimum period 14 days in accordance with
the specification. 2nos, 5000ltrs. Capacity water tanks in elevated platforms shall be provided
for round the clock curing operations.
Approved Curing Compound shall be used in Roof Soffits.
Equipment
Excavator / JCB
Transit Mixer
Crane 20 T
Attachment
Sketch No. 1: Showing locations of Contraction Joints.
Sketch No. 4. Showing Concrete Pouring Sequence.
Sketch No. 2. Showing Construction Joints for floor slab.
Sketch No. 3. Showing Construction Joints for Roof slab.
#13
Removal of hazardous materials
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Definitions
Responsibilities
Safety
Method
Equipment

students knowledge
36 of
Attachment
Scope
The purpose of this method statement, is to define the procedure that shall be implemented,
for the investigation, quantification and disposal of the hazardous material upon the site.
Reference documents
Operating Authority regulations.
Bechtel HSE Manual.
Definitions
GE Geotechnical Engineer.
IS Infrastructure Superintendent.
ST Survey team.
Responsibilities
EPC Contractor shall coordinate with all concerned authorities, for their approval of the
hazardous material disposal.
The PSM shall plan, resource and control the activities required for the orderly execution of the
hazardous material disposal.
The IS shall monitor the activities, in compliance with this procedure.
The GE shall ensure accurate reporting of the materials.
Safety
Prior to the commencement of any activities, the workforce shall receive a Tool Box Talk on
the project site safety requirements. PPE where appropriate shall be provided to those
persons who shall come into contact with any hazardous materials.
Method
The hazardous material shall be located and identified upon the site. The ST shall record these
details upon a site sketch.
The GE and IS shall inspect the hazardous material visually and complete an inspection
report.
An accurate description of the material shall be provided. Where elements such as barrels are
part of the hazardous material, the identifying marks upon the barrel shall be checked. Where
appropriate, samples shall be taken to verify the content.
Where such liquids have leaked into the soil, samples of the soil shall be taken to verify the
amount of contamination.
The ST shall assist the GE and IS to establish the extent of contamination. Trial pits may be
dug to visually gauge the penetration of contamination. Samples of soil from these pits shall
verify the content and absorption if any of the contaminant. The ST shall record the details.
Upon receipt of the laboratory results that verify the analysis of the contaminant, a specific
safety plan if required, shall be prepared for the safe handling of suspect material or soil. Any
precautions that are not defined within this method statement but essential shall be taken up.
The solid items of contaminated material shall be lifted by loader shovel into the rear of a tipper
truck. An inventory of the items loaded into the truck shall be produced. A permission shall be
obtained from the operating authority for the purpose of disposal of hazardous material waste
into a designated area. The truck covered with a dust preventive sheet shall transport the

students knowledge
37 of
material to the approved Operating Authority waste disposal site in the industrial area. The
contents shall be offloaded in accordance with the facility rules and regulations monitored by
the EPC Contractor representative.
This process shall continue until all items of waste are removed from the site.
The existing soil material that is contaminated shall be clearly marked with pegs. Using a
loader shovel, the material shall be excavated and loaded into a tipper truck. The truck shall be
covered whilst transporting the soil to the mixing area where the soil be stockpiled. This
process shall continue until all contaminated soil is removed to the satisfaction of the GE.
The stockpile of contaminated soil shall be lightly spread across the disposal area at levels
above the water table. This shall be achieved by using loader shovel and grader. The layer
thickness shall not exceed 150mm. A grader shall now mix this layer with the layer of
uncontaminated material below. This shall have the affect of dispersing the material. A normal
layer of uncontaminated material shall be placed upon the top of this mixed material. If
required, a further layer of contaminated material shall be spread over this layer of material
until the stockpile is depleted. This layer shall be mixed with the layer below as described
previously.
A topping layer of uncontaminated material shall be placed on top of all mixed material.
The GE shall satisfy himself that the layer thickness is minimal and the material is adequately
mixed with the layer below.
Upon completion of the removal of the hazardous material, the GE shall prepare a report that
identifies the material disposed as well as the areas of disposal.
Equipment
Excavator.
Grader.
Dump trucks.
Attachment
ITP No:
QCF, Visual inspection Report.
#14
Construction of floor slab central
control building
Top
Index
Scope
Reference Documents
Definition
Responsibilities
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment

students knowledge
38 of
Scope
Construction of the floor slab to the Central Control Building.
Documents
Grade Slab General Arrangement
Grade Slab Sections
Foundation Details Penetration
Definitions
Responsibilties
The CS shall plan and resource the Structrual Backfill activity to achieve the required
compaction as per the specification. The site test laboratory shall conduct and verify the
compaction crireria.
The surveyors shall be responsible for setting out the exact levels of fill and concrete up to
designated drawings.
The construction Foreman shall actually lead the execution operations by directing all Foreman
and workforce as necessary.
Safety
Prior to the commencement of any of the required activities, the Labour force shall receive a
tool box talk on the Project Site Safety requirements.
Method
The slab on grade level shall be casted over compacted fill by using a separation Polyethylene
Membrane. The slab is divided into two main portions.
The low level portion at EL shall have a smooth level finish in order to receive the bases of the
access panel system. This portion is to be cast in panels to give the required joints as specified
on the drawing.
The high Level portion at EL shall be cast in panels according to the required joints shown on
the drawings. The surface finish for this section shall be rough since Tiling and flooring
systems are to be applied. In Electro-Mechanical rooms the surface finish shall be smooth to
receive the epoxy coating finish as specified.
General Curing shall be carried out to the norms of the Project Specifications.
All cable trenches and separating Wall shall be cast up to levels and dimensions specified on
related drawings.
Equipment
Crane 50Ton 2 No.
Flat Bed Trailor 40 Ton 1 No.
Water Tanker 1 No.
Labour
Casting Engineer 1 No.

students knowledge
39 of
Placing Engineer 1 No.
Casting Foreman 1 No.
Placing Foreman 1 No.
Carpenters 20 Nos.
Steel fixers 30 Nos.
Masons 20 Nos.
Laborers 40 Nos.
Attachment
None.
#15
Mortar for blockwork
Top
Index
Scope
Reference Documents
Definition
Responsibilities
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
production of mortar for use with the blockwork activities.
Documents
Masonary
Definitions
Responsibilties
The CS shall plan and resource the blockwork activity, to achieve the required combination of
workmanship and material quality.
The construction Foreman shall actually lead the execution operations by directing all the
workforce as necessary.
Safety
Prior to the commencement of any of the required activities, the Labour force shall receive a
tool box talk on the Project Site Safety requirements.
Method

students knowledge
40 of
The block supplier shall be submitted for approval to EPC Contractor.
The sand aggregate for the mortar shall be submitted and approved by EPC Contractor.
Potable water from the Operating Authority source shall be used for mixing sand and cement.
Storage of materials shall be on appropriate seggregated suitable areas adjacent to the work
place with no possibility of contamination or deterioration of the materials.
Mortar shall be mixed mechanically on site using standard boxes for measuring sand for each
batch. The amount of water required shall also be defined depending on water cement ratio.
The ingredients shall be mixed thouoghly until a uniform mix is achieved.
Mix production quantiry in one batch shall be limited to a volume which can be consumed
within the initial setting time of cement. The remixing of martar by adding additional water shall
not be permitted.
Once the mortar is produced, it shall be taken to the workplace and used within specified
setting time that is generally 2 hours of adding into the mixer.
Equipment
Cement mixer
Gauge boxes
Hand tools.
Attachment
None.
#16
Control of camp sewage system
Top
Index
Scope
Reference Documents
Definition
Responsibilities
Safety
Method
Attachment
Scope
The purpose of this method statement is to actions that shall be implemented to monitor and
control the sewage holding tank status, so that overflow is avoided.
Documents
Method statement Waste Management.
Definitions
CB Camp Boss
TM Transport Manager.
Responsibilities
The PSM shall be responsible for the implementation of the preventative measures.

students knowledge
41 of
The CB shall execute the required monitoring and record keeping of the investigation.
The TM shall ensure the provision of the disposal tankers as and when required.
Safety
All relevant safety issues including hygiene precautions shall be implemented, monitored and
maintained for this activity. The site safety department shall monitor the sewage disposal
areas.
Method
A new water meter to record water usage shall be installed prior to the water storage tanks.
For the next one month, regular readings at specific times shall be recorded to establish water
requirement trends.
The information collected from this exercise shall help to understand the peak demand periods
which also define the sewage disposal requirements.
In parallel to this water input recording, a survey of the sewage holding tanks filling trends shall
be established.
A tank volume indicator system shall be installed at every sewage holding tank.
This indicator system shall consist of a visible indicator rod. Based on a float system, the rod
shall raise up as the holding tank fills. This visual system shall remind the CM to organise the
emptying of the tank. Data obtained from the tanker drivers on number of loads discharged,
shall help verify the water meter quantity to establish leakage’s.
The existing provision for the trucking of the sewage waste shall be monitored. The fleet
capacity shall be increased as required based upon the results of the survey.
A review of the collected data shall be conducted after one month to supplement existing
operational criteria as required. The responsibility for compiling the information shall be with
the camp boss who ensure that water consumption is regularly monitored, that areas of water
abuse are identified, that holding tank emptying schedule established as well as formulating
measures to conserve and re-cycle water wherever possible.
Initial trucking capacity that is dedicated to the sewage disposal activity is ‘two trucks’. These
trucks operate on both suction fill and pump fill systems.
The survey shall review and confirm the required trucking levels needed to service the holding
tanks.
Attachment.
N / A
#17
Structural steel-piperacks
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Definitions
Responsibilities
Safety

students knowledge
42 of
Method
Equipment
Scope
The purpose of this Method Statement is to define the sequence and methodology that shall
be implemented for the Erection of the steel structure piperacks.
Reference Documents
Specification Grouting
Specification Steel Structure Fabrication
Specification Painting
Specification Galvanizing
Specification Project Preservation and Export Packing
Relevant IFC drawings.
Definitions
CS Construction Superintendent .
EF Erection Foreman.
Responsibilities
The CM shall plan and resource the steel structure erection activities, to ensure that they are
implemented according to this procedure, with the correct equipment resources.
The CS shall ensure that all safety requirements are implemented and explained to the
erection workforce. The CS shall control the day to day activities
The EF shall control the workforce ensuring the full implementation of this method statement
including all safety measures.
Safety
Prior to the commencement of any activity, the labour force shall receive a Toolbox Talk on the
Project Site Safety Requirements. Any process that is adopted that may have a particular
Safety risk, shall be assessed and addressed as required.
The use of cranes shall be assessed and all safety regulations enforced.
Men working at height shall be equiped with the required personal safety equipment
Method
Materials Receivables.
All Structural steel material to be used for permanent works shall be received on site in the
appropriate laydown area. All tems shall be inspected to conduct a check of the delivery
against necessary shipping documents.
All structural steel members shall be checked for quantity, quality and identification.
Then all materials shall be properly stored and protected.
Concrete Foundations.
The surface of the concrete foundation shall be prepared in accordance with the specification,
to receive grout.
All concrete foundations on which the steel structures are to be erected shall be released by
the QC department upon completion of the civil activity.
Fasteners (Bolts, Nuts & Washers).

students knowledge
43 of
Upon receipt on site of the fasteners, a minimum of one sample (1bolt, 1 nut,& 1 washer) shall
be selected and tested by an independent laboratory to confirm specification conformance.
Assembly Of Grid Frames
Material for the necessary grids shall be placed near to the area of erection. This shall be
carried out using a suitable trailer & a 50 ton crane.The grid frames for both rows (A&B) shall
be assembled. All bolts, washers and nuts shall be fitted, fastened and tightened.
Erection Of Columns Grid Frames.
Stainless steel shim plates to the correct thickness of approx. 25mm shall be placed at the
center of the foundation column between the holding down bolts. The shim plates shall be
retained in position permanently by surrounding with mortar to avoid shim displacement during
the erection of the columns. The shim placed on the foundation shall be embedded in mortar
bed such that the top of the shim is level in all planes.
The grid frames shall be installed leveled and plumbed on the foundation bases. Stay ropes
shall be provided to maintain stability until such time when the horizontal members are
connected. The stays shall be secured to purpose made anchor plates attached to adjacent
foundations. Foundation bolts shall be only hand tightened. (Necessary tightening or torquing
shall be done later after grouting).
Horizontal members and the bracings that interconnect these grid frames shall be assembled
and erected.
The assembly of Verticals and Horizontal members shall be in sections. On completion of each
section with all bolts and nuts in place and tightened, the final level and alignment shall be
checked and inspected.
Grouting
After the structural steel frame assemblies have been inspected by the QC department, the
application of grouting shall be carried out according to the Specifications & manufacturer’s
instructions.
Equipment
Crane 30Ton 50 Ton
Flat Bed Trailor to transport fabricated members to the location at site
Fork lift – for minor movement of steel members
Guy ropes and tensioning equipment
Man baskets whenever required
Scaffolding (Movable & Non-movable Types)
Air Compressor
Impact Wrench
Welding Generator( if required)
Gas Cutting Equipment (if required)
Portable Grinding Machines
Portable Drilling Machines
Exclusively written by PEng Suraj Singh

students knowledge
44 of
#18
Compressors’ structures
RCC column plate inserts
Top
Index
Scope
Reference Documents
Definition
Responsibilities
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
The purpose of this method statement is to define the sequence and methodology that shall be
implemented for the inclusion of RCC column plate inserts.
Documents
Specification
Drawing No:
Definitions
FM Foreman
Responsibilities
CM shall plan and resource the required materials ensuring that these are implemented
according to this procedure.
CM shall ensure that all the Safety requirements are implemented and explained to the
relevant work force and control the day to day activities.
CS shall ensure the implementation of technicalities involved.
FM shall control the work force ensuring the full implementation of the procedure.
Safety
Method
1. Place & fix the column reinforcement be in design locations.
2. Make the fabricated forms ready.
3. Drill the holes on the marked locations on the forms ’2’ sides according to the
attached sketch to receive inserts holding bolts.

students knowledge
45 of
4. Fix the column inserts plates assembly on the fabricated forms and the bolts
fastened as per sketch.
5. Erect the forms, support, well secure and concrete pour be carried out.
6. Having the pour been over, before striking the forms, the threaded bolts be taken
out.
7. Later the holes left shall be filled with Galvanised threaded rod 15mm long.
Equipment
Fabricated Plates with Threaded holes, Pins and Bolts.
Attachment
Sketches
#19
Excavation for
132kv
cable interconnection
Top
Comments incorporated
Duct bank construction added
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Definitions
Responsibilities
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
This statement is aimed to present the proposed procedures to be adopted to carry out the
excavation in preparation for laying of the 132 KV electric cable from the GUP power station
through to the Company project site substation.
Reference documents
Specification , Excavation & Backfilling for Underground structures.
Definitions

students knowledge
46 of
CS Construction Superintendant
FM Foreman
Responsibilities
The CM shall plan and resource the trench excavation and backfilling activity, in accordance
with this method statement.
The CS shall control, coordinate and supervise all the activities directing the Construction
Foreman
The Construction Foreman shall practically execute these activities, direct the workforce as
necessary and report to the CS for all day to day operational matters.
EPC Contractor shall control all the activities.
Safety
Prior to the commencement of any activities, the labour force shall receive a tool box talk
every day on the project site safety requirements. Any process to be adopted having a
particular safety risk shall be assessed and addressed as required.
Method
Permits for the involved area excavation shall be obtained from the relevant authorities.
The surveyor shall set out the proposed route of the electric cable trench per IFC drawings.
Any existing services shown on these drawings or on the record drawings shall be located and
identified by an EPC Contractor approved method (i.e. catscan). Wherever necessary, trial pits
shall be manually excavated to expose the existing services.
Wherever, the protection of the existing services are required, adequate protection and
warning shall be installed. Cables or pipes that span the excavation shall be supported. Rigid
ducts and trays shall be provided to protect and support these cables. All existing services
encountered, shall be plotted by the surveyor on an as-built drawing.
The trench shall be excavated by a track excavator to the correct lines and levels. Wherever
necessary or as defined on the work permit, manual hand excavation shall be carried out.
The sides of the excavation shall be sloped. Barriers shall be placed to indicate an open
excavation.
The excavated material shall be stockpiled along the trench areas for re-use. Surplus material
shall be removed to the tip area by dump trucks. The surveyor shall monitor the lines and
levels of the excavation activity.
Upon EPC Contractor inspection, the excavated trench shall be released for the next
operation as indicated upon the activity ITP following which, compaction of the formation level
be carried out to the specified density. The field compaction test report shall be submitted.
The surveyor shall provide suitable level pins that indicate the correct elevation of the sand
bedding required for the cables. The sand bedding shall be laid and compacted in accordance
with the specification. The cables shall be placed correctly within the trench in line with the
IFC drawings. Cables shall be laid by the electrical department upon completion of which,
EPC Contractor release the trench for the backfill and subsequent activities. Suitable approved
backfill material shall be placed in layers, compacted around the cable & field tested.
Cable tiles and warning tape shall be placed on top of the sand fill per approved drawing.
This backfill activity shall continue up to existing ground level & the site left tidy

students knowledge
47 of
For the construction of the duct banks, the duct pipes shall be laid according to the sectional
design details with fixing arrangements, forms erected to the required profiles. The concrete
shall be poured at various intermediate locations in the first instance to create temporary
downward anchor to counteract any possible duct uplift by the underducts fluid concrete
upward pressure. When the arrangement is completed, the whole section be concreted to the
defined level & finished accordingly.
Major Equipment
Cable Markers.
Excavation equipment.
Dump trucks.
Compactors.
Attachment
None
#20
Road crossing for 132 kv route
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Definitions
Responsibilities
Safety
Method including traffic management scheme
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
The purpose of this method statement, is to define the sequence and methodology for the
excavation and laying of PVC ducts , that shall cross existing roads at locations identified on
the attached drawing part .
Reference documents
Specification. Excavation & Backfilling for Underground structures.
(INTERCONNECTS UNDERGROUND LAYOUT DRAWING SHEET ‘ 5 ‘)
Definitions
FM Foreman
Responsibilities
CM shall plan and resource the trench excavation and backfilling activity, in accordance with
this method statement.
The Construction Foreman shall monitor these activities, directing the workforce as necessary.

students knowledge
48 of
EPC Contractor shall control the service laying activities.
Safety
Prior to the commencement of any activity, the labour force shall receive a tool box talk on the
project site safety requirements. Any process that is adopted having a particular safety risk
shall be assessed and addressed as required.
A competent inspector shall inspect the trench daily to assess the safety measures adopted
as well as after every rainstorm. If required , the shoring shall be provided to prevent the
caving in . In case of the trench depth being more than 1200 mm , adequate means of exit
such as ladder or steps shall be provided and located no more than 8 m of lateral travel.
Barricades , markers and the night lights etc., shall be arranged as required.
Method
The required permit to work shall be obtained from the Plant Refinery Division.
A traffic management scheme that has been presented herein as detailed on the attached
sketch for this road crossing which includes, reduced speed sign, temporary diverted roads
sign, men at work sign, warning signs, informatory signs, safety barriers,night lighting and road
cleaning activities shall be implemented on site after review & approval by EPC Contractor
prior to commencing the work.The aforesaid traffic management scheme is described below
Traffic Scheme Road Crossing
Inter Connects Underground Layout Drg
This proposed crossing is located on the road avenue C as shown on the attached sketch
This is a 2 way road with a central verge and carrying 2 lanes on either way
The road shall be divided in 2 parts as shown on the sketch as lane L1 and L 2 on either
side of the carriage way
In the first instance the work shall be carried out on part L1 diverting the traffic to the road
portion on the part L2 as shown on the sketch
In the second instance the work shall be carried out on part L2 diverting the traffic to the road
portion on the completed road portion on the part L1 as shown on the sketch
The first reduce speed for traffic diversion informatory board depicting shall be located at 300
m from the point of the proposed crossing, the second depicting diversion sign be located at
200 m and the third depicting men at work sign be located at 100 m on either way in the
opposite directions.
The first section of road crossing as per the attached sketch shall be marked by the surveyor
on the actual road location. Any existing services shall be identified and protected.
The asphalt shall be cut using a mechanical cutter machine.
The road section shall be excavated to the correct level using mechanical means and removed
from the site to stock pile area.
The excavated material shall be removed to a stockpile area.
Appropriate bedding material shall be placed within the excavated trench to the correct service
level. Wherever required, this bedding shall be compacted and tested for field density.
The cable ducts or service pipes shall be laid at the required levels and profile according to the
drawings as well as the specifications and approved by the EPC Contractor’s Engineer.
Backfill around the service pipes shall be carried out with the appropriate approved material.
This service pipe surround material shall be compacted complying with the project
specifications. Test results shall be reported.

students knowledge
49 of
General fill up to the underside of road formation shall be placed in 150mm layers compacted
mechanically complying with the specifications.
A concrete slab shall be cast up to the bottom of the finished asphalt level and the finishing
done by using approved asphalt mix .
The traffic management system shall be removed after the road crossing has been cleaned of
any debris or obstructions.
Either side of the road shall be provided with cable markers to indicate the services
Equipment
Excavator .
Dump trucks.
Compactors.
Attachment
Sketch showing the traffic diversion.
Sketch showing the location of the proposed crossing.
#21
Night shift working - earthworks
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Definitions
Responsibilities
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
The purpose of this method statement, is to define the procedure that shall be adopted for the
earthworks activity during Night Shift.
Reference documents
Specification
Definitions
EPC Contractor
Civil Contractor
SO Safety Officer
Responsibilities
The PSM shall ensure that adequate site management and supervision is available for night
shift working.

students knowledge
50 of
A dedicated SO shall patrol the site during the night shift activities, and where necessary,
stopping the work if an unsafe situation arises.
The necessary work permits shall be obtained prior to the start of the night shift activities.
Safety
The SO shall ensure all those persons who shall work on the night shift activities, are fully
aware of the safety obligations expected from them. The emergency procedure for first aid
shall be explained to every body. (Refer to the safety plan for night shift working).
All equipment that shall operate on the site shall be in full working order with appropriate
lighting.
Method
The activities that are schedules to be carried out during night shift comprise of excavation,
hauling, stockpiling, spreading, leveling, watering and compaction. These activities do not
require any specific QC inspection coverage other than the supervisor surveillance.
The IS shall prepare the schedule define the work faces of the night shift activity prior to
beginning.
The work faces shall be illuminated by using tower-mounted easily repositionable floodlights.
The routes which the construction equipment shall use for hauling ‘the excavated materia’,
shall be made safe prior to work commencing.
The area for stockpiling the material shall also be illuminated.
A banksman wearing a high visibility vest shall direct the stockpile area. Similarly, a banksman
shall direct the excavation area. The two banksmen shall be in communication with each other
by two way communication facilities (mobile phones).
The earthwork supervisor and the SO shall patrol the entire site overseeing all activities.
Emergency Procedure.
The Safety Officer shall be responsible for coordinating the night shift emergency procedure.
Upon an emergency arising, the Safety Officer shall be notified.
The Safety Officer shall immediately alert the relevant emergency services if so required.
997 for Fire or civil defence
998 for an Ambulance.
999 for Police.
The Safety Officer shall notify the Safety Manager of the emergency occurence. Should the
camp doctor be required, he shall be notified. The Safety Manager shall attend the emergency
and take control of the situation.
The required notification, investigation and reporting of the emergency shall be conducted in
accordance with the site HSE plan.
First Aid.
First aid facilities shall be made available for night shift operations at the camp clinic.
The Safety Officer shall have the telephone number of the camp doctor who be summoned in
the event of first aid requirements and emergencies.
Equipment
Excavators.
Dump trucks.
Attachment

students knowledge
51 of
None.
(Revised)
Additional manufacturer’s instructions for mixing incorporated
Form details amended
Manufacturer’s method statement attached
#22
Grouting to pipe rack foundation bases
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Definitions
Responsibilities
Safety
Method
Equipment
Scope
The purpose of this Method Statement is to grout the annular space between the foundation
top and the structural steel base plates.
Reference Documents
Specification
Definitions
CS Construction Superintendent .
FM Foreman.
Responsibilities
The CM shall plan and resource the Cementitious grout activities, to ensure that they are
erection workforce. The CS shall control the day to day activities
The FM shall control the workforce ensuring the full implementation of this method statement
Safety
Prior to the commencement of any activity, the suitably qualified labour force shall receive a
Toolbox Talk on the Project Site Safety Requirements. Any process that is adopted that may
have a particular Safety risk, shall be assessed and addressed as required.
About the Chemical effect, Masks to be worn, Safety glasses and gloves to be used
Areas of Activity to be Barriered Off / No Unauthorized Entry,
Sufficient Lighting to be provided where necessary.

students knowledge
52 of
Method
The surface to be grouted shall be chipped / scabbled without using mechanical bush
hammer to expose the aggregate and remove the laitance. The finished surface shall be free
from oil, dust , dirt, paint, curing compounds etc and be soaked in with water for 24 hours prior
to grouting to minimize the localized absorption as well as to assist the free flow of the grout.
The bolt holes / pockets shall be waterfree prior to placement of grout.
The baseplates / bolts shall be clean and free of oil, grease and paint and correctly aligned
according to the approved drawings.
The stainless steel shims 50x50x10 mm thick shall be in correct locations covered with mortar
so as to allow at least 50 mm grout cover on shim sides.
The forms as shown on the attached sketch shall be erected on the defined locations provided
with chamfers.
An electric drill fitted with a paddle shall be used for the grout mixing purpose using water @
3.5 to 4.5 litres per 25 kg bag of Master flow 928 according to product datasheet.
The mixer shall be clean with no standing water.
Let 90 % of the applicable quantity of water required to achieve the desired consistency to
meet the batch volume per manufacturer’s datasheet be added to the mixer before adding the
grout and the Masterflow be added gradually while simultaneously, pouring in to the mixer the
remaining 10 % water quantity during mixing which has to be kept on for at least 3 to 5 minutes
until a uniform lump free consistency is achieved.
The grout shall be poured continuously using the grout pour cone with a constant hydrostatic
head of at least 15 cm
Having poured the grout Masterflow 928 in place, cover all exposed grout material with clean
damp Hessian and be kept moist until grout is firm enough to accept a curing membrane
The temperature range 4 to 32 degree C shall be maintained for the 3 post pour continuous
days.
The grout thickness varies between 25 to 50 mm.
Equipment
Peddle Mixer
Grout Flow Cone
Attachment
Sketch
Masterflow Catalogue
Masterflow Method Statement
#23
Cementitious grouting to foundation
bases
Top

students knowledge
53 of
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Safety
Method
Equipment
Scope
This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to grout the base plates of
the stationary equipment / vessels foundation bases.
Reference Documents
Specification
Safety
Prior to commencement of any activity, the labour force shall receive a STARRT
Card / Toolbox Talk relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety
requirements. Necessary measures shall be applied to any process involving a safety risk
Safety Supervision
A competent inspector shall visit the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted. Any
snag observed during his visit shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act
to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard
Method
The surface to be grouted shall be chipped / scabbled without using mechanical bush
hammer to expose the aggregate and remove the laitance.
The finished surface shall be free from oil, dust , dirt, paint, curing compounds etc and soaked
with water for 24 hours prior to grouting to minimize the localized absorption as well as to
assist the free flow of the grout.
The pockets shall be waterfree prior to placement of grout.
The baseplates shall be clean and free of oil, grease and paint and correctly aligned in line
with the approved drawings.
The stainless steel shims 50x50x10 mm thick shall be in correct locations covered with mortar
so as to allow at least 50 mm grout cover on shim sides.
The forms as shown on the attached sketch shall be erected on the required locations with
chamfers.
An electric drill fitted with a paddle shall be used for the grout mixing purpose using water @
3.5 to 4.5 litres per 25 kg bag of Master flow 928 according to requirement.
The mixer shall be clean with no standing water.
Let 90 % of the measured quantity of water required to achieve the desired consistency
according to the batch volume be added to the mixer before adding the grout and the
Masterflow be added gradually ,simultaneously pouring in the remaining 10 % water quantity
during mixing , which has to be kept on for at least 3 to 5 minutes until a uniform lump free
consistency is achieved.
Let the grout be poured continuously using the grout pour cone with a constant hydrostatic
head of at least 15 cm

students knowledge
54 of
Having poured the grout Masterflow 928 in place , cover all exposed grout with clean
dampen Hessian and be kept moist until grout is firm enough to accept a curing membrane
The temperature range 4 to 32 degree C shall be maintained for the 3 post pour continuous
days
Major Equipment
Peddle Mixer
Grout Flow Cone
Attachment
Sketch
#24
Etylene compressor
Massive foundation (concrete pour)
Top
Index
Scope
Reference Documents
Definition
Responsibilities
Safety
Method
Attachment
Scope
implemented for the Concrete pour of the Ethylene Compressor Foundation.
Documents
Specification
Drawing No:
Definitions
FM Foreman
Responsibilities

students knowledge
55 of
Safety
Method
1. Pour Size = (14.86 x 11.24 – 2.56 x 0.84) 1.7 = 280.2892 approximately
2. Pour Plan = In Strips Courses of each 11.24m x 2m x 0.4m i.e. width wise (8.992
each).
3. Sequence of strips shown in attached details in numbers.
4. Time of Pour commencement 7.30 / 8.00 Hrs.
5. Plants - Concrete Pumps 1No.
Batching Plant 1No. Full Time. / Stand by 1No.
Transit mixer 7 Nos. 7m³ each
Delivery continuous @ 7minutes intervals.
6. Pour Duration 6 to 7 hrs.
7. Equipment:
 Vibrator – Pneumatic / Diesel Operated 3 Nos. (2Nos.in use and 1 Stand by)
and 3 Nos. on other sites.
8. Curing-Thermal
 Immediate Post Pour: By Curing Compound covered by Polythene membrane.
 Post Pour Set concrete: By removing Polythene, adding saturated Hessian,
recovering with Polythene membrane and filling clean sand 150mm except the
column portion which shall be surrounded by small sand embarkments. The sand
shall be kept sprayed with water.
9. Water Supply: By tank, full tank ready on site with 50m water hose pipe.
10. Manpower:
Concrete Crew
 Foreman - 1 No.
 Steel fixers – 2 Nos.
 Carpenters – 2 Nos.
 Masons - 12 Nos.
 Helper - 12 Nos.
11. Specifications
High Slag blast furnace cement to BS 4246 with 70% replacement utilising 30%
ASTM C150 Type II cement for use in massive concrete.
12. Concrete Temperature 30°C.
Slump 150 – 175mm
Attachment
1 Sketches
2 Plan of Pour
3 Sectional Sequence details of pour layers.

students knowledge
56 of
#25
Propane compressor
Massive foundation (concrete pour)
Top
Index
Scope
Reference Documents
Definition
Responsibilities
Safety
Method
Attachment
Scope
implemented for the Concrete pour of the Ethylene Compressor Foundation.
Documents
Specification
Drawing No:
Definitions
FM Foreman
Responsibilities
Safety
Method:
1 Pour Size = (12.0 x 7.5 – 2 x 0.44 x 0.78) 1.7 = 151.833 approximately
2 Pour Plan = In Strips Courses of each 7.5 x 2 x 0.4m i.e. width wise (6.0m³ each).
3 Sequence of strips shown in attached details in numbers.
4 Time of Pour commencement 7.30 / 8.00 Hrs.

students knowledge
57 of
5 Plants - Concrete Pumps 1No.
Batching Plant 1No. Full Time. / Stand by 1No.
Transit mixer 7 Nos. 7m³ each
Delivery continuous @ 7minutes intervals.
6 Pour Duration 5 to 6 hrs.
7 Equipment:
a. Vibrator – Pneumatic / Diesel Operated 3 Nos. (2Nos.in use and 1 Stand by)
and 3 Nos. on other sites.
8 Curing-Thermal
a. Immediate Post Pour: By Curing Compound covered by Polythene membrane.
b. Post Pour Set concrete: By removing Polythene, adding saturated Hessian,
recovering with Polythene membrane and filling clean sand 150mm except the
column portion which shall be surrounded by small sand embarkments. The sand
shall be kept sprayed with water.
9 Water Supply: By tank, full tank ready on site with 50m water hose pipe.
10 Manpower:
Concrete Crew
i. Foreman - 1 No.
ii. Steel fixers – 2 Nos.
iii. Carpenters – 2 Nos.
iv. Masons - 12 Nos.
v. Helper - 12 Nos.
11 Specifications
12 High Slag blast furnace cement to BS 4246 with 70% replacement utilising 30% ASTM
C150 Type II cement for use in massive concrete.
13 Concrete Temperature 30°C.
Slump 150 – 175mm
Attachment
1 Sketches
2 Plan of Pour
3 Sectional Sequence details of pour layers.
#26
SeaWater Basin
Baffle Walls (concrete pour)
Top
Index
Scope
Reference Documents
Definition
Responsibilities

students knowledge
58 of
Safety
Method
Attachment
Scope
For pouring the baffle walls 9 #s located on the deeper end slope of section AA between the
PCJ and the commencement of the falls as the width of the slope being 5.35m.
Since no provision of the starter rebars has been made for the slope portion at the ‘slab base
level’ for the baffle walls to be connected with then to ensure the structural stability, we
propose the following operational descriptions for the construction execution of these
elements.
Documents
Drawing No:
Definitions
FM Foreman
Responsibilities
Safety
Method
Stage 1: Pouring the walls in full heights between the wall designated ‘M’ and the
construction joints locations.
Stage 2: Pouring the portion of the baffle walls between the construction joint and the wall
end upto a level of 7.14m from the slab base.
Stage 3: Pouring the remaining portion of the baffle walls from the level 7.14 upto the level
13.5 with a simple construction joint at the level of 7.14m.
Attachment
None.
#27

students knowledge
59 of
SeaWater Basin
Minor Concrete Repair at Kicker Face
Top
Index
Scope
Definition
Responsibilities
Safety
Equipment
Material
Method
Attachment
Scope
For minor concrete repair specially at kicker face Filling of Tie rod holes.
Reformation of grooves for sealant on floor slabs and walls.
Definitions
FM Foreman
Responsibilities
Safety
Safety risk, shall be assessed as required. Use of safety glasses, gloves, mask, etc., shall be
made.
Equipment
ROADCRAFT model #. 5615 NEEDLE Scaler (Light version for removal of rust, welding slag,
old paint etc.)
Material
Material Epoxy bonding agent MBT Concresive 1414 (permanent epoxy adhesive for internal
or external bonding for renderings, concrete repairs, bonding concrete to concrete, steel and
granolithic toppings)

students knowledge
60 of
MBT Masterflow 544 (High strength, non shrink cementitious mortar ready to use product in
powder form requiring only on site addition of water to produce a non–shrink mortar of
predictable performance formulated for use at plastic consistency for bedding, repairing,
grouting and void filling such as concrete repairs, void filling between old and new concrete,
filling tie bar holes etc.)
Method
1 The existing surface shall be scabbled, all loose concrete and mortar drippings removed
by using a single head scabbler and / or RODCRAFT model # 5615 NEEDLE scaler.
2 Epoxy bonding agent MBT Concresive 1414 shall be applied by brush and allowed to cure.
3 MBT Master flow 544 shall be mixed with water in small pails by hand complying with
manufacturer’s data sheet and trowelled onto the surface.
4. Approved curing compound shall be applied immediately
5 A wooden strip 25mm wide X 20 mm deep shall be placed at the centre of the joint on the
existing rebates in the floor slabs as well as walls and the space on either side be filled
with MBT Master flow 544 to obtain a clear rebate of X-size 25mm x 20 mm followed by
removal of the wooden strip within an hour of fill and the reformed surfaces be sprayed
with approved curing compound.
Attachment
Manufacturers Catalogue
#28
Seawater basin
(water tightness BS 8007: 1987)
Top
Index
Scope
Definition
Responsibilities
Safety
Method / Procedures
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
To transport the Sea Water to the Sea Water Basin and Testing the basin
Definitions
FM Foreman
Responsibilities
CM shall plan and resource the required materials and plants ensuring that these are
implemented according to this procedure.

students knowledge
61 of
Safety
Prior to the commencement of any activites, the labour force shall receive a toolbox talk on
the Project Site Safety requirements. Traffic directory signs for the ramp breakers on 3
nos road crossings shall be installed. On the exposed pipe route the safety tags shall be
installed with cones. A protection arrangement shall be made for the plants at the
intake. A full time attendant shall keep the watch and ward on the route.
Procedures involved
Laying a 100 mm dia hose from the sea to the sea water approximately1800 m. Refer to
sketch point # 1 to # 8 i.e. intake at sea and discharge to the basin respectively.
Constructing a concrete anchor at the sea to fix the intake pipe spout horizontally and
vertically as well as to fix 2 # heavy duty centrifugal pumps at point #1
There are 3 nos road crossings en-route at points 2, 5 and 6 on which temporary 150 mm
dia pipe sleeves are to be inserted in the form of the ramped speed breakers.Ref to the
sketch. Otherwise, sleeves shall be inserted by road cutting, filling and making good when
the job is over
Install a ‘round the clock’ generator to supply electricity to the pumps with the Distribution
Board at point # 1 or to have electric connection through an alternative source.
Install a timber clamping platform on the ditch at point # 4
Water Heads calculations indicative only
At intake suction 1 m
At intake disposal 1 m
Vertical head loss 25 m
At point Nos. 8 loss 10 m
Total vertical head loss 37 m
Length of Pipe for friction loss 1800 m 4 f l v v / 2 g d
= 4x.015x1800x1.5x1.5 / 2x 9.81x.1=123.9m
Total head loss = static loss + dynamic loss = 37 +123.9 = 160.90 m
Work done= 42000x160.9 kgm, bhp = 42000x160.9 / 270000= 25 units, ihp = 35 units
The water flow velocity has been assumed to be 1.5 m / sec giving a discharge of 42 cum
per hour. It shall take 20 days to reach 20000 cum of water to the basin keeping round the
clock pumping.
SEA WATER BASIN PLANNED PUMPING
DAY # QTYPUMPED
IN
QTY
CUMM
CUM CUM
1 1008 1008
2 1008 2016
3 1008 3024
4 1008 4032

students knowledge
62 of
5 1008 5040
6 1008 6048
7 1008 7056
8 1008 8064
9 1008 9072
10 1008 10080
11 1008 11088
12 1008 12096
13 1008 13104
14 1008 14112
15 1008 15120
16 1008 16128
17 1008 17136
18 1008 18144
19 1008 19152
20 1008 20160
21 1008 21168
First phase Testing
The tank completed with Protective Coatings as specified and sealant applied shall be
cleaned and filled to the normal maximum level to meet the requirement of clause 9.2
BS 8007 : 1987 Testing of structures i.e. upto 11.5 m which should take 14 days and
then be retained for a stabilising period of 7 days for a maximum design crack width of
0.1 mm, allowing absorption and the autogenous healing.
Test period starts now for 7 days and the drop in level recording be made every 24 hours
during this 7 days period. Total permissible drop in level allowing evaporation etc. should
not be more than 1 / 500 of the average water depth of the full tank which limits to 10
mm or another specified or calculated amount.
Having the test been successful, the backfill shall be carried out
Second phase Testing
Let the tank be further filled upto 13 m level i.e another 7 days
Stabilisation period Another 7 days (for absorption and autogeneous healing)
Test period Another 7 days (level drop recording at an interval of 24 hours)
Basin Filling and Testing Schedule
S #
Description of the operation Duration in
days
Remark
1 Ist phase water pumping 14 Pumping from sea
2 Retained water stabilisation to
allow absorption and
autogeneous healing
7
3 Testing at 24 hour intervals and
monitoring
7 Loss should not be more
than 1 / 500 of average
fullwater depth or 10 mm
or other specified value

students knowledge
63 of
but excluding evaporation.
4 Backfilling after successful
testing
14
5 II phase water pumping 7 Pumping from sea
6 Retained water stabilisation
and autogeneus healing
7
7 Testing at 24 hours intervals 7
8 Water loss monitoring Loss should not be more
than 1 / 500 of average
fullwater depth or 10 mm
or other specified value
but excluding evaporation
The code provides that notwithstanding the satisfactory completion of the test, any
evidence of seepage of the liquid to the outside faces of the liquid retaining walls should
be assessed against the requirement of the specification. Any necessary remedial
treatment of the concrete, cracks or joints should, where practicable, be carried out from
the liquid face. When a remedial lining is applied to inhibit leakage at a crack, it should
have adequate flexibility and have no reaction with the stored liquid.
Should the structure not satisfy the 7 days test then after the completion of the remedial
work, it should be refilled and if necessary, left for a further stabilising period followed by a
further test of 7 days’ duration should then be undertaken in accordance with this clause.
Equipment.
Pumps IHP 35, 2 Nos.
Other General Arrangements
Attachment
Sketch showing the Hose Route
#29
Road Crossing for 132 kV route
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Definitions
Responsibilities
Safety

students knowledge
64 of
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
excavation and laying of PVC ducts, that shall cross existing roads at locations identified on
the attached drawing part.
Reference documents
Drawing No. (INTERCONNECTS UNDERGROUND LAYOUT ‘)
Definitions
FM Foreman
Responsibilities
Safety
A competent inspector shall inspect the trench daily to assess the safety measures adopted as
well as after every rainstorm. If required, the shoring shall be provided to prevent the caving
in. In case of the trench depth being more than 1200 mm, adequate means of exit such as
ladder or steps shall be provided and located no more than 8 m of lateral travel. Barricades,
markers and the night-lights etc., shall be arranged as required.
Method
A traffic management scheme which includes, reduced speed sign, temporary diverted roads
sign, men at work sign, warning signs, informatory signs, safety barriers, night lighting and
road cleaning activities
has been presented herein that shall be produced on site as detailed on the attached sketch
for this road crossing.
The traffic management scheme shall be reviewed and approved by EPC Contractor prior to
commencing the work.
The aforesaid traffic management scheme shall be implemented as described below:
Traffic Scheme Road Crossing
Drawing reference
Inter Connects Underground Layout

students knowledge
65 of
This proposed crossing is located on the road avenue C as shown on the attached sketch.
This is a 2 way road with a central verge and carrying 2 lanes on either way
The road shall be divided in 2 parts as shown on the sketch as lane L1 and L 2 on either side
of the carriage way.
portion on the part L2 as shown on the sketch.
portion on the completed road portion on the part L1 as shown on the sketch.
The first reduce speed for traffic diversion informatory board depicting shall be located at 300
m from the point of the proposed crossing, the second depicting diversion signs be located at
200 m and the third depicting men at work sign be located at 100 m on either way in the
opposite directions.
The first section of road crossing as per the attached sketch shall be marked by the surveyor
on the actual road location. Any existing services shall be identified and protected.
The asphalt shall be cut using a mechanical cutter machine.
The road section shall be excavated to the correct level using mechanical means and the
excavated material removed from the site to stock pile area.
level. Where required, this bedding shall be compacted and tested.
The cable ducts or pipes service shall be laid at the required levels and profile complying with
the drawings, the specifications and approved by the EPC Contractor Engineer.
Backfill around the service shall be conducted using the appropriate material. This service
surround material shall be compacted as per the project specification requirements. Test
results shall be provided for the specification conformance verification.
General fill up to the underside of road formation shall be placed in 200mm layers and
compacted to 150mm using mechanical methods complying with the specification
requirements.
A concrete slab shall be cast up to the bottom of the finished asphalt level and the finishing
shall be done by using approved asphalt mix.
The traffic management system shall be removed after the road crossing has been cleared of
Equipment
Excavator.
Dump trucks.
Compactors.
Attachment
Sketch showing the traffic diversion.
Sketch showing the location of the proposed crossing.
#30
Administration building
Stair landing extension at grid 4 j

students knowledge
66 of
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Definitions
Responsibilities
Safety
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
The aim of this statement is to define the methodology how the extension to the existing part
of the stair first flight landing at grid 4 J shall be effected to and connected to the existing RCC
column as well as the correction to the proposed rebars to be placed in the portion of the first
flight.
Reference documents
Definitions
FM Foreman
Responsibilities
Safety
Particular safety shall be taken to cover the drilling in concrete activity and the pouring in the
resin into the holes.
The person grinding the concrete, drilling and filling in wear safety glass, gloves, masks etc.
Method
The proposed method involves the following procedures:
Extend the RCC landing from its existing line to the outside face of the column at grid 4 J.
Provide a shear key at the connection as shown for the extension as well as at column face
Maintain the flight width 1450 mm as designed keeping the column face flush with the waist
line of the first flight.

students knowledge
67 of
Arrange the rebars in the manner to be placed within the above dimensions according to the
details on drawing no…...
To accomplish the above operations, preparatory works shall be carried out as usual for the
form fixing and reinforcement placement.
A ground cut for the shear key shall be provided in the middle 1/3 portion 25 mm deep for the
bondage according to the sketch shown on the revised drawing ……. which continue across
the column face also.
Hilti HIT - HY 150 resin anchor system shall be used to dowel in the rebars for the extension
portion into the existing RC landing using 16 T dia bars into 22 mm dia. drilled hole 240 mm
long according to the manufacturer’s instructions (System already approved). Hilti drill machine
TE 75 with 22 mm dia drill bits and the Hilti pouring gun kit 2000 shall be used.
The dowels shall be approved by the EPC Contractor engineer.
The remaining procedures shall be the usual operations regarding the RCC.
Equipment
Grinder, Hilti drill TE 75, Drill bits 22 mm dia, Kit 2000,
Material HIT HY 150 In Cartridges according to the requirement.
Attachment
Extract of Drawing
#31
SeaWater Basin
Minor Concrete Repair at Kicker Face
Top
Comments incorporated
Material already approved
Repairable depth shown on the sketch
Preparation & application modified
Curing method specified
MINOR COMMENTS INCORPORATED
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Definitions
Responsibilities
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope

students knowledge
68 of
This statement is aimed to describe the procedures to be used to carry out making good the
existing concrete surfaces by rectifying the undulations formed during the slope pour
through cut outs on the top side slope shutters by the application of a shrinkage
compensated , high strength repair mortar reinforced with acrylic fibres on the broken and the
prepared surface.
The repairable thickness is only 10 mm.
Definitions
FM Foreman
Responsibilities
CM shall plan and resource all the activities in accordance with this method statement.
The Construction Foreman shall monitor these activities, direct the workforce as necessary.
EPC Contractor shall control the activities.
Safety
The work personnel shall be given a Tool Box talk every day before the commencement of any
activity relevant to the operational requirements according to the Project Safety Needs.
In addition to the general safety measures to use personal safety Equipment,
all persons to work on the demolition breaker, and the proprietary products application shall
wear gloves, masks safety glasses etc
Equipment
Hilti Demolition Breaker TE 905 complete
Pointed mechanical chisel ( Bushing tool TP-SKHM 60 )
Material
EMACO S88C T in bags 25 kg each
Sodapcure WH curing compound
METHOD
A shrinkage compensated , high strength repair mortar reinforced with acrylic fibres
The area to be repaired shall be marked on site
A depth of 10 mm from the proposed top level of concrete surface on the effected areas shall
be broken out to remove all substandard concrete using Hilti demolition breaker. The vertical
edges shall be cut with a grinder.
The substrata shall be prepared to a rough surface having at least 5-mm amplitude at 20-mm
frequency
The prepared surface shall be sound, dense, free of all oil, grease, loose and fractured
aggregate or other contaminants that could impair adhesion between the repair mortar and the
prepared concrete surface.
Thoroughly the repairable surface shall be wetted in to provide a ‘saturated surface dry
condition’. Any standing water shall be removed prior to application of the mortar is
commenced
Priming of concrete

students knowledge
69 of
Prior to the application of EMACO S 88 CT , the concrete shall be wetted out with potable
water to give a saturated surface dry condition. No further bonding agent is required as per
manufacturer’s instructions.
TEMPERATURE CONDITIONS
EMACO S 88 CT shall be used when the ambient temperature is between +5 degree Celsius
and 50 degree C, otherwise chilled water be utilised to prevent the mix temperature exceeding
32 degree C
Substrata temperature should not be less than 5 degree C. In hot weather, areas to be
repaired shall be shaded to prevent from direct sunlight
MIXING
Hand mixing with trowel or similar of EMACO S 88 C T is not permitted according to the
manufacturer’s instructions, therefore, a low speed electric drill with paddle attachment with a
forced action mixer shall be used.
Water addition shall be between 3.5 to 4 litres of potable water per 25-kg bag.
The required quantity of water shall be poured into the pre- wetted mixing drum, and mixer
started followed by the addition of EMACO S 88 C T powder rapidly and continuously,The
mixing shall continue for 3 to 4 minutes after all the powder has been added until the mortar is
homogeneous and lump free
More water shall be added within the limits given, if necessary,until the required consistency is
achieved and mixed for a further 1-minute.
APPLICATION
After mixing, EMACO S 88 C T , the material shall be trowel applied by forcing into the
prepared substrate ensuring intimate contact and good compaction
The surface of the placed mortar shall be levelled using a wooden float. Final finishing mat is
done with a steel trowel.
CURING
Curing shall be done by spraying the approved compound SODAPCURE WH
A polythene membrane shall be used to protect the finished surface from the wind blown sand.
Attachment
Manufacturer’s method statement
Sketch showing section
#32
Fencing
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Definitions
Responsibilities
Safety

students knowledge
70 of
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
construction and erection of the site security fencing.
Reference documents
Specification
Standard Drawing
Standard Drawing
Site Fence Location drawing
Definitions
CS Construction Superintendent.
Responsibilities
The CS shall plan and resource the fencing activities, to ensure that they are constructed and
erected according to the specifications.
The Construction Foreman shall monitor the precasting and erection activities, directing the
workforce as necessary.
Safety
the project site safety requirements. Any process that is adopted that may have a particular
safety risk, shall be assessed and addressed as required.
Method
Precast elements.
A precast yard shall be established as shown on the attached sketch. The casting beds shall
be such that pouring, stripping, curing and coating can be achieved easily. A casting cycle of 4
days is anticipated for casting, initial curing and coating, prior to removal to site.
Easily assembled and stripped steel prefabricated moulds shall be utilized for the fence
foundation and ground beam.
Fence erection.
The final grade level of the area shall be the commencement point for the fence construction.
A level survey shall demonstrate the accuracy of the site grading activity.
The Survey Team shall set out the line and level of the fence, including post locations for all
elements.
Using a machine mounted auger, 300 and 450mm diameter holes as appropriate, shall be
drilled for the fence post foundations.
The drilled holes shall be cleaned and bedded to the correct base level.
The fence post foundation shall be placed in the drilled hole to the correct line and level.
Dune sand shall be compacted around the foundation.
The fence fabric shall be strung and tensioned as per the drawing details and manufacturers
recommendations attached items 1.14 through 1.21
Using hand tools, a trench shall be excavated for the ground beam.

students knowledge
71 of
The ground beam shall be placed to the correct line and level.
Suitable fill material shall be used to compact around the ground beam.
The fence fabric tie staple shall be grouted in position once the fence fabric is tensioned.
The gap between the ground beams, at the location of the fence post, shall be concreted to
form a continuous beam.
QC procedures shall be closed out on an on-going basis.
Equipment
Concrete Mixer truck.
Auger machine.
Wagon with hyab.
Plate compactor.
Attachment
Drwg no:
Drwg no:
Method statement for Link Middle East Ltd, Fence manufacturer.
#33
Ceramic tiles flooring system
Top
Index
Scope
Definitions
Responsibilities
Safety
Material
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to construct the
‘ceramic tiles flooring system’ which involves the laying of the bedding screed as well as the
finishing layer with grouting the joints including movement joints.
Reference documents
Drawing Nos.
Specifications
UBC & general construction practice
Definitions
CSM Construction Manager

students knowledge
72 of
FM Foreman
QC Quality Control
Responsibilities
PSM shall control the overall operations
CM shall arrange the resources required accordingly
CS shall control, monitor and direct the FM and workforce for the operations
FM shall execute the operations deploying the workforce
QC shall inspect all the operations according to the specifications
EPC Contractor shall conduct surveillance
Safety
The workers shall receive a Tool Box Talk according to the project requirement relevant to the
operation concerned every day prior to commencement of the activity
Proper illumination shall be provided in the dark area
The area to be tiled shall be closed for the general movement except those working there and
be opened only when the tiling has properly been completed with hardboard cover protection
spread on the newly laid flooring.
Materials
Ceramic floor tiles 300 x 300 x 10mm,
For General Area ‘RAK GP 21 G’ and for wet areas Johnson ‘Athena’
Joint filling grout – Approved proprietary material with matching shade.
Method
(Laying ceramic floor tiles by SEMI DRY method)
The areas of concrete sub strata to be tiled shall be brush cleaned and dampened until
absorption ceases followed by the finished floor level establishment by means of dots and
rules.
The total thickness of the ceramic tile flooring is 100 mm which includes 90 mm bedding
screed (1 cement: 4 mortar sand) by weight and shall be applied as described below.
The finishing layer shall be ceramic tiles 10 mm thick and be laid as described below.
The mortar for bedding the tiles shall be 1 part cement to 4 parts sand by weight, mixed semi
dry by a mechanical mixer with only sufficient water added to give a crumbly consistency which
retains its shape when squeezed by hand permitting no fluidity
The mix shall be placed to a thickness approximately 10 mm greater than that actually required
for the bed, thoroughly compacted by tamping and drawing off to the required level with a
screed board. Only sufficient mortar shall be mixed and spread as can be covered with tiles
before it attains its initial set.
Civil Contractor QC visual inspection shall be conducted
A slurry of 1 part cement to 1 part sand by volume shall be poured over the surface of the
semi – dry mix bedding and spread with a trowel until it is approximately 2 mm thick
Dry tiles shall then be laid on the slurry and beaten firmly into position with a wooden beater
ensuring a true surface contact between the tiles and bedding is formed.

students knowledge
73 of
The tiles shall be correctly positioned in both directions the time these are placed forming
joints using a proprietary tile spacer ( 1.5 mm for wall tiles and 3 mm for floor tiles)
The tiles shall neatly and accurately be cut to a close fit where necessary at abutments,
around outlets, pipes and the like.
Civil Contractor QC Inspection shall be conducted for the correct formation of joint alignment
and the level profile
The tiles shall be laid level or to 1- % falls in ‘wet’ areas as may be required. Localised
variations in level for a nominally flat floor shall be a maximum of +- 2-mm under a 3-meter
straight edge. Particular care shall be taken in ‘wet’ areas to prevent low spots that may
promote water pooling. The tolerance in the overall level shall not be more than 10 mm from
required finishes. (Reef STQ )
Grouting of the joints shall be carried out within a period of not less than 24 hours after
completion of laying of tiles so as to allow the grout attach itself firmly to the bedding.
MOVEMENT JOINTS IN TILED FLOORS
Unless otherwise indicated in the documents, a 10 mm movement joint shall be formed at the
perimeter of all the tiled floors and where the tiling meets structural features such as columns,
machine bases etc.,
Where a structural movement joint is provided in the base, a movement joint of the same width
in the bedded finish shall be positioned immediately above
The movement joint cavities shall extend through the combined thickness of the finish and the
bedding mortar, completely filled and sealed after grouting of the normal joints takes place.
Major Equipment
Mechanical Mixer
Wheel barrows
Mason’s tools in general
Attachment
None
#34
Top
Index
Scope
Definitions
Responsibilities
Safety
Material
Method
Equipment

students knowledge
74 of
Attachment
Scope
Reference documents
Drawing Nos.
Specifications
Definitions
FM Foreman
QC Quality Control
Responsibilities
Safety
The workers shall receive a Tool Box Talk according to the project requirement relevant to the
Materials
Method
A continuous procedure to lay tiles over the cement mortar screed
rules.
screed (1 cement: 4 mortar sand) by weight and shall be applied as described below.

students knowledge
75 of
The finishing layer shall be ceramic tiles 10 mm thick and be laid as described below.
A slurry of 1 part cement to 1 part sand by volume shall be poured over the surface of the
semi – dry mix bedding and spread with a trowel until it is approximately 2 mm thick
Dry tiles shall then be laid on the slurry and beaten firmly into position with a wooden beater
ensuring a true surface contact between the tiles and bedding is formed.
required finishes. (Reef STQ Q)
Grouting of the joints shall be carried out within a period of not less than 24 hours after
completion of laying of tiles so as to allow the grout attach itself firmly to the bedding.
Movement joints in tiled floors
machine bases etc.,
Major Equipment
Mechanical Mixer
Wheel barrows
Attachment
None
#35

students knowledge
76 of
Plastering and rendering
Top
Index
Scope
Definitions
Responsibilities
Safety
Material
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
This statement is aimed to present the proposed procedures to be implemented for
carrying out the plastering and rendering operations. The term ‘plastering’ herein is meant for
the internal surfaces while ‘rendering’ for the external.
Reference documents
Drawing Nos.
Project specifications Nos. (For Sand) BS Code 1199, Table 1, (for Hydrated Lime) BS Code
890 Class B, (for cement) ASTM C150, (for galvanized metal lath, stops and beads) BS 1369,
(for preparation and application) UBC
Definitions
FM Foreman
Responsibilities
CM shall plan and organise the Plastering and Rendering works in accordance with this
Method Statement.
The Construction Foreman shall monitor these activities, directing the workforce as per Site
requirements.
Safety
Prior to the commencement of work, the labour force shall receive the tool box talk on the
Project Site Safety requirements. Any process that is adopted which may have a particular
Safety risk, shall be assessed as required as per Site conditions and shall be taken care of. In
addition to that proper mason’s scaffolding arrangements shall be made for providing access
to the required heights adopting all relevant safety measures.
Method

students knowledge
77 of
Preparation of backgrounds to be plastered or rendered
All surfaces to be plastered and rendered shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dust and loose
particles.
Concrete surfaces shall be scabbled by mechanical means to remove all laitance exposing the
aggregates to 3 mm depth
Civil Contractor / EPC Contractor inspections shall be conducted for the approval of the
prepared surfaces.
A slurry coat consisting of 400 kg Cement (white) to 1 cum of sand (No. 1 White Silica) as
specified shall be applied on the surface by trowel and 1-day allowance given for the
succeeding coat to commence with.
Block work surfaces shall have the joints raked out as specified (Ref) during construction.
Junctions of different background and the chases for the electrical conduits as well as other
service pipes shall be treated by fixing 200mm wide metal lath. Plastering shall not commence
until all the mechanical and electrical services, conduits, pipes and Ist stage fixtures have been
installed and approved.
Where a rendering or plaster is to be continuous across backgrounds of different types, a strip
of metal lath minimum 300 mm wide with an isolating membrane of polythene sheet or building
paper behind, shall be fixed across the junction. Where small widths of one material less than
300 mm wide are involved e.g. a concrete column, beam or slab dividing block panels, the
width shall be bridged completely for a distance of 150 mm on both sides.
The metal lath shall be stretched out and fixed along each edge at 100 mm centres using
stainless steel fasteners such as washers and shot fired pins, nails or screws and lapped joints
tied with galvanized wire, the screws fixed into plugs in predrilled holes if so required.
Metal lath shall not be provided where drawing shows a groove in the rendering or the plaster.
Fixing beads and stops
Beads, stops and the like shall be fixed plumb, square and true to line with clout nails or
plaster dabs at not more than 600 mm centres to each mesh wing.
Corner / angle beads at all openings as well as plaster ground stops at terminals shall be
installed by using stainless steel fasteners. Profile dots shall be formed on the surfaces.
Civil Contractor / EPC Contractor inspection shall be conducted for the proposed profile
approval.
Preparation of mixes for plastering or rendering
Slurry coat
400 kg cement: 1 cum sand
Second and third coats
300 kg cement: 50 kg lime: 1 cum sand
Plaster thickness
19 mm walls and 14 mm ceilings
The hydrated lime shall first be thoroughly mixed with sand and then cement added keeping
mixer on until the material is uniform in appearance, suitable to receive water which at this
stage be added in sufficient quantity to produce the mix stuff workable, uniform in colour and
consistency.
To improve the workability of the mix, the hydrated lime, sand and water may first be mixed in
the required proportion with allowance to stand undisturbed for at least 16 hours before mixing

students knowledge
78 of
with cement. If allowed to stand for a longer period, the ingredients mix must be protected
from drying out. The whole of the batch shall be used within an hour of being mixed
Application of the various plaster or render coats
The work shall not start until the background has been prepared and all the services have
been finished according to requirement and the relevant specifications as described earlier.
Slurry coat shall be trowel applied allowing at least one day to start the succeeding coat
Two render coat applications shall be carried out.
Before applying any coat, the background or the preceding coat shall be brushed down to
remove any loose particles and dampened sufficiently to ensure uniform absorption.
First coat shall be trowel applied and scored to form a key for the second coat allowing at least
one day before the start of the next coat. The undercoat shall be applied either by laying on
with or throwing from a trowel or float, as uniformly thick as possible and not less than 8 mm or
more than 13 mm thick in any part.
The undercoat shall be left rough and open by the edge of the trowel after it has been long
enough to set firm, be combed with evenly spaced wavy horizontal lines approximately 20 mm
apart and 5 mm deep (less in case of first coat on metal lathing). The surface shall not be
scratched, however, when it is to receive a Tyrolean finish.
First undercoat applied to metal lathing shall be well worked into the lath to ensure that the
material is completely embedded.
The finishing coat shall be steel trowel applied
The finishing coat shall not be less than 5 mm or more than 10 mm thick and shall be laid on
with a trowel and finished with a steel float, taking care not to over work the surface.
All coats shall be applied with firm pressure to exclude air and to ensure a good bond.
Plaster shall be rodded and straightened to uniform surfaces in true planes. Laps of one coat
shall not occur over laps of preceding coat. Each coat shall finish free from cracks, checks or
other structural defects. Finish surfaces shall be flush with grounds / stop beads, corner
beads, outlet boxes and similar details, free from trowel marks, other blemishes displaying
straight arises and true angles.
All coats shall be prevented from drying out too quickly and the work be carried out in shade
during hot period. All renderings shall be protected by properly constructed hessian or similar
screen during hot period
Each coat shall be kept damp by means of a fog spray of water for a minimum of 3 days to
allow before a subsequent coat is applied or in the case of a finish coat, before the protective
screens are removed
The surface of the finish coat shall be smooth, true and free from waviness, irregularities or
blemishes with straight, level or plumb angles. External angles shall be pencil rounded
Care shall be taken when rendering up to beads or stops to avoid excessive polishing at the
arris and damage to the galvanizing.
Inspections for the approval shall be conducted.
Equipment
Mixer
Attachment.
None
#36

students knowledge
79 of
Roofing system
Top
Index
Scope
Definitions
Responsibilities
Safety
Material
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
This statement is aimed to present the procedures, sequences of operations and all the other
details that shall be worked on the proposed roofing system to be laid over the suspended roof
slabs.
Reference documents
Drawings Nos.
Specifications, Construction practice
Definitions
FM Foreman
Responsibilities
CM shall plan and organise the works to be carried out by the specialist contractor in
accordance with this Method Statement.
The Construction superintendent shall control , monitor and direct the Foreman regarding the
operations as required
The Construction Foreman and the supervisor of the specialist contractor shall execute the
work according to the CS direction and direct the work personnel to carry out the operations as
per Site requirements.
Safety

students knowledge
80 of
addition the work shall not be carried out during fast winds and dust storms. All workers shall
use masks and safety glasses in addition to other PPE.
The insulation boards shall be protected from the excessive exposure to sunlight.
Specialist Contractor
Materials
DERBIT PASTA, DERBIGUM UNIGUM, MGP, ROOF MASTER, TERRAM 700, PRECAST
CONCRETE TILES 500 X500 X50 MM form part of MAR 046 were approved subject to the
comments .
The clarification on the DERBIGUM MGP – This is the membrane flashing from the same manufacturer
of horizontal membrane and is a product finished with mineral granules to make it solar reflective as
well as UV resistant, shall be used for the reason that:
It is not recommended to mix a self adhesive membrane with a torch applied membrane as both are not
compatible
From the experience in this climate it has been observed that the textured Aluminium faced membrane
tends to delaminate after a few months if left exposed (due to the different co –efficient of expansion
between the metal and the bitumen)
For the aforesaid reasons the manufacturer recommend a mineral granules faced membrane as these
special solar reflective granules are spread over the bitumen while still hot and form part of the roof
membrane.This flashing membrane complements the main roof membrane and with this combination
on vertical exposed areas the performance is guaranteed for the specified period.
Aluminium Flashing- MAR 113 Dated 8.2.2000
It is confirmed that the proposed Aluminium Flashing for the roof upstands is a plain mill finish
manufactured to BS 1470 / ASTM B 209 Alloy, H 14 mill finish
Method
The roofing system shall be carried out to the following operational sequences.
Construction of all large foundation pads if any, prior to the commencement of the system
laying.
Preparing the proposed area over RCC slab, parapet walls and upstands ready by fixing in
positions all roof drains, cleaning the roof etc.,
Laying the Light Weight screed using foam concrete
Constructing an angle fillet around
Priming with DERBIT PASTA and applying DERBIGUM UNIGUM the water proofing
membrane over the screed.
Applying flashing membrane MGP over the vertical exposed part of water proofing layer
Water test for 72 hours
Laying ROOF MASTER insulation boards 75 mm thick
Laying in TERRAM 700 membrane
Laying loose the precast concrete tiles 500 x 500 x 50 mm
Installing Aluminium flashing as specified and approved
On the existing RCC suspended slab all large foundations if any, shall be constructed prior to
commencing any roofing system operation. A groove shall be formed around the periphery of
the area, pad foundations and other upstands at a specified height from the slab level for
tugging the water proofing membrane into the parapet with sealant applied over.
All services drains or other necessary items required to be in place prior to the roofing starts
shall be completed in all respects including grouting. The area shall be cleared and made dry.

students knowledge
81 of
Inspection shall be conducted.
The lightweight screed using special foam concrete shall be laid in to the following mix design
to produce a density of 650 to 750 Kgs / cum
Sand / Cement: 1 / 1
Cement: 350 Kg / cum
Sand: 350 Kg / cum
Water: 210 Lit / cum
Foaming agent: 1.2 Lit / cum
The ingredients shall be mixed using a mechanical mixer, an aerator and a pump.
The surfaces to be laid with screed shall be formed using mortar dabs to the specified profiles
to 1 % slope. The foam concrete screed shall be laid in two layers to avoid settlement. The
second layer shall be laid when the first has dried out followed by forming smooth finish to the
required falls and cross-falls
Inspection shall be conducted
The completed screed shall be cured with fresh water for two days and thereafter, left for one
day to dry out.
A cement sand angle fillet of 50 x 50 mm triangular cross section shall be formed at all
directional changes.
Before laying in water proofing membrane, a coat of DERBIT PASTA bituminous primer shall
be applied to all the proposed surfaces.
Once dried, laying in 4 mm DERBIGUM UNIGUM membrane shall be commenced with by full
torching over the primed screed allowing 100 mm wide side and end overlaps. The dressing
shall be carried out over the angle fillet and upstands properly terminating into the preformed
grooves by tugging the membrane into the groove as well as rainwater outlets and around
penetrations.
The exposed vertical surface of the membrane shall be protected by applying 4 mm thick MGP
flashing membrane 300 mm girth, mineral surface finished, UV resistant, torched over main
membrane and tugged into groove as aforesaid.
Inspection shall be conducted
The surface shall be flooded with water for a period of 72 hours after plugging in all the roof
drains
After successful completion of the test, water shall be drained out and the membrane left for
being dried out. The ROOF MASTER insulation boards with rebated edges 75 mm thick shall
be laid over the dry membrane ensuring all areas are properly covered.
The TERRAM 700-filter membrane with 100 mm overlaps shall be laid over top of the
insulation boards. All small and light precast pedestals / foundations for the cable trays, pipe
supports etc., if any, shall be loosely laid over the filter membrane.
Inspection shall be conducted by the manufacturer’s representative and all coordinations
made.
A warranty for the specified period of 10 years shall be issued by the specialist contractor and
the Civil Contractor according to the contract requirement
The concrete paviors in the form of pre cast concrete tiles 500mm x 500 mm x 50 mm shall be
laid loose over the ITALPROFILI PVC TILE PADS to be provided at all the intersections and

students knowledge
82 of
at the corners as shown on the sketch. At the borders where cut tiles may be required, gravels
of nominal size 15 – 30 mm filling shall be carried out to create a good aesthetic.
The membrane shall be tugged into the groove and sealed with JOINT SEAL bituminous
Mastic.
Plain mill Aluminium flashing 0.90mm thick, 80 mm girth, cut and bent to the required profile
shape shall be fixed with stainless steel screws above the groove covering and protecting the
sealant all according to details.
Major Equipment
Mixer
Aerator
Pump
Attachment
#37
Buildings Roofing system
Top
Index
Scope
Safety
Material
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the operations
on the proposed roofing system over the suspended slabs on buildings.
Reference documents
Drawings Nos.
Safety
Prior to commencement of any activity, the labour force shall receive a STARRT Card /
Toolbox Talk relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements.
Necessary measures shall be applied to any process involving a safety risk

students knowledge
83 of
M / S Al Nahda Contracting and Trading Company Limited
PO Box # 1053, Sharjah
Materials
CONCRETE TILES 500 X500 X50 MM form part of MAR were approved subject to the
comments.
The clarification on the DERBIGUM MGP – This is the membrane flashing from
the same manufacturer of horizontal membrane and is a product finished with
mineral granules to make it solar reflective as well as UV resistant, shall be used
for the reason that:
It is not recommended to mix a self-adhesive membrane with a torch-applied membrane, as
both are not compatible
From the experience in this climate it has been observed that the textured Aluminium faced
membrane tends to delaminate after a few months if left exposed (due to the different co –
efficient of expansion between the metal and the bitumen)
For the aforesaid reasons the manufacturer recommend a mineral granules faced membrane
as these special solar reflective granules are spread over the bitumen while still hot and form
part of the roof membrane. This flashing membrane complements the main roof membrane
and with this combination on vertical exposed areas, the performance is guaranteed for the
specified period.
Aluminium Flashing- MAR
Method
commence any roofing system operation. A groove shall be formed around the periphery of the
area, on the pad foundations and other upstands at a specified height from the slab level for
tugging waterproofing membrane into the parapet with sealant applied over.
All services drains or other necessary items required to be in place prior to the roofing
commences, shall be completed in all respects including grouting. The area shall be cleared
and made dry.
An Civil Contractor QC Inspection shall be conducted.
Sand: 350 Kg / cum

students knowledge
84 of
to 1 % slope. The ‘foam concrete screed’ shall be laid in two layers to avoid settlement. The
An Civil Contractor QC Inspection shall be conducted
day to dry out.
Before laying water proofing membrane, a coat of DERBIT PASTA bituminous primer shall be
applied to all the proposed surfaces.
torching over the primed screed allowing 100mm wide side and end overlaps. The dressing
shall be carried out over the angle fillet and upstands properly terminating into pre formed
penetrations.
Exposed vertical surface of the membrane shall be protected by applying 4 mm thick MGP
Application on the AC foundation & upstands shall be carried out according to the details
shown on the sketch
A Civil Contractor QC Inspection shall be conducted & ITP signed off
Whole surface shall be flooded with water for a period of 72 hours after plugging in all roof
drains
After successful completion of the test, water shall be drained out and the membrane left to dry
out. ROOF MASTER insulation boards with rebated edges 75 mm thick shall be laid over the
dry membrane ensuring all areas are properly covered.
TERRAM 700-filter membrane with 100-mm overlaps shall be laid over top of the insulation
boards. All small and light pre cast pedestals / foundations for the cable trays, pipe supports
etc., if any, shall be loosely laid over the filter membrane.
An inspection shall be conducted by the manufacturer’s representative and all coordination
made.
Concrete paviors in the form of pre cast concrete tiles 500mm x 500 mm x 50 mm shall be laid
loose over ITALPROFILI PVC TILE PADS to be provided at all the intersections and at the
corners as shown on the sketch. At the borders where cut tiles may be required,
gravel(nominal size 15 – 30 mm) filling shall be carried out to create a good aesthetic.
Mastic.

students knowledge
85 of
Plain mill Aluminium flashing 1 mm thick, 80 mm girth, cut and bent to the required profile,
shall be fastened with stainless steel screws above the groove, covering and protecting the
Major Equipment
Mixer, Aerator, Pump
Attachment
Sketch (Typical upstands and at AC Foundation)
Sub Contractor’s method Statement
Clarification regarding DERBIGUM MGP
Clarification regarding Aluminium Flashing
Clarification regarding 10 years guarantee
Clarification regarding 72 hours water test
#38
Buildings Roofing system
Top
Index
Scope
Safety
Material
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the operations
on the proposed roofing system over the suspended slabs on buildings.
Reference documents
Drawings Nos.
Safety

students knowledge
86 of
M / S Al Nahda Contracting and Trading Company Limited
PO Box # 1053, Sharjah
Materials
CONCRETE TILES 500 X500 X50 MM form part of MAR 046 were approved subject to the
comments.
The clarification on the DERBIGUM MGP – This is the membrane flashing from the same
manufacturer of horizontal membrane and is a product finished with mineral granules to make
it solar reflective as well as UV resistant, shall be used for the reason that:
It is not recommended to mix a self-adhesive membrane with a torch-applied membrane, as
both are not compatible
From the experience in this climate it has been observed that the textured Aluminium faced
membrane tends to delaminate after a few months if left exposed (due to the different co –
efficient of expansion between the metal and the bitumen)
For the aforesaid reasons the manufacturer recommend a mineral granules faced membrane
as these special solar reflective granules are spread over the bitumen while still hot and form
part of the roof membrane. This flashing membrane complements the main roof membrane
and with this combination on vertical exposed areas, the performance is guaranteed for the
specified period.
Aluminium Flashing- MAR
Method
commence any roofing system operation. A groove shall be formed around the periphery of the
area, on the pad foundations and other upstands at a specified height from the slab level for
tugging waterproofing membrane into the parapet with sealant applied over.
All services drains or other necessary items required to be in place prior to the roofing
commences, shall be completed in all respects including grouting. The area shall be cleared
and made dry.
A Civil Contractor QC Inspection shall be conducted.
Sand: 350 Kg / cum

students knowledge
87 of
to 1 % slope. The ‘foam concrete screed’ shall be laid in two layers to avoid settlement. The
A Civil Contractor QC Inspection shall be conducted
day to dry out.
Before laying water proofing membrane, a coat of DERBIT PASTA bituminous primer shall be
applied to all the proposed surfaces.
torching over the primed screed allowing 100mm wide side and end overlaps. The dressing
shall be carried out over the angle fillet and upstands properly terminating into pre formed
penetrations.
Exposed vertical surface of the membrane shall be protected by applying 4 mm thick MGP
Application on the AC foundation & upstands shall be carried out according to the details
shown on the sketch
A Civil Contractor QC Inspection shall be conducted & ITP signed off
Whole surface shall be flooded with water for a period of 72 hours after plugging in all roof
drains
After successful completion of the test, water shall be drained out and the membrane left to dry
out. ROOF MASTER insulation boards with rebated edges 75 mm thick shall be laid over the
dry membrane ensuring all areas are properly covered.
TERRAM 700-filter membrane with 100-mm overlaps shall be laid over top of the insulation
boards. All small and light pre cast pedestals / foundations for the cable trays, pipe supports
etc., if any, shall be loosely laid over the filter membrane.
An inspection shall be conducted by the manufacturer’s representative and all coordination
made.
Concrete paviors in the form of pre cast concrete tiles 500mm x 500 mm x 50 mm shall be laid
loose over ITALPROFILI PVC TILE PADS to be provided at all the intersections and at the
corners as shown on the sketch. At the borders where cut tiles may be required,
gravel(nominal size 15 – 30 mm) filling shall be carried out to create a good aesthetic.
Mastic.
Plain mill Aluminium flashing 1 mm thick, 80 mm girth, cut and bent to the required profile,
shall be fastened with stainless steel screws above the groove, covering and protecting the

students knowledge
88 of
Major Equipment
Mixer, Aerator, Pump
Attachment
Sketch (Typical upstands and at AC Foundation)
#39
Cracked gas compressor table top concrete
pour
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Definitions
Responsibilities
Safety
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
This statement is aimed to present the proposed procedures to be adopted to pour the Table
Top of the framed beam structure.
References
Drawing nos.
Specifications and Rev D
Safety
addition proper scaffolding according to the project requirements shall be erected around the
area to be poured along with providing complete access system such as stepped stairs and
the working platforms with top and the bottom guardrails.
The area shall be cleared on ground allowing free access to the concrete pumps, transit
mixers water tank etc., and the provision of the night lights shall be made for curing

students knowledge
89 of
Materials
The gross volume of the pour is 173 cum
The volume of the steel plates inserts is 1.08 cum
The applicable volume of the pour is 170 cum approximately.
(Details of the calculations attached).
According to the specification the pour pertains to the definition of massive structure, hence
C 30 high slag blast furnace cement to BS 4246 with 70 % replacement utilising 30 % ASTM
C 150 Type II cement shall be utilised for the batching according to the specified design mix
with the placing temperature not more than 24 degree Celcius
Curing materials such as curing compound, polythene sheets, bur lap sheets / hessians and
water shall be available according to the requirement
Plants and Equipment
Batching plant 1 # and 1 standby
Concrete pump 1 # and 1 stand by
Transit mixers 6 #
Vibrator 2 # and 2 standby
Water tanker 1 #
Manpower
Masons 6 #
Carpenters 3 #
Steel fixers 3 #
Scaffolder 3 #
Helpers 7 #
Method
The drawing shows the above pour to be carried out into 13 sections by forming 16
construction joints. Pour sequences are described as Pour ‘A’ and Pour’B’. A total of 5 pours
‘A’ sections, all shown to be concreted prior to Pour ‘B’. Remaining 16 Pours ‘ B’ sections
shown to be concreted after 14 days of the Pour ‘A’ completion. But according to the decision
vide STQ , the Table Top shall be poured one time monolithically without formation of any
construction joint.
The quantitities involved have been detailed in the attachment.
The overall procedures that shall be carried out have been given as follows
Erection for the preparatory works horizontal forms for the complete pour based on the
properitory details from SGB drawings
Placing the insert plates on the horizontal forms and if required some tangs be welded or tied
by binding wires to the rebars by link rebars
Placing the holding down bolts sleeves in the proper locations as shown on the drawings
Placing and binding all the design rebars to the drawings’ details.
Placing and fixing the vertical and the top plates on the vertical forms.
Erecting preparatory works vertical forms in positions
Aligning all forms, the insert plates and the bolt sleeves from the shown ’ centre line of
Turbine Exhaust axis’ to be used as a reference line.
Inspection and approvals.

students knowledge
90 of
Pouring details
The pour shall commence from East End and be accomplished in 4 layers according to the
attached sequences details proportioned in 12 sections.
The concrete temperature shall not be more than 24 degree Celcius as specified for the
massive structures.
Immediately after pouring is finished, curing compound shall be sprayed and the surface be
covered with polythene membrane.
Lator within 2 hours polythene shall temporarily be lifted, the saturated hessian spread and the
polythene relaid.
A layer of insulation material 100 mm thick shall be laid over the polythene, covered with ply
sheets to keep the insulation material intact / in place for 72 hours for thermal curing, and
thereafter, the routine curing shall continue for the specified period.
The differential thermometers shall be used to record the temperature variations.
Attachment
Q.A. Procedures
Pour sequence plan
Pour quantities
Insert plates volume
#40
Water tightness tests for the collection
sumps according to BS 8007:1987 section 9
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Definitions
Responsibilities
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
This statement is aimed to present the proposed procedures(Typical) that shall be adopted to
conduct the water tightness tests for the following water retaining structures.
Collection sump Utilities East

students knowledge
91 of
Collection sump Ethylene
Collection sump Utilities East
Collection sump Utilities South
References
Definitions
FM Foreman
QC Quality Control
Responsibilities
Safety
Prior to the commencement of work, the labour force shall receive the toolbox talk on the Project Site
Safety requirements. Any process that is adopted which may have a particular Safety risk, shall be
assessed to the requirement for Site conditions and be taken care of. The safety barricades shall be
erected around the sumps.
Night hazard indicator light illuminaries shall be installed on the necessary locations.
No unauthorised persons shall be allowed to enter the test area.
Materials
Water requirements
For 70-TB-201 370 cum and 5 % for stabilisation period
For 70-TB-202 237cum and 5 % for stabilisation period
Method
This test requires the following operational sequences to be completed prior to
conductance such as
Complete RCC construction of the structure
Complete filling of the tie rod holes with MBT Master Flow 544
External Protection to the concrete surfaces with Bitustick XL, Polybit- Corrotech
Civil Contractor QC Inspection and the approval of the membrane
Structural Backfilling around the tank to the required level with compaction tests
Cleaning the surface of the structure by using waterjetting
Application of the floor screed as specified
The following operations shall be required to conduct the water tightness test
A graduated stick shall be provided on wall top to show the water levels to a’ mm’ count
Filling the structure with potable water to the maximum supply level

students knowledge
92 of
After water filling, 7 days allowance to stabilise for absorption and autogeneous healing.
Test to be conducted for 7 days for a design crack width of 0.1 mm.
Recording the water losses at 24 hours intervals by simple measurements or by float indicator.
Monitoring the seepage and marking the locations.Recording level losses
After the test completion, pumping the water out and transporting off the site.
Post water tightness test
MBT shall produce a representative sample for approval prior to the coating is applied
Approval of the sample by EPC Contractor / Client
Applying the concrete protection approved coating material according to the representative
sample on the internal surfaces of the structure as specified.
Inspection of the applied coating by Civil Contractor QC followed by EPC Contractor approval
Details
70-TB-201 / 202 / 203 Inlet pipes 600 mm dia and for 205 inlet pipes 450 and 400 mm dia to
be in place according to the levels shown on the drawings as reflected on the schedule as the
Inverted level for maximum supply level.
The structure to be tested shall be completed of all RCC constructions according to the
specified and agreed procedures.
The tie rod holes shall be filled with Master Builder Technology MBT Masterflow 544
according to the instructions
The external surfaces of the structure shall be prepared for the specified application
Inspection of the prepared surface by Civil Contractor QC followed by EPC Contractor
approval
The external surfaces of the concrete around shall be applied with the specified protective
system Bitustick XL, Polybit
Inspection of the applied membrane by Civil Contractor QC followed by EPC Contractor
approval
Structural backfilling shall be carried out according to the project specifications
Necessary fileld density tests shall be conducted by Civil Contractor and laboratory
All the aforesaid operations shall be completed prior to the commencement of the water
tightness test
The structure to be tested shall be cleaned to the requirement by using waterjetting on the
entire surface of concrete removing all loose spalls, dust dirt etc.,
The internal surfaces shall be inspected by Civil Contractor QC followed by EPC Contractor
approval
Civil Contractor QC Inspection shall be conducted before the test commences
EPC Contractor approval shall be obtained.
Water tightness test shall be conducted according to the BS 8007 : 1987 Section 9.1
applicable to liquid retaining structures
Potable water shall be filled into the respective sump pit structures at a rate 2 m per 24 hours
for which the attached filling scheduled quantities shall apply.
The records of the test shall be documented on the attached sample form QCF 61
STRUCTURE LEAK TEST form and the judgement on the test shall be made accordingly
SCHEDULE PLANNED FOR THE PROPOSED TEST

students knowledge
93 of
S
#
DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION NUMBER
OF DAYS
REMARK
1 Filling potable water in sump pit 1m
deep below the base level of the catch
pit and 1 m depth above the base slab
to make a total depth 2 m
1 By tankers filled at a uniform
Rate not greater than 2 m in 24
hours
2 Filling potable water another 2 m depth
to make 4 m
1 By tankers
3 Filling potable water the remaining
depth to maximum supply level
1 By tankers
4 Stabilisation period to allow for
absorption and autogenous healing
7 Additional water to be filled if
required
5 Testing period to record the water loss
by seepage and by evaporation every
24 hours
7 Monitoring regarding seepage
loss and the provision of 1 /
500 of average depth or 10mm.
(Visual inspection)
6 Pumping the filled water out offsite 1 To the other structure for test
7 Total period of water Test 18 Days
The potable water shall be filled by the water tankers to the above schedule upto the maximum
level.
A 7 days stabilisation period shall be allowed for water absorption and autogenous healing for
the requirement for a maximum design crack width 0.1 mm .The water level shall be
maintained by filling in further water for stabilisation.
After the stabilisation period, monitoring for the water loss excluding the evaporation shall be
conducted every 24 hours either employing the level floats or manometers or by simple daily
measurements.
The observations shall be recorded on the form QCF 61 Structure Leak Test for
documentation
During this 7 days period the total permissible loss in level shall not exceed 1 / 500 of the
average water depth of the full tank or 10 mm.
After the test is successfully completed, the water shall be pumped out either to the other
structure for testing should that be ready to receive it or if not, the other construction areas for
curing or any other purpose as agreed leaving the pit empty.
The application of the internal protective specified coating shall be carried out to the
manufacturer’s instructions
Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted followed by the EPC Contractor approval
Remedial Work if required
In case of unsatisfactory performance of the water tightness test and upon the agreement with
EPC Contractor, injection grouting method shall be adopted to seal the seepage routes.
Should the structure not satisfy the 7 days test then after the completion of the remedial work it
should be refilled and if necessary left for a further stabilising period; a further test of 7 days’
duration should then be undertaken in accordance with this clause.

students knowledge
94 of
Equipment
Water Tanker
Pump, sweep blasting package etc.,
Graduated stick
Attachment
Water quantity schedule
Documentation form QCF for structural leak test
Sketch
#41
Water tightness tests for the collection
sumps according to BS 8007:1987 section 9
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
This statement is aimed to present the proposed procedures (Typical) that shall be adopted to
conduct the water tightness tests for the following water retaining structures.
Collection sump 70-TB-201 Utilities East
Collection sump 70-TB-202 Ethylene
Collection sump 70-TB-205 Utilities South
References
Specification, Clause 7.0, Crack Control

students knowledge
95 of
Safety
Prior to commence any activity, the labour force shall receive a STARRT Card / Toolbox Talk
relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements.
Safety Supervision
Materials
Water requirements
For 70-TB-201 370 cum and 5 % for stabilisation period
Method
The structure to be tested shall be completed of all RCC constructions according to the
specified and agreed procedures.
Complete filling of the tie rod holes with MBT Master Flow 544 shall be carried out according to
the manufacturer’s instructions
70-TB-201 / 202 / 203 Inlet pipes 600 mm dia and for 70-TB-205 inlet pipes 450 and 400
mm dia shall be laid in place to the levels shown on the drawings as reflected on the water
quantity schedule i.e the Invert levels at maximum supply elevations.
The external surfaces of the structure shall be prepared & applied with the specified protective
system Bitustick XL, Polybit
Civil Contractor QC Inspection shall be conducted for the approval of the membrane
Structural backfilling shall be carried out externally to the project specifications & necessary
field density tests conducted to the requirement
Application of the floor screed as specified shall be carried out
The entire surfaces of structure to be tested shall be sweep blasted removing all loose spalls,
dust dirt etc.,
The prepared internal surfaces shall be inspected by Civil Contractor QC for approval
The following operations shall be involved to conduct the water tightness test according to the
BS 8007 : 1987 Section 9.1 applicable to liquid retaining structures
A graduated stick shall be provided on wall top to show the water levels to a’ mm’ count
Potable water shall be filled into the respective sump pit structure at a rate 2 m per 24 hours
for which the attached ‘filling scheduled quantities ‘shall apply.
After water is filled in to the required level, it shall be allowed to stay for a period of 7 days for
stabilisation, absorption and autogeneous healing. If so required, water shall be added to
maintain the maximum test level in case it is lost during this period.
Test shall commence from 8th
day and continue for 7 days for a design crack width of 0.1 mm
according to specification requirement.
Observations regarding water level drops shall be recorded every 24 hours by visual
measurements on mm scale

students knowledge
96 of
The test records shall be documented on the attached form QCF
‘ STRUCTURE LEAK TEST ‘and the judgement on the test made accordingly
During this 7 days period the total permissible loss in level shall not exceed 1 / 500 of the
average water depth of the full tank or 10 mm.
After the test is successfully completed, water shall be pumped out either to the other structure
for testing should that be ready to receive it or if not, to the other construction areas for curing
or any other purpose as agreed leaving the pit empty.
Remedial Work if required
In case of unsatisfactory performance of the water tightness test and upon the agreement with
EPC Contractor, injection grouting method may be adopted to seal the seepage routes.
Should the structure not satisfy the 7 days test then after the completion of the remedial work it
should be refilled and if necessary left for a further stabilising period; a further test of 7 days’
duration should then be undertaken in accordance with this clause.
SCHEDULE PLANNED FOR THE PROPOSED TEST
S
#
DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION NUMBER
OF DAYS
REMARK
1 Filling potable water in sump pit 1m
deep below the base level of the catch
pit and 1 m depth above the base slab
to make a total depth 2 m
1 By tankers filled at a uniform
Rate not greater than 2 m in 24
hours
2 Filling potable water another 2 m depth
to make 4 m
1 By tankers
3 Filling potable water the remaining
depth to maximum supply level
1 By tankers
4 Stabilisation period to allow for
absorption and autogenous healing
7 Additional water to be filled if
required
5 Testing period to record the water loss
by seepage and by evaporation every
24 hours
7 Monitoring regarding seepage
loss and the provision of 1 /
500 of average depth or 10mm.
(Visual inspection)
6 Pumping the filled water out offsite 1 To the other structure for test
7 Total period of water Test 18 Days
Post water tightness test
MBT shall produce a representative Masterseal 550 coating sample for approval by EPC
Contractor and the client. The internal surfaces shall be coated according to the approved
sample
Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted to approve the applied coating
Equipment
Water Tanker, Pump, sweep blasting package etc.,

students knowledge
97 of
Graduated stick
Attachment
Water quantity schedule
#42
Administration building Marble flooring
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Definitions
Responsibilities
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out marble flooring
on the various room areas, FF Reception, Lobby, the stair case steps & landing
References
Drawing
EPC Contractor
UBC & General Construction Practice, STQ
MAR Dated 2.4.2000 Approved 4.4.2000 Perlato Royal marble for Administration Building
Reception, FF lobby & stairs
MAR Dated 12.3.2000 Approved 30.3.2000 Blue Pearl marble for Worktop and Toilet
Counters
Definitions
SE Site Engineer
FM Foreman
QC Quality Control
Responsibilities
CS shall control, monitor and direct the SE, FM and workforce for the operations
SE shall be responsible for all the site operations and follow the instructions of the CS
FM shall execute the operations deploying the workforce. FM shall explain in full in the

students knowledge
98 of
language the work persons understand about all the instruction and the ToolBox talks every
day and check that the same are followed up regularly
Safety
The workers shall receive a ToolBox Talk according to the project requirement relevant to the
The area to be laid with marble flooring system shall be closed for the general movement
except those working there and be opened only when the work has properly been completed
with hardboard cover protection spread on the newly laid finishes.
Only industrial cable / wires shall be used for the grinding machine with earthing arrangement
to avoid any shock or mishap
The personnel working around the grinding machine shall use eyeglasses and all other
Personal Protective Equipment
Safety Supervision
snag observed during the inspection shall be notified to the supervisor present who
immediately act to bring the safety measures to an acceptable standard
Materials
Marble tiles 300x600x20mm (Directly placeable) and also Kitchen Work tops & toilet
Counters, Reception Area + Lobby First Floor- Perlato Royal (Placeable according to the
supplier’s details)
(Al Ain Cement and Marble Product Co)
Proprietary Grout
Method
(Laying Marble Floor Tiles by SEMI DRY method)
The following activities are involved to carry out the marble flooring system
The areas of the concrete sub strata to be laid with marble shall be brush cleaned and
dampened until absorption ceases followed by the finished floor level establishment by means
of dots and rules
Total thickness for the marble flooring is 100 mm including 80 mm bedding screed
(1 cement: 4 mortar sand) by weight and shall be applied as described below
The finishing layer shall be marble tiles 20 mm thick and be laid as described below
Details
The mortar for bedding the tiles shall be 1 part cement to 4 parts sand by weight, mixed
semidry by a mechanical mixer with only sufficient water added to give a crumbly consistency
which retains its shape when squeezed by hand permitting no fluidity

students knowledge
99 of
A slurry of 1 part cement to 1 part sand by volume shall be poured over the surface of the semi
– dry mix bedding and spread with a trowel until it is approximately 2 mm thick
Dry marble tiles / flags shall then be laid on the slurry and beaten firmly into position with a
wooden beater ensuring a true surface contact between the tiles and bedding is formed.
The marble tiles / flags shall be correctly positioned in both directions the time these are
placed
and the level profile followed by EPC Contractor approval
The tiles shall be laid level or tops to 1- % falls in ‘wet’ areas as may be required.
The floor finishing shall be carried out using an electrically operated rotary grinding machine
fixed with a carborundum stone of varying grades for the uneven edges or the protrusions as
well as the fine range for the even areas to attain a smooth surface texture allowing water
lubrication.
The grinding runs shall depend on the finishing profile formed. More varying profile shall be
applied with additional grinding rotation till the acceptable one is achieved.
Plenty of water shall be used for this purpose. All the water shall be washed away after
the grinding is completed.
and the level profile followed by EPC Contractor approval
During grinding any portion damaged or effected badly shall be replaced to the specification
requirement. Minor blown up or damaged tile shall be grouted with the proprietary compatible
colour to match the marble texture
A seal coat shall be applied on the ground surface with an approved proprietary polishing
material according to the manufacturer’s instructions after which the finished surface be
cleaned, the arrangement to protect the finished areas be made by overlaying hardboards and
closing the entry in general.
Unless otherwise indicated in the documents, a 10-mm movement joint shall be formed at the
machine bases etc.
Other standard items such as treads, risers, worktops and the counters shall be cut to the
exact site dimensions with the wash basins and the sink blocks taken out. These preformed
items shall be supplied completed in all respects and fixed to the supplier’s details
Major Equipment
Mechanical Mixer
Wheel barrows
Grinding Machine with varying carborundum stone grades attachment

students knowledge
100 of
Attachment
#43
Ethylene gas compressor
Table top pour
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Definitions
Responsibilities
Safety
Material
Method
Equipment
Manpower
Attachment
Scope
References
Drawing No..
Specifications
Safety
Safety risk, shall be assessed to the requirement for Site conditions and be taken care of.
Proper scaffolding according to the project requirements shall be erected around the area to
be poured along with providing complete access system such as stepped stairs and the
working platforms with top and the bottom guard rails.
mixers water tank etc., and the provision of the night lights shall be made for curing
Materials
The applicable volume of the pour is 80 cum apprx.
(Details of the calculations attached).
According to the specification the pour pertains to the definition of massive structure , hence,
with the placing temperature not more than 24 degree Celcius.

students knowledge
101 of
water shall be available according to the requirement
Method
The drawing shows the above pour to be carried out into 7 sections by forming 8 construction
joints. Pour sequences are described as Pour ‘A’ and Pour’B’. A total of 3 pours ‘A’ sections,
all shown to be concreted prior to Pour ‘B’. Remaining 4 Pours ‘ B’ sections shown to be
concreted after 14 days of the Pour ‘A’ completion. But according to the decision vide STQ, the
Table Top shall be poured one time monolithically without formation of any construction joint.
The quantitities involved have been detailed in the attachment. The overall procedures that
shall be carried out have been given as follows;
Placing and binding all the design rebars to the drawings’ details.
Aligning all forms, the insert plates and the bolt sleeves from the shown ’ centre line of
Pouring details
massive structures.
Immediately after pouring is finished, curing compound shall be sprayed and the surface be
Lator within 2 hours polythene shall temporarily be lifted, the saturated hessian spread and the
polythene relaid.
Batching plant 1 and 1 No. stand by
Concrete pump 1 and 1 No. stand by
Transit mixers 6 Nos.
Vibrator 2 and 2 Nos. standby
Water tanker 1 No.
Manpower
Masons 6 Nos.
Carpenters 3 Nos.
Steel fixers 3 Nos.

students knowledge
102 of
Scaffolder 3 Nos.
Helpers 7 Nos.
Attachment
QA Procedures
Pour sequence plan
Pour quantities
#44
Propane gas compressor
table top pour
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Definitions
Responsibilities
Safety
Material
Method
Equipment
Manpower
Attachment
Scope
References
Drawing nos
Specifications
Safety
Proper scaffolding according to the project requirements shall be erected around the area to
be poured along with providing complete access system such as stepped stairs and the
working platforms with top and the bottom guard rails.
mixers water tank etc., and the provision of the night lights shall be made for curing.
Materials
The applicable volume of the pour is 58 cum apprx. (Details of the calculations attached).

students knowledge
103 of
According to the specification the pour pertains to the definition of massive structure , hence,
with the placing temperature not more than 24 degree Celcius
water shall be available according to the requirement.
Method
The drawing shows the above pour to be carried out into 7 sections by forming 8 construction
joints. Pour sequences are described as Pour ‘A’ and Pour’B’. A total of 3 pours ‘A’ sections,
all shown to be concreted prior to Pour ‘B’. Remaining 4 Pours ‘ B’ sections shown to be
concreted after 14 days of the Pour ‘A’ completion. But according to the decision vide STQ, the
Table Top shall be poured one time monolithically without formation of any construction joint.
The quantitities involved have been detailed in the attachment.
The overall procedures that shall be carried out have been given as follows
Placing and binding all the design rebars to the drawings’ details .
Aligning all forms ,the insert plates and the bolt sleeves from the shown ’ centre line of
Pouring details
massive structures.
Immediately after pouring is finished , curing compound shall be sprayed and the surface be
Lator within 2 hours polythene shall temporarily be lifted, the saturated hessian spread and
the polythene relaid.
Batching plant 1 and 1 No. stand by
Concrete pump 1 and 1 No. stand by
Transit mixers 6 Nos.
Vibrator 2 and 2 Nos. standby
Water tanker 1 No.

students knowledge
104 of
Manpower
Masons 6 Nos.
Carpenters 3 Nos.
Steel fixers 3 Nos.
Scaffolder 3 Nos.
Helpers 7 Nos.
Attachment
Q.A. Procedures
Pour sequence plan
Pour quantities
#45
Expansion joints in ditches
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Definitions
Responsibilities
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
This statement is aimed to present the proposed procedures to be adopted to seal the
Expansion joints in the ditches.
References
Drawing nos
Safety
The personnel working on this activity shall wear masks, safety glasses, gloves, etc.,
Method
To seal the expansion joints the following operations shall be carried out.
Cleaning of the joint surfaces.
Preparing and filling the joints with Bitumastic
Details
The size of the proposed joints to be filled / sealed is 15 mm wide x 15 mm deep

students knowledge
105 of
Application procedure
The surface shall be cleaned of all dirt, dust and loosely adhering materials. All grease and oil
contamination shall be removed using hard small brushes, compressed air etc. The fibre board
shall be removed to the required depth.
Masking tape shall be used to confine the joint borders keeping the adjoining concrete
surfaces clean. The contents of the Can shall be removed by a Trowel or a Spatula.
The Bitumastic shall be applied to the prepared and masked portions.
In case of the vertical joints, bottom to top application sequence shall be followed ensuring that
the entire volume of the joint is filled in using a spatula or a trowel to effect a total contact with
joint surfaces.
After application, the sealant shall be smoothened and compressed into the joint using a
spatula or a putty knife moistened with cleaning solvent.
Masking tape shall be removed immediately after the application has been over to keep the
concrete surface clean.
It shall take 4-6 weeks post application normally to a full cure at a stage when the solvent
evaporation is completed. Over painting if so required, shall be carried out only after the full
cure has taken place.
Coverage
Coverage for joint depth 10 mm and width 15mm 6.5 kg of Bitumastic per linear metre
Equipment
Trowel
Spatula
Knife etc.,
Attachment
None
#46
Expansion joints in ditches
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to seal the Expansion Joints
in the ditches.

students knowledge
106 of
References
Drawing nos.
Specs:
BITUMASTIC, Manufacturer - Polybit
Safety
Prior to the commencement of work, the labour force shall receive a Toolbox talk on the
Project Site Safety requirements.
Necessary measures shall be applied for any process involving particular safety risk
Personnel working on this activity shall wear masks, Eye protection, gloves, etc.,
Method
Size of the proposed joints to be filled / sealed is 15 mm wide x 15 mm deep
The surface shall be cleaned of all dirt, dust and loosely adhering materials.
All grease and oil contamination shall be removed using hard small brushes, compressed air
etc.
The fibreboard shall be removed to the required depth.
Under normal circumstances priming is not required
Masking tape shall be used to confine the joint borders keeping the adjoining concrete
surfaces clean.
The contents of the Can shall be removed by a Trowel or a Spatula.
The Bitumastic shall be applied to the prepared and masked portions.
In case of the vertical joints, bottom to top application sequence using a spatula or a trowel,
shall be followed ensuring that the entire volume of the joint is filled in to effect a total contact
with joint surfaces.
After application, the sealant shall be smoothened and compressed into the joint using a
spatula or a putty knife moistened with cleaning solvent.
Masking tape shall be removed immediately after the application is completed to keep the
concrete surface clean.
A full cure (a stage when the solvent evaporation is completed) shall normally consume
4 to 6 weeks post application of the sealant
Painting over concrete surface if so required, shall be carried out only after full cure has taken
place.
Equipment
Trowel
Spatula
Knife etc.,
Attachment
Manufacturer Datasheet
#47
Concrete coating
Using master seal 550

students knowledge
107 of
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Definitions
Responsibilities
Safety
Material
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
This statement is aimed to present the proposed procedures that shall be adopted to apply the
specialist material for concrete protection on the internal surfaces as specified.
References
Collection sump 70-TB-202 Ethylene
Collection sump 70-TB-205 Utilities South
Drawings
Specifications
Master seal 550-product data sheet
Definitions
FM Foreman
QC Quality Control
Responsibilities
Safety
Scaffolding shall be erected to afford access to the working personnel according to the project
requirements. Hand rails ladders and the toe boards shall be fitted and inspected prior to use.

students knowledge
108 of
During mixing and application of master seal 550, personnel protective equipment shall be
used i.e. overalls, goggles, gloves (to avoid material contact to eyes, mouth and skin)
Material storage / disposal of used containers / waste material
Materials shall be stored out of direct sunlight clear of ground and protected from rainfall.
Used containers shall be collected and disposed off as per project requirements.
Materials
Coating, Masterseal 550
Master seal 550 is a two component acrylic modified cementitious coating that requires only
site mixing to form an ideal product to waterproof and resurface concrete, masonry and most
other construction materials. Simply applied by stiff brush, roller or trowel it forms a waterproof,
flexible coating providing an effective barrier to waterborne salts and atmospheric gases.
Method
The method involves the following sequences in general.
Surface preparation
Mixing
Application
Details
All grease, oil, dust, residual curing compound, mould release agent or other contaminants,
which could impair adhesion, shall be removed from the surface by degreasing and washing.
The whole surface to be coated shall be cleaned using water jetting and visually inspected to
ensure that the roughness does not exceed grade 80 sandpaper.
All the holes, voids, depressions, spalls etc., shall be filled with Masterseal 550 mixed to a
trowel consistency ,scraped lightly into the surface, allowed to dry and later roughened by
hand wire brush on the small areas and gently water jetted on the larger areas.
The filled areas shall be visually inspected to ensure that the correct mechanical key is
achieved.
Mixing
Master seal is supplied in the pre measured units and shall be mixed on site using clean
containers. The powder shall be slowly added to the liquid component and agitated / mixed
for 2 minutes by using a slow speed hand power drill fitted with a suitable paddle attachment,
until a homogeneous lump free consistency is obtained.
The mix quantity shall be such that it could be consumed in one hour during application without
allowing any retempering with water.
Application
Coverage 1.8 Kg / sqm at 1 mm thickness
The coating shall be 1 mm thick applied in one coat
In hot weather the surface to be coated shall be shaded from direct sunlight.
The areas to be coated shall be saturated with fresh and clean water.
The prepared and the saturated surface shall be inspected by Civil Contractor QC followed by
EPC Contractor approval
The mixed material shall be applied while the surface is visibly damp without standing water
using short stiff brush or roller. (Roller shall be used in major / large areas)

students knowledge
109 of
The evenness and the thickness of the applied coating shall be regularly checked during
application while the material is still wet.
The materials shall be allowed to dry and visually inspected
Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted followed by EPC Contractor approval
Any missed areas shall be saturated and then touched up.
Equipment
Water tanker with water jetting arrangement
Hard brushes for minor areas
Clean container
Slow speed drill with paddle attachment
Stiff brush / Roller
Attachment
Masterseal 550 Data sheet and statement
#48
Dewatering for the 84” GRE pair line
parallel to
Corniche road east west
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Definitions
Responsibilities
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
The statement is aimed to present the proposed procedures to be adopted to keep the
proceeding excavations, for the route respecting pair of 84 “ GRE pipe lines to be laid in, dry
and free of inflowing water
References
Specifications Water Control / Dewatering Plan , Dewatering and Drainage
Excavation Safety Plan
Excavation & Backfilling for Underground structures.
Definitions

students knowledge
110 of
FM Foreman
Responsibilities
The Construction Foreman shall monitor these activities directing the workforce as necessary.
Safety
Appropriate means regarding safety shall be provided to the requirements .
Round the clock watch and ward shall be maintained for the plants and the Equipment
Safety standard barriers posted with warning tags shall be installed on both the sides of the
excavations covering the well point systems also
Night indicator lights shall be provided according to the provisions of safety
Access ladders shall be provided every 8 m intervals
The safety inspector shall visit the site every day in the morning and the after noon to check
whether the safety systems work to the requirement or else the corrective measures be
applied.
The water logged area shall not be allowed for the workers in general to acceed crossing the existing
fence except, if so required , for the purpose of laying out hoses over used plies to be routed in to
reach the proposed sumps for the pumped water disposal.
METHOD
Ref Attached Drawing and Sketches
The North South excavation has already been carried out to the intersection of the proposed
line and the Corniche Road as indicated by point at ‘S’
On the proposed route of the lines i.e on the North of the road exist various services at a
distance 4 m to 8 m at a depth of 2 to 3 m from the existing road level running along
eitherside of the intersection i.e East and West as shown on the attached sketch as
locations marked A to H for the exposed inspection pits
The existing uneven ground level on the proposed area is 1.8 m average lower than the road
level and the water is available at 2 m from the road level but fluctuates rapidly depending on
the tides.
The GRE pipe 2200 mm dia pair shall be laid at a bedding of not less than 4000 mm to 4500
mm from the road surface .Since the drawing shows the natural ground level 3.4 m , a 2.4
m depth is required to be excavated , while water level is shown at 2.15m level, water has to
be bailed out upto 0-0 level requiring a 2m massive dewatering along the entire route
commencing from the intersection at point ‘S‘ to the terminal point at ‘T’.
The existing services shall be protected by the necessary measures according to the
statutory regulations and the specifications prior to the excavation commencement for which
an inquiry be conducted with the relevant Statutory Organizations / Client
Since this massive earth work is to be carried out in full to cover a length of 1200 m or
more , dewatering shall be carried out accordingly by the standard Well Point System to be
installed on both sides of the proposed route at a depth of minimum 3 m from the existing
ground levels at the locations shown on the sketch / drawing and disposed off through
the hoses into the proposed sumps to be located at varying distances from 100 to 200 m off

students knowledge
111 of
the road berm by the use of booster pumps installed next to the intermediate water tanks, so
as not to allow the disposed water to flow back into the well point systems.
For the route part besides the box culvert (under construction) leading to the pipelines West
end after running beneath the overhead conveyors, the disposal may be made into the
culvert manholes as being done by M / S ARCHIRODIN CONSTRUCTION OVERSEAS for
that the matter was casually discussed with the supervisor on site Mr BADRI who expressed
no concern should the water be discharged that way.
Anyway should this option does not work, the disposal shall be carried on to the proposed
sumps as shown since in the vicinity of the Sulpha Plant Building area further sumps to form
may not be allowed.
The sumps shall be located as shown on the drawing / sketch near the embankment north
/ south side , for south after jumping over the bund, whatever course be feasible. On the
south of the embankment side the existing levels are low lying. A total of 8 to 10 sumps
shall be needed be formed.
The sump pits to receive the disposed water shall be filled with 75 mm clean aggregate prior
to the disposal is commenced
The Well Points on both sides shall be installed in sections of 100 m average for each Sykes
Pump catchment and the disposal be effected to as shown by boosting.
It shall take a duration of around 60 days to carry out the excavation,bedding, laying
pipes and the backfill,the system / s have to be kept working till these operations are over .
Equipment / plants
Well point system
Plants and equipment requirement
S # ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY REMARK
1 Length of the proposed route m 2400 2 x 1200 m
2 Length of the well point system m 2400 2 x 1200 m
3 150mm dia Headers average 5 m or
so long
each 480 6 points in each
4 50 mm dia Well points 3 m long each 2880 Filterable
5 50 mm dia Well points / Headers
Flexible connections
each 2880 6 connections each
header
6 Sykes / Miller pumps with suction and
delivery heads
each 24 1 pump / 100 well
points
7 Intermediate water tanks (open top)
3 cum capacity
each 6 1 tank for 4 Sykes
pumps
8 Booster pumps 5 bhp with compatible
fittings for tanks connections
each 6 1 booster pump for 4
Sykes pumps
9 150 mm dia hose pipe to suit the pump
inlets and outlets with suction and
disposal / delivery heads
m 500 Delivery upto the open
water tanks
10 75 mm dia disposal hose to suit the
water tank outlets
m 1500 Disposal from open
water tanks to the
proposed sumps

students knowledge
112 of
11 150 mm steel sleeve pipe for under
ground use
m 50 To be installed for the
incoming crossings
12 Drilling Rig with adjustable Auger
attachment for 50 mm dia Well Points
each 1 For drilling well point
bores
13 All other compatible fittings and
miscellaneous items for the whole
assembly not covered in above
ATTACHMENT
Drawing showing the well point system installation layouts and section
Typical details of the system indicative only
#49
Ceramic wall tiles fixing
Top
(INTERNAL)
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Definitions
Responsibilities
Safety
Method
Equipment
SCOPE
This statement is aimed to present the proposed procedures to be adopted to fix the
Ceramic wall tiles by bedding with an approved adhesive on one coat plaster applied
according to the specification with the pre spatterdash treatment except on metal lathing where
2 coats are permitted with wood float finish, uniformly as thick as possible and not less than 8
mm or more than 13 mm
References
Specification
Safety
The work force shall receive every day prior to the commencement of any activity a Tool Box
talk regarding operational safety according to the project requirements in addition to the use of
personal protective equipment..
Specifically the personnel engaged on the tiling items shall use masks to prevent inhale the
grout or the adhesive smell.

students knowledge
113 of
In the rooms where proper ventilation or the sunlight is not available, electric lights shall be
provided with due care regarding protection from the electric wires ,the distribution board and
the other fixtures etc.,
In hot weather standing upright fans shall be provided at the work areas.
The work area shall be closed to general workers on other parts and opened only after the tiles
have been finally cleaned as well the space cleared of electrical fittings.
Definitions
FM Foreman
QC Quality Control
Responsibilities
Material
Glazed Tile size specified 108 x 108 mm
Setting material (ultra set polyurethane adhesive ) recommended by manufacturer
Cushion edges
Rounded external corners
Head Jamb and Cill trim shapes
Wain scot cap Surface bullnose or bull nose cap
External corners Bullnose shapes or as specified
Internal corners Field butted square
Grouting material Water proof epoxy tiling grout with antifungicide additive
(Commercial white sanded latex portland cement type)
Method
Mesh reinforcement shall be incorporated in the plaster where
1 The structure is out of line and the thickness of the plaster exceeds 13 mm
2 The plaster is to be applied over different structural materials
3 The surfaces of the structural wall shall be subject to excessive movement .e.g., light
weight concrete block of all types
Examination
The strata to receive the tiles shall be examined closely to ascertain that the moisture content
are within limits to allow the fixing operation
Where the tiling is to be bedded in a thin bed adhesive, the trueness of the plaster shall be
such that when tested with a 3 m straight edge no gap exceeds 3 mm

students knowledge
114 of
Where the gap lies between 3 and 6 mm, if the walls are out of plumb by not more than 6 mm,
a thick bed adhesive shall be applied in preferance to cutting the defective areas and making
good
Deviation from true vertical or plumb in the surface of plastering exceeding 6 mm shall be
made good
Thin bed adhesive shall not be used for fixing tiles with backs incorporating deep keys or frogs
for which thick - bed adhesives must be used
Civil Contractor inspection followed by EPC Contractor approval
The tiles shall be set out before the work commences so that cut tiles be kept to a minimum
and where they do occur be as large as possible
Joints shall be horizontal and vertical, with horizontal joints aligning in walls that adjoin or be
adjacent
The tiles shall be neatly and accurately cut to close fit where necessary at abutments and
around outlets, pipes and the like
The tiles shall be extended into recesses, under equipment and fixtures to form a complete
covering without interruptions as well as terminated neatly at obstructions, edges or / and
corners keeping the on going pattern or joint alignment. The tiles shall fit closely to the
electrical outlets and fixtures allowing plates, collars, covers etc., overlap the tiles.
Movement joints not less than 6 mm shall be provided:
At all internal vertical corners
At all angles with structural walls and ceilings
To form bays not greater than 3000x4500 mm
Over all structural movement joints:
The joints shall be carried through the plastering to the structural wall, partially filled with an
approved joint filler and finished flush with an approved sealant recommended by the
manufacturer for the relevant situations.
Glazed edge tiles shall be used at the exposed edges.
The tiles shall be fixed in position prior to the adhesive gets dried for that it shall be prepared
and applied on a small area not exceeding 1m x 1m at a time with a trowel to dry plaster
surface in a manner recommended by the manufacturer followed by the tiles pressed firmly
into with a twisting / sliding action tapping firmly and cleaned as soon as the bedding be
completed.
The finished surface of the tile shall be firm and true such that when checked with a 3 m
straight edge, no gap exceeds 3 mm
The joints shall be grouted well to completely fill in as well as appear flush after the adhesive
has set and not less than 48 hours post fixing. Surplus grout shall be cleaned off from the tiles
surfaces as neatly as possible as the work proceeds using a damp cloth and the joints tooled
smooth.
The grout haze shall be removed according to the manufacturer’s instructions for the use of
acid and chemical cleaners
The tile work shall be rinsed thoroughly with clean water prior to and post using chemical
cleaners followed by polishing with soft cloth.

students knowledge
115 of
Equipment
Tile cutter
Attachment
Approved ITP Form
#50
Bedding and gravel filling beneath 60 “ dia pipe
cooling water pipe
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Definitions
Responsibilities
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted for the execution of bedding and the
sub strata gravel filling with the provision to prohibit the fine soil particles to migrate to the bedding
beneath the pipe where the water table is met at the bedding level making the compaction and the
density test unsustainable
Reference documents
Drawing
Definitions
FM Foreman
Responsibilities

students knowledge
116 of
Safety
A competent inspector shall inspect the trench daily to assess the safety measures adopted
as well as after every rainstorm. If required, the shoring shall be provided to prevent the
caving in. In case of the trench depth being more than 1200 mm, adequate means of exit such
as ladders or steps shall be provided and located no more than 8 m of lateral travel.
Barricades, markers and the night lights etc., shall be arranged as required.
Safety
Method
COOLING WATER PIPE LINE 60 “ DIA PIPE BEDDING AND GRAVEL FILLING
The attached sketch shows the proposed bedding and sub strata gravel filling wrapped by
Geotextile.
The excavation shall be carried out upto the formation level plus another 200 mm for crushed
gravel filling as shown .
The Geotextile TERRAM membrane shall be laid on the prepared substrata as shown.
A well packed 200 mm thick crushed gravel filling shall be carried out on apprx.3000 mm
wide base.
The Geotextile TERRAM membrane shall be continued over the prepared crushed gravel
filled formation level surface making gravels wrapped fully allowing no fine soil particles enter
the strata.
Over this wrapped strata a 150 mm thick sand bedding shall be carried out duly compacted
according to the requirement of the specifications.
After these operations are over and the inspection done, 60 “ dia pipe shall be laid according
to the requirement
Equipment
Excavator
Compactor
Attachment
Sketch
#51
External concrete protection
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents

students knowledge
117 of
Definitions
Responsibilities
Safety
Storage
Material
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to form a protection coating
on the external concrete surface to be cladded with the Glass Reinforced Concrete elements.
References
Drawing
Specification
above ground concrete protection.
Definitions
FM Foreman
QC Quality Control
Responsibilities
Safety
Prior to the commencement of any activity, the labour force shall receive a toolbox talk relevant
to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements. Any process that is
adopted having a particular safety risk shall be assessed and addressed as required.
Only tagged scaffolding comprising all the guard rails foot rails etc.,shall be used for the work
at heights according to safety requirements.
The use shall be made in well-ventilated area and avoid inhalation.
The personnel shall use protective clothing, gloves eye protection glasses, masks etc., for to
avoid skin contact. Plenty of clean water shall be available all the time.
Medical attention shall be available all time to treat the adverse effects.
Transportation shall be available to move the effected personnel to the hospital should the
circumstances so require.

students knowledge
118 of
Storage
The material shall be stored under cover out of direct sunlight and protected from temperature
extremes. Product shelf life is 12 months subject to proper storage
Care shall be taken during use and storage to avoid contact with eyes, mouth, skin and
foodstuffs. The containers shall be resealed after use. Immediate medical attention shall be
called for in case of any adverse effect to the personnel handling the product
Damaged tins shall be disposed off according to the state regulations.
Material
Master Builder Technology Product
Masterseal 300H - an acrylic based, elastomeric decorative, flexible, anti-carbonation and
waterproof protective coating designed for the protection of concrete structures against
carbonation and chloride ingress.
Masterseal 181S- primer system
Masterseal 300 H filler
Method
This application involves the following sequences
Cleaning and making up the surface
Priming the surface
Coating the surface
Details
Preparation
All surfaces shall be free from oil, grease, friable matters and curing compound.
The surfaces shall be cleaned from dust / sand using compressed air.
Arrises shall be rounded off and the protrusions ground so that the resulting surfaces appear
smooth.
The surfaces shall be brush primed with Masterkure 181S and subsequently Masterseal 300H
mixed with Masterseal 300 H filler applied as a scrape coat over blow holes and depressions.
The primed surface shall be allowed to dry tack free for a minimum duration of 2 hours before
applying Masterseal 300H coating.
Application
Masterseal 300 H shall be applied directly from the containers using a brush or roller @ 0.8
litre per sqm surface coverage to achieve a continuous coating
The continuous coating may be achieved in 1 or 2 coats of application
The coating shall be protected from the rain and humidity for 24 hours / until it dries out
using polythene sheets keeping off the area.
The coating shall be applied when the humidity is less than 90 %
The coating shall not be applied in the dusty weather conditions
No post application curing is required
The areas to be coated shall be protected from direct sunlight by shading in the hot weather
conditions and the ambient temperature be more than 5 degree Celsius.
Equipment
Brush
Roller

students knowledge
119 of
Attachment
MBT Statement
#52
Above ground concrete protection
Using masterseal 300 h
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to apply protection coating
on above ground concrete surfaces.
References
Specification
MAR -Material Approval for 181 S and 300H
Safety
to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements. STARRT Card shall be
used. Necessary measures shall be applied to any activity involving safety risk.
Only tagged scaffolding with guardrails, foot rails etc., shall be used to afford access to high
locations. Material shall be used in well-ventilated area and inhalation avoided.
Personnel shall use protective clothing, gloves, eye protection, masks etc .to avoid skin
contact. Plenty of clean water shall be made available.
Safety Supervision
snag observed during his visit, shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act
Material

students knowledge
120 of
Storage
extremes. The containers shall be resealed after use. Damaged tins shall be disposed off
according to the state regulations.
Method
Surface Preparation
Sweep blasting shall be used when necessary to obtain an acceptable surface for coating
otherwise the surfaces shall be cleaned from dust / sand using compressed air.
smooth.
Primer
The surfaces shall be brush primed with Masterkure 181S and allowed to dry for 2 hours
Subsequently Masterseal 300H mixed with Masterseal 300 H filler applied as a scrape coat
over blowholes and depressions and allowed to dry.
Application
Masterseal 300 H shall be applied directly from the containers using a brush or roller @ a
minimum of 0.8 litre per sqm surface coverage to achieve a continuous coating
Continuous coating may be achieved in 1 or 2 coats of application
Equipment
Brush
Roller
Attachment
MBT Statement
#53
Using masterseal 300 h
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment

students knowledge
121 of
Scope
This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to apply protection coating
on above ground concrete surfaces.
References
Specification
MAR -Material Approval for 181 S and 300H
Safety
to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements. STARRT Card shall be
used. Necessary measures shall be applied to any activity involving safety risk.
Only tagged scaffolding with guardrails, foot rails etc., shall be used to afford access to high
locations. Material shall be used in well-ventilated area and inhalation avoided.
Personnel shall use protective clothing, gloves, eye protection, masks etc .to avoid skin
contact. Plenty of clean water shall be made available.
Safety Supervision
snag observed during his visit, shall be notified to the supervisor present who immediately act
Material
Storage
extremes. The containers shall be resealed after use. Damaged tins shall be disposed off
according to the state regulations.
Method
The system shall only be applied to surfaces that have been passed as being ready to receive
them. All necessary repairs to the concrete surface shall have been carried out and relevant
QC documentation completed.
Sweep blasting shall be used to obtain an acceptable surface for coating and the surfaces
shall be cleaned from dust / sand using compressed air.
Primer
The surfaces shall be brush primed with Masterkure 181S and allowed to dry for 2 hours
Subsequently Masterseal 300H mixed with Masterseal 300 H filler applied as a scrape coat
and allowed to dry.

students knowledge
122 of
Application
Masterseal 300 H shall be applied directly from the containers using a brush or roller @ a
minimum of 0.8 litre per sqm surface coverage to achieve a continuous coating
Continuous coating may be achieved in 2 coats of application (minimum)
Equipment
Brush
Roller
Attachment
MBT Statement
#54
Hand excavation to install
Telephone ducts between box no. 20 to
telecom centre
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Definitions
Responsibilities
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the laying in
2 No. 4 “ dia PVC ducts for telecommunication cables over the existing ducts between box No.
20 to telecom centre.
References
Drawing Nos.
Definitions
FM Foreman

students knowledge
123 of
Responsibilities
The Construction superintendent shall control and monitor the operations directing the
construction Foreman
The Construction Foreman shall execute these activities directing the workforce as necessary.
Safety
Prior to the commencement of any activity, the labour force shall receive a toolbox talk on the
A competent inspector shall inspect the trench daily to assess the safety measures adopted as
well as after every rainstorm. If required, the shoring shall be provided to prevent the caving
in. In case of the trench depth being more than 1200 mm, adequate means of exit such as
ladders or steps shall be provided and located no more than 8 m of lateral travel. Barricades,
markers and the night-lights etc., shall be arranged as required.
Status
The site is located at the police station where 2 no. manholes MH2 and MH3 exist
The manholes centre-to-centre distance is 141 m. The proposed section to be excavated is
500mm wide and 1000 mm deep. Additional / spare 2 nos. PVC ducts 4 “ dia are to be
provided above the existing ducts
The access road to the police station is wearing asphalt course
From manhole no. 3 to no. 2 i.e. 141 m is running under the police station car park and the
access road. The main portion of the line in the middle as shown is access road and the
parking facility for the police station
The internal portion of the line from man hole no. 2 to the internal Telecom Vault is also
running beneath the interlocking blocks paving after crossing under the fence wall
Method
The work shall involve the following operational procedures.
Between man hole No. 3 and No. 2.
Remove the interlocking blocks
Road cutting at the police station entrance across 500 mm wide or as required
Bridge the gap at the road cut using steel plates to facilitate the smooth traffic plying
Manual excavation of the trench in the entire 141 m length
Sand bedding 75 mm
Install 2 nos. 100 mm dia pipe ducts
Sand filling over the ducts 75 mm
Backfilling as specified
Refixing the interlocking tiles
Making good the access road
Removing the steel plates
Between the manhole No. 2 and the internal telecom vault
Removing the interlocking blocks

students knowledge
124 of
Manual excavation of the trench to the existing ducts from the manhole No.2 to the internal
vault crossing below the fence wall
Sand filling 75 mm thick below the proposed duct
Laying ducts
Filling 75 mm thick sand over the laid ducts
Entering cable way
Making good the entry
Backfilling as specified
Refixing the interlocking blocks to the pattern
Clearing the site
Details
External
The existing interlocking paving tiles shall be removed to a safer location from the required
work area and stacked properly
The access road shall be cut across to the required level exposing the existing ducts and the
bridging steel plates be laid over completely to facilitate the car access
The manual excavation shall be carried out in the entire length of 141 m to the given sectional
dimensions upto the existing ducts as shown
After the excavation to the required depth is completed, a 75 mm thick layer of sand shall be
filled in on the existing ducts to receive 2 nos. 4 “ dia new ducts which be placed and further
covered with another 75 mm thick sand layer
After the sand is filled in, the backfilling shall be carried out according to the project
specifications upto the bottom of the interlocking blocks to be refixed
After the backfilling is completed, the interlocking blocks shall be refixed to the same location
or the pattern, which existed before these were removed.
The backfilling shall be done in the road cut part upto the concrete bottom and asphalt laid
over
After the whole backfilling is over, the effected access road shall be made good by asphalt
laying on concrete base
Internal
The interlocking blocks shall be removed from the proposed marked route and stacked well
and safe to be reused
The excavation shall be carried out on the entire length from the fence to the existing vault
The excavation shall be carried out from the manhole nos. 2 to the inside of the wall
penetrating beneath
The whole route of the existing ducts shall be exposed
Sand shall be filled in 75 mm thickness over the existing ducts
Spare ducts 2 nos shall be laid over the sand filling over the existing ducts
Further sand filling 75 mm thick shall be carried out to cover the new ducts and the backfilling
be commenced to the bottom of the existing interlocking pavement according to the
specifications
After the backfilling is over, the interlocking blocks shall be refixed to the existing pattern and
the effected wall portion be repaired to the extent of damage if any

students knowledge
125 of
The external portion from the wall to the manhole shall also be sand filled and backfilled
according to the details
The whole work shall be approved
Equipment
Jackhammer
Compressor
Attachment
Sketch
#55
Backfilling of the west side of the quench tower
foundation – (rib)
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Existing Windows Section as per drawing
Reasons for Proposal
Details of New proposal and Location change in Placement
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted for the construction of the
west direction extended part of the design foundation / Cantilever rib.
References
Drawing
The revised IFC drawing was received after the completion of the blinding concrete and the
Rebar binding works.
Definitions
FM Foreman
Responsibilities
CM shall plan and resource the activities in accordance with this method statement.
The Construction Superintendent shall control and monitor the operations directing the
construction Foreman.
Foreman shall execute and assist monitor these activities directing the workforce as
necessary.

students knowledge
126 of
Safety
The workforce shall receive every day before the commencement of any activity a Tool Box
talk relevant to the operation according to the project requirements. All the safety measures
shall be arranged according to the operational requirement.
Method
The extended part shall be constructed to the following sequences.
The concrete shall be poured to the preparatory works carried out on site.
The deshuttering shall be done after 14 days.
Application of the membrane to the underside / soffit of the slab.
Backfilling the underside space by the lean mix PBFC 20 grade concrete.
Details
Since all the preparatory works such as the bending and binding of the reinforcement,
centering and shuttering of form work, propping etc., and all the relevant activities have been
carried out to the design requirement per previous revision and according to the project
specifications, the concrete shall be poured to the works done.
After the completion of the pour and the sequential curing and a lapse of 14 days, the forms
shall be struck from the underside of the slab / soffit
The formed surface shall be applied with the protective concrete membrane as specified and
shown on the sketch
The space left between the soffit and the prepared ground shall be prepared for the concrete
filling by erecting the formwork in the letter box style
The forms shall be fabricated according to the following descriptions
Bottom panel of 600 mm height shall be erected around
Top panel of 200 mm shall be prepared in letter box style to allow the pour of the concrete
The top panel post pour shutters shall be made ready before the commencement of the
concrete
Immediately after the pour reaches to the brims / soffit level
The top panels shall be placed in position to close all the external surface and supported to the
requirement
The forms shall be struck as per the project specification
Equipment
Concrete Pump
Concrete Transit Mixers
Attachment
Sketch
#56
Excavation Cooling water outfall chamber
Top
Index
Scope

students knowledge
127 of
Reference documents
Definitions
Responsibilities
Safety
Method Equipment
Attachment
Scope
excavation for the foundation in respect of the Cooling Water Outfall Chamber.
References
Drawing
Specification Excavation & Backfilling for Underground structures.
Definitions
FM Foreman
Responsibilities
CM shall plan and resource the excavation activity in accordance with this method statement.
The Construction Superintendent shall control and superintend and monitor the operations
directing the Foreman as required.
The Construction Foreman shall execute these activities, deploying the workforce on the job as
necessary.
EPC Contractor shall do surveillance on the operations.
Safety
shall be assessed and addressed according to the project safety requirements.
A competent inspector shall inspect the excavated area daily as well as after every rainstorm
to assess the safety measures adopted. If required, the shoring shall be provided to prevent
the caving in. In case of the trench depth being more than 1200 mm, adequate means of exit
such as ladders or steps shall be provided and located no more than 8 m of lateral travel.
Barricades, markers and the night-lights etc., shall be arranged as required.
Design Status
The centre lines of the proposed structure and the coordinates meet at
N (Typ) and E (Typ)
The plan size of the chamber is 10.025 m x 7.2 m
The excavation has to be carried out to the +2.3 m level from RGL +10.500 i.e a depth of 7.8
m shall be excavated
Method
The excavation shall be carried out to the following sequences
Setting out the lines
Barricading the area

students knowledge
128 of
Excavation in stages as shown on sketch
Details
Attached sketch
To start with, a surveyor shall set out the site for the excavation
to the exact lines and coordinates references.
After the setting out, the excavation lines shall be marked 4750 mm away from the proposed
external faces of the structure as shown on the sketch.
The excavation shall be carried out to the details shown on the sketch in 5 steps of size 750
mm tread and 1500mm riser and the bottom step of 675 mm riser.
The size of the lowest level excavation shall be 120025 x 9200 mm and that of the top 19525 x
16700 mm.
The excavation shall be started from one end and the top 750 mm deep be completed
The access shall be ramped for the equipment to enter.
The excavation shall be carried out in strips of 750 mm depth until the whole earth mass is
taken out.
The excavated earth shall be transported to the stockpiles immediately keeping the site tidy.
Equipment
Excavator
Dumper
Attachment
Sketch
#57
Drilling of holes on
Pipe rack & structures on site
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Definitions
Responsibilities
Safety
Method
Equipment
Scope
be implemented for the drilling of holes on structural steel members that have been erected
and which requires the drilling of holes due to manufacturing error in location or design change
after the beams have been primed or finished coated.
Reference Documents

students knowledge
129 of
Specification Structural Steel Erection
ANSI A 10.13 Safety Requirements for Steel Erection
Relevant Drawings
Definitions
FM Foreman
Responsibilities
CM shall plan and resource the drilling of holes, in accordance with this method statement.
The Construction Supertindent shall monitor these activities, directing the workforce as
necessary.
The Erection Foreman shall control the workforce ensuring the full implementation of this
method statement including safety measures.
Safety
The use of cranes or man lifts shall be assessed and all safety regulations enforced.
Men working at heights shall be equipped with the required personal safety equipment.
Method
The new location of the hole centres on the specific member item shall be marked as per the
details on the drawing or drawing revision.
Using a drilling machine, preferably a magnetic base drilling machine, a pilot hole of size 8mm
or 10mm diameter shall be initially drilled. These holes shall be subsequently drilled to the
specified diameter.
The area around the holes shall be cleaned, burrs removed and edges rounded off. This shall
be effected by either using emery paper or grinding wheel.
The bare surfaces is made dust free and cold galvanizing applied as a coat with ‘Jotun Barrier
86” , a two pack zinc-rich epoxy primer .
Allow about 4 Hours for drying.
Make necessary touch-ups using the same grade, colour which were used to paint the
structure-prime coat and the top coat if necessary.
Equipment
Drilling machine
Man lift
Scaffolding if required
Grinding machine
#58

students knowledge
130 of
Site office establishment
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Definitions
Responsibilities
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
establishment of the site office.
Reference documents
Approved Site office layout and details drawings.
Definitions
EPC Contractor
Civil Contractor .
CS Construction Superintendent.
ST Survey team.
Responsibilities
The PSM shall ensure the establishment of the site office complex is in accordance with the
drawings and agreed specifications.
The Construction Superintendent shall coordinate and supervise the day to day activities,
along with the Foremen and Survey Team.
Safety
The Safety Officer shall monitor the daily activities, advising and implementing all safety
procedures.
Method
The site shall be graded and compacted to the levels indicated upon the approved grading
drawings. The ST shall check the final grades. A record drawing of the final grades shall be
produced.
The ST, using approved drawings, shall set out the relevant issues such as service trenches
and foundations.
Services:
Service trenches relating to the site office complex, for the drainage, water, electric and fire
water, shall be set out.

students knowledge
131 of
Working to levels, a mechanical excavator shall excavate the trenches. Excavated material
shall be re-used for backfilling when the services have been installed. Surplus material shall be
removed from site. The services may share common trenches where appropriate.
The drainage pipes shall be installed to grade. Manholes shall be placed at locations indicated
upon the site office complex drainage drawings.
Sewage holding tanks shall be located as per drawing. A steel tank shall be utilized for water
storage. The tank shall be backfilled as appropriate.
Draw pits and chambers for cabling shall be located in a similar manner. All service trenches
shall receive appropriate sand bedding and surround, plus warning tape for cabling shall be
provided. Where any services shall cross an area that shall be trafficked, the service shall be
ducted or / and protected with concrete surround as appropriate.
Foundations:
For the pre-engineered office units, the foundation layout drawing that indicates the precast
concrete block foundation locations, shall be utilized for the setting out. The precast concrete
foundation blocks, shall be placed upon the pre graded ground. The pre-engineered office
units, shall be off loaded from the delivery wagon, direct onto these blocks. Shim plates shall
be used between the precast concrete block and the unit chassis where necessary.
Power Supply:
The relevant pre-engineered sections shall be sealed. The relevant utilities that require
connection shall be connected. The appropriate electrical power supply and distribution
network shall be provided and commissioned as per approved drawings and schematics. The
appropriate checklist shall be utilized.
Telephone Service.
Etisalet shall provide the service to the designate locations within the building. The internal
distribution system shall be installed as per approved scheme.
Infra structure:
Access roads to the site office shall be constructed according to the layout drawing.
Footpaths around the site office shall be constructed as per drawing.
Drainage ditches for stormwater shall be graded according to the site office layout drawing.
Parking areas as indicated on the site office layout drawing, shall be constructed including
covered shelters where appropriate.
Equipment
Excavator.
Dump trucks.
Crane.
Attachment
ITP No:
Temporary Building Checklist QCF08.
#59
Welding of Earthing Lugs on

students knowledge
132 of
East West Piperack (SR0099A &B)
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Definitions
Responsibilities
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
be implemented for the welding of Earthing Lugs on the columns of the East West Piperack
steel structure.
Reference Documents
Drawing No. (Also Refer E-Mail of 61199) - Attached for Reference
Definitions
FM Foreman
Responsibilities
CM shall plan and resource this activity, in accordance with this method statement.
The QC inspector shall ensure that the necessary visual inspection is carried out.
Safety
Any process that is adopted having a particular safety risk shall be assessed and addressed
as required.
Method
The location of the Earthing Lugs on the respective columns shall be marked off. Approximate
30mm of the surrounding area shall be cleaned to remove the primer and galvanising.
The Lug shall be initially tack welded to the column and then fully welded to the required fillet
size.
The fillet weld shall be cleaned and free of defects.
Welding shall be done according to the approved WPS using duly qualified welders.

students knowledge
133 of
Visual inspection to be done prior to surface finish.
The surface shall be inspected prior to cold galvanizing and painting.
The bare surfaces is made dust free and cold galvanizing applied as a coat with ‘Jotun Barrier
86”, a two pack zinc-rich epoxy primer.
Allow about 4 Hours for drying.
Make necessary touch-ups using the same grade, colour which were used to paint the
structure-prime coat and the top coat if necessary.
Equipment
Welding Machine
Grinding Machine
Attachment
Drawing N0.
Copy of E-Mail (indicating location of Earthing Lug)
PQR No. QP-009
PQR No. QP-010
WPS No. QW-009
WPS No. QW-010
#60
Filling around all the pipes within the
plant area
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Definitions
Responsibilities
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted for the filling around the
GRP pipes within the Plant Area.
Reference Documents
Specification

students knowledge
134 of
FM Foreman
QC Quality Control
Responsibilities
CM shall plan and resource this activity in accordance with this method statement.
CS shall control, monitor and direct these activities.
The Construction Foreman shall execute these activities deploying the workforce as
necessary.
The QC inspector shall ensure that the necessary inspection and test are carried out.
Safety
Any process that is adopted having a particular safety risk shall be assessed and addressed
according to Project requirement.
Method
The following activities shall be involved to fill around the pipes laid within the plant area
To fill the sand in 150 mm thickness around the laid pipes
To fill the approved Red fill material in layers in the remaining trench space 150 mm
compacted
Details
The first layer shall be filled 200 mm apprx. compacted to 150 mm.
The field density test shall be conducted for 95 % compaction. A portion of the compacted
material 150 mm radially shall be removed to replace with sand circumferentially .
The sand shall be placed in the first layer portion to replace the filled material
circumferencially.
The structural fill material for the second layer shall be placed in 200 mm thick compacted to
150 mm for 95 % field density and tested according to the specifications.
Again a portion of the compacted material 150 mm radially shall be removed to replace with
sand circumferentially.
The sand shall be placed in the second layer portion to replace the filled material
circumferentially.
Similarly the succeeding layers of fill material shall be placed in 200mm thickness
approximately compacted to 150 mm according to the specifications and replaced by the sand
filling as aforesaid until the apex level of the pipe is covered with sand.
The remaining strata upto the ground level / required level shall be filled in with fill material in
200 mm approximately compacted to 150 mm thick layers according to specifications.
Equipment
Compactor
Attachment
Sketch showing various stages of filling
#61
Precasting man holes
Catch basin and

students knowledge
135 of
Valve chambers
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Definitions
Responsibilities
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to precast the manholes,
catch basins and fire water main valve box (wherever so required to be used precast)
chambers and install in specified prepared locations.
Reference Documents
Drg Man Holes
Drg Man Holes
Drg Man Holes
Drg Man Holes
Drg Catch Basins
Drg Catch Basins
Drg Catch Basins
Drg Typical Details
Specifications
Definitions
FM Foreman
QC Quality Control
Responsibilities

students knowledge
136 of
Safety
Every day prior to the commencement of any activity, the work personnel shall receive a Tool
Box talk relevant to the operation according to the project safety requirements.
A safety inspector shall inspect the operation daily and direct the Foreman and superintendent
address the snags if any
Method
The following activities shall be involved:
To prepare a precasting yard on site
To fabricate the form works according to design details
To fabricate the box outs to be used in forms
To fabricate the reinforcement
To place the rebars and the non critical cathodic protection
To cast bases with a kicker and shear key as shown in the first stage and cure
To scabble the kicker to roughen the construction joint surface
To cast walls with pipes inlet and outlet boxes formed in the second stage with the lifting hooks
To cure the cast units
To cast the cover slabs in the third stage and cure
Excavation of the relevant area / s
Blinding and membrane
Transportation of the completed open units to the locations
Installation of the units on the correct alignment and levels
Inspections by Civil Contractor QC and EPC Contractor approval
To prepare the cover slab bearing mortar bed as specified
To provide the box out sleeves for steps insertion
Pipe laying by others
To install the seals around the pipes and the box out concrete
To cast the surrounding concrete 150 mm thick as specified
To apply 1 mm thick coal tar epoxy on the external surfaces as specified
To bench the invert levels between the pipe flows where specified
Inspections by Civil Contractor QC and EPC Contractor approval
To plug the pipe spigot ends
To place the covers
Details
A precast yard having a capacity of about 20 units as shown on the attached sketch shall be
used for the precasting operations
The yard shall have convenience for the vehicles to freely move for various activities
Strong platforms of 100 mm thick concrete shall be used as the casting bases / floors
In one go about 10 units shall be made ready for the bottom slab pouring
The overlap shall be provided from the top of the kicker as specified and if so convenient the
rebars shall be fabricated continuously
The formwork for the base slabs with kickers to be cast monolithically shall be prepared
according to the typical sketch attached
Required rebars shall be placed in the correct locations with 75 mm covers / spacers

students knowledge
137 of
Shear key forms shall be erected according to the details and well clamped in
The concrete shall be poured through a chute
The curing shall be carried out by spraying compound and later by saturated hessian and
polythene cover
The wall formwork shall be fabricated on site using marine ply
The internal forms shall be fixed first to the correct dimensions
The box outs shall be fixed to the required locations on the fixed forms
The rebars for the walls as well as the trimming around box outs shall be placed in position
The external forms shall be fixed around well supported, in plumb and correct dimensions
The lifting lugs shall be placed in the required locations in the walls using 16 mm dia rebar
according to the detailed sketch attached
A binding wire length shall be tied to the horizontal rebars in continuity connected to the boss
fixed near wall top for the cathodic non critical arrangement / connection
Civil Contractor QC inspection followed by EPC Contractor approval
Pouring concrete into wall forms with wood float top surface finish and curing by compound
and later by hessian and polythene cover for the specified period
Forming cover slab shutters according to the specified details
Forming the cover box out shutters into the required position
Placing the rebars into the correct positions
Fixing the cover lifting hooks according to details attached
Pouring concrete and curing as aforesaid
Inserting the steps shall be carried out by fixing the pieces into the preformed holes in the
concrete walls as created by box sleeves with approved grout at a stage when the concrete
has gained sufficient strength
The excavation shall be carried out to the specified level and alignment followed by blinding
and water proofing
The open precast chambers shall be crane lifted and transported by a trailor to the relevant
locations followed by offloading into the correct alignment
The pipes shall be laid by others
After the pipes are laid, specified seals shall be placed in with the surrounding concrete as well
as the box out void forms erected followed by concrete pouring into the box out voids and the
plug(concrete surround)
The benching wherever specified shall be formed according to the channel flows and the
details
The bedding of the joint 20 mm thick shall be carried out on site as specified
After the levels and the alignment are ensured, the cover slab shall be correctly placed in
followed by the formation of the concrete block work pad to suit the cover elevation
The cover shall be set in on the block work pad using cement sand mortar
The mass concrete shall be laid around the cover as specified
The external surfaces shall be applied with 1 mm dry film thickness non solvented coal tar
epoxy in accordance with project specifications

students knowledge
138 of
The whole levels and the alignment details shall be documented according to requirement
Equipment
Crane
Concrete Transit mixer
Trailer
Vibrator
Attachment
Yard layout
Kicker details
Sketch showing lifting hooks for unit walls and base
Sketch showing lifting hooks for cover slab
#62
Termination detail to protective membrane around
rcc columns supporting the structural steel
Columns for pipe racks
CASE (4) PAVING
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Definitions
Responsibilities
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
This statement is aimed to present the proposed procedures that shall be adopted to clampin
the waterproofing membrane termination using Aluminium Beads around the column sides to
substitute the formation of the conventional rebate partly for the pipe racks foundations and for
the other areas such as hard / soft landscapes.
References
STQ , MAR

students knowledge
139 of
Definitions
SE Site Engineer
FM Foreman
QC Quality Control
Responsibilities
language the work persons understand about all the instruction and the toolbox talks every day
and check that the same are followed up regularly
Safety
Prior to the commencement of work, the labour force shall receive a toolbox talk on the Project
Site Safety requirements relevant to the activity involved
Any process adopted which may involve a particular Safety risk shall be assessed to the
requirement for Site conditions and be taken care of.
The personnel shall use the PPE, gloves, masks, eyeglasses etc.
To avoid skin contact, use of barrier cream to protect from the adverse effect of sealant
application shall also be made.
Industrial cleaner shall be used followed by washing with soap and water.
Material safety data shall be referred to for disposal and any further information.
A safety inspector shall visit the site every day and instruct the supervisor in case any snag is
observed who shall immediately implement the instructions accordingly.
Storage
The material including the sealant shall be stored under cover out of direct sunlight and
protected from extreme temperatures. All the manufacturer’s instructions shall be followed for
the purpose.
Materials
Aluminium Bead lengths to the Sectional dimensions 30 mm x 2 mm
Drilling and fixing screws 3 mm dia
Sealant- Polyurethane-Gun Grade Cold seal 200PF for horizontal usage on Aluminium strip
(Manufacturer BCR) (Emirates Specialities) or equivalent
Method
The following operational sequences shall be involved
Case 1
To cut the Aluminium beads to the exact dimensions according to the column size
requirement.

students knowledge
140 of
To provide every column 4 # beads by drilling and fixing using Hilty equipment
To connect the bead to the column side keeping the membrane tacked in by drilling and fixing
screws 3 # each side
To apply sealant a few mm above on the top of the bead covering the bead / column surface
junction and a portion few mm downwards well finished to a smooth profile
Case 2
Where the grooves have already been chased, the waterproofing membrane shall be tacked in
with the sealant applied according to the specifications and the manufacturer’s instructions. No
Aluminium bead shall be used for this case.
Case 3
Where the area comprises soft landscape such as gravel or soil fill
Case 4
Where the area comprises hard landscape such as paving
Details
Case 1
Application of the waterproofing membrane according to the specifications to the defined levels
keeping the top 200 mm or variable dimension according to the drawing above the finished
ground level
Marking shall be made to the exact line and level to obtain the profile as per drawing
Required lengths to the exact site dimensions shall be cut to suit a close fit between the bead
ends
Every bead shall be provided 3 # minimum screws to be drilled and fixed into the bead and the
concrete penetrating the membrane
The screws shall be fixed using an electrical operated Drill and Screw
After the screws have been fixed into and the beads are in proper alignment / the location,
approved sealant shall be applied to the top of the bead keeping about 5 mm above the bead
with an overlap on the down ward on the bead as follows
Application of sealant
The material shall be applied using a sealant gun fitted with conical nozzles adjustable to suit
the width
The sealant shall be gunned into the junction using an even trigger pressure, cleaning the
nozzle occasionally to avoid contamination. A smaller timber spatula soaked in soapy water
shall be used to compact the sealant into the joint for a smooth polish finish formation.
The mixing and application equipment shall be cured immediately
Case 2
Where the conventional groove is to be provided, the sealant shall be applied on to the
space left in the groove after the application of the water proofing membrane termination has
been trimmed .The sealant shall be applied around and formed continuous according to the

students knowledge
141 of
Case 3
In gravel or soil area the membrane shall be terminated at a level 150mm plus below the
footing top keeping the Aluminium bead strip details typical. All other details shall remain Civil
Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted followed by the EPC Contractor approval
as in case 1 if no rebate be chased
Case 4
In the paved area the membrane shall continue upto the termination level but the protection
board cease at 20 mm below the paving level filled with mastic on top keeping all other details
as in case 1 if not chased for rebate
Equipment
Electrical operated drill
Sealant applying gun
Attachment
Sketches as in STQ
Case wise description
#63
Termination detail to protective membrane around
rcc columns supporting the structural steel
Columns for pipe racks
CASE (4) PAVING
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment

students knowledge
142 of
Scope
This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to clampin the waterproofing
membrane termination using Aluminium Beads around the column sides to substitute the
formation of the conventional rebate partly for the pipe racks foundations, other structures and
for the other areas such as hard / soft landscapes.
References
MAR (Site fixed sample approved)
Safety
Prior to the commencement of work, the labour force shall receive a STARRT Card / Toolbox
talk on the relevant activity to the Project Site Safety requirements
Necessary measures shall be applied to address any risk involved on any process
The personnel shall use the PPE (gloves, masks, eyeglasses etc.)
Use of barrier cream to protect skin from the adverse effect of sealant shall also be made.
noticed who must immediately implement the instructions
Materials
Screws 3 mm dia
(Manufacturer BCR) (Emirates Specialities) or equivalent
Method
Case 1
Concrete surface shall be cleaned of all dirt & dust using a brush
Application of the waterproofing membrane according to the specifications to the defined levels
keeping the top 200 mm or variable dimension according to the drawing above the finished
ground level
Lines shall be marked on all sides to correct level as per drawing
Bead Lengths to exact site dimensions shall be cut to suit a close fit between the ends
Every bead shall be provided with a minimum 3 # screws to be drilled and fastened into the
concrete penetrating the membrane using an electrical operated Drill
After the screws have been fastened and the beads are in proper alignment, approved sealant
shall be applied to top of the bead keeping about 5 mm above the bead with a down ward lap
as follows
Sealant shall be applied using a gun fitted with conical nozzles adjustable to suit the width
into the corner using an even trigger pressure & cleaning the nozzle occasionally to avoid
contamination. A smaller timber spatula soaked in soapy water shall be used to compact the
sealant into the joint / junction for a smooth polish finish formation. The mixing and application
equipment shall be cleaned immediately after use
Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted & the relevant ITP signed off
Case 2

students knowledge
143 of
Where grooves have already been chased, the waterproofing membrane shall be tacked in &
sealant applied to the space left in the groove according to specifications and the
manufacturer’s instructions. No Aluminium bead shall be used in this case.
Sealant shall be applied around bead continuously
Case 3
In gravel or soil area, membrane shall be terminated at a level ‘150mm plus’ below the footing
top level keeping Aluminium bead details typical. All other details shall remain
as in ‘case 1’ if no rebate has been chased
Case 4
In the paved area, membrane shall continue upto the termination level but the protection board cease
at 20 mm below the paving level filled with mastic on top keeping all other details as in case 1 if not
chased for rebate
Equipment
Attachment
Sketches
Case wise description
#64
Road crossing for laying 2 pipes 1 for 20” raw ethane & 1 for 6” propane
First street Operating Authority entry
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Definitions
Responsibilities
Safety
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the excavation at
the road crossing to facilitate to lay the pipe lines 1 # each 20” Raw Ethane and 6” Propane at
location identified on the attached drawing to the following references
Reference documents
Drawing No.

students knowledge
144 of
Easement Systems 1 ST Street
Piping Interconnection Drawings, First Street
Definitions
SE Site Engineer
FM Foreman
QC Quality Control
Responsibilities
CM shall arrange the resources required accordingly and be overall responsible for the
excavation operation
Any mishap on the excavation operation shall immediately be notified to the CS and the CM for
the immediate action if so required for any possible remedy or record or the authority review
whatsoever,the case may be
Safety
Prior to the commencement of any activity the labour force shall receive a Toolbox talk
relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements. Any process is
adopted having a particular safety risk shall be assessed and addressed as required to raise to
a minimum standard / an acceptable mark.
In the present case the excavation has to be carried out on the Operating Authority area,
therefore all the regulated precautions shall be resorted to effect a full safety standard.
ToolBox Talks-
While conducting ToolBox Talks, a representative from the authority shall be involved to
witness and sign the instruction imparted with the workers prior to the commencement of the
operations to make a record. Only English literate Foreman shall be employed to work on the
excavation execution.
Excavation Work Permit- A copy of the work permit shall be posted on a mini board installed
on site to be noticeable to all the relevant persons involved on the crossing
Traffic Management-Sign boards keep up-All the personnel shall be briefed about the safe
keep up of the boards
Barricades,cones, markers and the night-lights, flood lights etc. shall be arranged as required
for a complete safety. No oil spillage shall be allowed.
The sides of the excavation shall be sloped with the barriers placed to indicate the excavation
work in progress

students knowledge
145 of
Flagman-On both the direction, in addition to the traffic sign boards, a flagman shall be
engaged to operate full time to direct the traffic about the excavation work in progress by
waving the flag for all the vehicles passing by
Hand Excavation- Excavation required to be by hand shall only be carried out manually. In
case certain services not shown on the record drawings such as fibre optics cable is
discovered, the excavation shall be ceased to be continued until the decision to hydrojetting
is taken up and the authority are involved.
Jack Hammer- The worker engaged on operating this equipment shall use protective glass
and work in phases with pause intervals. The compressor air pressure shall be monitored from
time to time so that the hammer works smoothly. The compressor shall be place within the
barricade limits
Access to trench- The workers shall clearly be instructed to use only the ladders to enter in or
come out. No jumping shall be allowed
Machine Excavation
The operators shall be explicitly explained and instructed about the requirement of the reverse
signal and sound when operating reverse. The truck driver shall also be instructed similarly.
Banksman shall be engaged while the equipment operate.
No violation of the traffic rules shall be allowed
Deep Trenches
If required, the shoring shall be provided to prevent the caving in. In case of the trench depth
being more than 1200 mm. Adequate means of exit such as Aluminium ladder or steps shall
be provided and located no more than 8 m of lateral travel.
Plants preservation
The live plants and the trees arboricultured shall be deplanted integrally with the roots and
preserved to the specialist requirement so that these remain live till the replantation is carried
out all to the satisfaction of the specialist
Safety Supervision
A competent inspector shall inspect the trench daily to assess the safety measures adopted.
Method
The record drawings regarding the existing services shall be obtained.
A traffic management scheme has been presented herein and shall be produced on site as
detailed on the attached sketch for this road crossing which includes, reduced speed sign,
temporary diverted roads sign, men at work sign, warning signs, informatory signs, safety
barriers, night lighting and road cleaning activities.
TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT SCHEME ROAD CROSSING – First Street
Drawing reference –
This proposed crossing is located on the road 1st
Street between the following co-ordinates as
shown on the referred drawing.
This is a 2-way road with a central verge and carrying 1 lane on either way

students knowledge
146 of
Both ends of the crossing are existing earthen ramp. On the central verge 4 minor irrigation
pipes are in service. On the West Side, one irrigation pipe is in service. On the East Side one
irrigation pipe is disconnected. On the central verge one electric pole is in service. In addition
to the aforesaid tiny plants are arboricultured.
The proposed crossing is just situated at the access road to Operating Authority gate.
of the carriageway
In the first instance the work shall be carried out on L1 diverting the traffic to the road portion
on L2 as shown on the sketch.
In the second instance the work shall be carried out on L2 diverting the traffic to the road
portion on L1 as shown on the sketch.
The road x-ing lies on the branch road hence one directory sign shall be fixed on both east and
west side of the 1st
street road at 200m from the location to indicate the work ahead .on the left
and right directions respectively.
The first board depicting ‘reduce speed’ for traffic diversion informatory shall be located at 100
m from the point of the proposed crossing and the second depicting ‘men at work’ sign be
located at 100 m on either way in the opposite directions.
A Flagman shall be engaged full time on both the directions to guide the traffic about the
ongoing excavation operations in addition to the conventional signboards
The following activities are involved. Reference to the marked note ‘B’ on the Easement
Systems Drawing
To produce the Traffic Management Scheme
To divert the minor irrigation, electric pole, plants etc. temporarily as required.
To excavate by hand and expose all the underground facilities
(5.5KV / 0.24KV cables are available)
Trial pit to be excavated in size (5mx2mx1.5m) deep by hand tools
To seam the area with the detectors to ascertain the existing cables.
To expose the cable fully and to be inspected by the authorities / Operating Authority
After the exposure & diversion, the cables to be covered with split PVC pipes by others
To continue the excavation mechanically according to the authority directions / and as
agreed
To excavate the remaining portion by the excavator machine
To have authority inspection
The pipes to be laid by others
To fill the bedding material according to the specification requirement
To reinstate the diverted services
To reinstate the central verge to the existing state
Details
The Traffic Management Scheme shall be executed as explained in the foregoing and to the
traffic manual directions.
The first section of road crossing on both sides as per the attached sketch shall be marked by
the surveyor on the actual location.
The asphalt shall be cut using jack hammers.

students knowledge
147 of
The road section shall be excavated to expose the existing cables manually for which the trial
pit may be made prior the full manual excavation is proceeded with.
The existing electrical pole shall be diverted accordingly.
The minor irrigation lines shall be diverted according to the Officials instructions.
The plants shall be taken off the site for preservation
After the exposure of the cables, the Operating Authority authorities shall inspect and the
cables be diverted accordingly following which the remaining machine excavation be carried
out to the specified levels
The excavated material shall be removed from the site to stockpile area.
The excavated trench shall be inspected by the authorities as required.
The potable and the Desalinated water pipes shall be laid by others.
Backfill around the service pipes shall be carried using the appropriate material.
The service pipes surrounding material shall be compacted as per the project specification
requirements. Test results shall be provided for the specification conformance verification.
The existing services shall be reinstated accordingly.
The plants or trees if removed and so required, shall be reinstated accordingly.
General fill up to the underside of road formation shall be placed in 150mm compacted layers
using mechanical methods to the specification requirements.
A concrete slab shall be cast up to the bottom of the finished asphalt level.
The finishing shall be carried out using approved asphalt mix.
Major Equipment
Excavator.Dump trucks.Compactors.
Jack Hammer, Compressor,
Attachment
Sketch showing the traffic management scheme
Drawings including the traffic diversion
#65

students knowledge
148 of
Road crossing for laying 2 pipes
1 for 20” raw ethane
&
1 for 6” propane
First street Operating Authority entry
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Safety
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
location identified on the attached drawing to the following references
Safety
Prior to the commencement of any activity the labour force shall receive a / STARRT card /
Toolbox talk. Any process involving a particular safety risk shall be assessed and adopted
measures addressed to raise to a minimum standard
In this case the excavation has to be carried out on the Operating Authority area, therefore all
the regulated precautions shall be strictly adhered to effect a full safety standard.
on site to be noticeable to all the persons involved on the crossing
Barricades, cones, markers, the night-lights, and floodlights etc. shall be installed as required
Flagman-On both directions, in addition to the traffic sign boards, a flagman shall be engaged
full time to direct the traffic about the excavation work in progress by flag signal
Hand Excavation- Excavation to expose the services be carried out manually. In case certain
services not shown on the record drawings such as fibre optics but it is discovered, further
excavation shall be ceased and hydrojetting applied.
Machine Excavation

students knowledge
149 of
The operators / drivers shall be explicitly instructed to abide by the requirement of the reverse
signal and sound when operating reverse. Banksman shall be engaged while the equipment
operates. No violation of the traffic rules shall be allowed
Method
A traffic management scheme shall be produced as detailed on the attached sketch
Drawing reference Piping Interconnections First Street’:
Existing Services
One lighting pole is located on the central verge adjacent to the proposed excavation
The minor irrigation / hoses exist to irrigate the central verge plantation
Some minor trees and plants are also growing on the central verge.
The road shall be divided in 2 parts as shown on the sketch as L1 and L 2
portion on the part L2
portion on the completed road portion on the part L1
Instance 1
The asphalt shall be removed
Hand excavation shall be carried out to expose the cables & other services by seaming the
area with detectors
After the exposure, all the cables shall be covered with split PVC pipe to continue the
excavation mechanically
Remaining portion of the trench shall be excavated by machine
Preparation of the trench to lay RCC pipe sleeves shall be carried out
Bedding material shall be laid to receive the pipe sleeves
Pipe sleeves with dia 8 “ more than the specified respective pipes dia shall be laid to the
design alignment and levels
Filling over the pipe sleeves shall be carried out to specifications
The diverted services shall be reinstated
Backfilling up to the road formation shall be carried out to specifications
The above operations shall be repeated for Instance 2
The central verge shall be made good & the diverted services reinstated
A 70 mm thick layer of concrete shall be laid in place of the asphalt concrete. This shall be
subsequently broken out and replaced by asphalt when the asphalt plant is next in operation
The traffic management scheme shall be removed after the road crossing is cleared of all
debris and obstructions.
Major Equipment
Excavator, Dumper trucks, Compactors. Jack Hammer, Compressor,
Attachment
Sketch showing the traffic management scheme #66

students knowledge
150 of
Directional boring
For laying sleeves for
2 pipes
1 # 20” raw ethane
&
1 # 6” propane
Operating Authority Plant refinery entry
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the directional
boring under the road to facilitate to lay the sleeves for pipe lines 1 # each 20” Raw Ethane
and 6” Propane at location identified on the attached drawing to the following reference
Drawing reference –Piping Interconnections First Street:
Safety
Excavation Work Permit-
A copy of the work permit shall be posted on a mini board installed on site at the location
shown on the sketch to be noticeable to all the persons involved
A copy shall also be transmitted to EPC Contractor
at the pits for a complete safety.
Method
The necessary permit to work shall be obtained from the Plant Refinery Division.

students knowledge
151 of
The record drawings regarding the existing services shall be obtained
2 # trial pits shall be made manually on both ends of the proposed boring to ascertain the
availability of the existing services and protect these from any damage and shall also be used
for the bentonite trial at the receiving end
On site, sufficient excavated space is available to lower the sleeve in to pull into the bore
On Eastern end, some electric cable is existing
2 # 24” pipe lines are also existing adjacent to the proposed route
Minor trees on both ends may be effected in the roots
The excavated trench does not show any sign of water therefore, no de watering shall be
carried out
Excavation shall be carried out according to the requirement
On East End missing the berm, boring machine shall be positioned in the trench at about
3 m from the berm
The boring shall be carried out in stages.
First stage-
The sleeve is in the trench on the West end and the reamer fully underground.
Second stage-
The sleeve is partly pulled in and the reamer partly withdrawn
Third stage-
The sleeve further pulled and the reamer withdrawn accordingly
Fourth stage-
Full portion of the sleeve is underground in the bore and the reamer out
The excavated trenches on both ends shall be backfilled by Civil Contractor according to the
specification requirement and the required tests carried out
The reinstatement of the effected services shall be carried out after the directional boring is
completed
Directional Boring – A non- excavation Method which does not allow collapsing of the ground
surface
M / S Ditch Witch shall carry out the Directional Boring employing Jet Trac Directional Boring
equipment according to their method statement attached.
Refer to the attached sketches based on the Ditch Witch guidelines
Bentonite is pure clay to be used as a fluid / slurry formed by mixing water. It shall be used
to cool the drill bit and to lubricate the drill area
The material displaced by the head / sleeves shall be discharged at the receiving end in the
receiving pit and removed from the site
All fully trained operators shall be used on the job
Major Equipment
Jet Track Unit (complete package), Crane, Compactor
Attachment
Plan of the area indicating trial pits etc
Ditch Witch Method Statement
Cross-Section Sketches showing the indicative procedures
#67

students knowledge
152 of
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the thrust boring
under the road to facilitate to lay the pipe lines 1 # each 20” Raw Ethane and 6” Propane at
location identified on the attached drawing to the following reference
Drawing reference –Piping Interconnections First Street
Safety
on site to be noticeable to all the persons involved
Traffic Signs- Necessary traffic signs at the pits shall be provided
Hand Excavation- Excavation to ascertain the routes of the existing services encountered
during Thrust Boring in case not shown on the record drawings shall be carried out manually.
Method
Non Excavation Method
Necessary drive and receiving pits shall be excavated by Civil Contractor according the
approved procedures
M / S Ditch Witch shall carry out the Thrust Boring employing Jet Trac Directional Boring
according to the brief procedures given below
The Jet Track unit shall be anchored to the ground surface using hydraulically operated anchor
stakes
The directional boring / Angled bit shall be drilled into the ground using fluid assistance to
operate.

students knowledge
153 of
Bentonite and water shall be used to form a fluid to be sprayed at low pressure ejected out of
the drill head to lubricate the drill procedure as well as to cool electronic tracking components
in the drill head
An electronic receiver shall be used to track the head from the ground surface and when the
directional control is required, the head shall be pushed by the drill unit without rotation until
the drill head angle is reached
Head shall be steered to the ground surface when it reaches the destination end
Then Drill head shall be removed from the drill pipe and a backreamer with a pipe puller
attached alongwith the pipe / s to be installed underground
During backreaming, the drill fluid shall assist the backreamer lubricate and form slurried area
for the installable pipe
Backreaming and pipe pulling simultaneously shall allow the pipe to be installed underground
without excavation and continue until the backreamer and pipe reach the launch end of the
Directional bore accomplishing boring complete
Necessary tests shall be carried out by EPC Contractor
Major Equipment
Jet Track Unit complete package
Attachment
Ditch Witch Method Statement
Sketches showing the indicative procedures
#68
2 #s road crossings For laying
1 for 14” desalinated water
1 for 8”potable water
&
1 for 8” natural gas
1 for 6” propane
Avenue ‘c’
At fire station
Top
Index
Scope
Safety
Equipment

students knowledge
154 of
Attachment
Scope
the road crossings to construct culverts to facilitate to lay the pipe lines
1 # each 14” Desalinated water, 8” Potable water and
1 # each 20” Raw Ethane, 8” Natural Gas and 6” Propane
at locations identified on the attached drawing pertaining to avenue C
at existing Fire Station
Safety
measures addressed, to raise to a minimum standard
the regulated precautions shall be strictly adhered to have ‘ full safety standard’ effect.
Safety Supervision
to bring the adopted safety measures to an acceptable standard
In case of incident where utilities not identified are discovered or damaged, all work shall stop
in the area and the Operator Shift Controller and HSE department immediately notified
Phone number :
Shift Controller
Emergency Number
HSE Direct number
Employees working in easement area shall have a daily pre-task briefing that includes;
Reporting of incidents
Methods of work and tools to be used
Potential hazards found in the Easement areas
The approved work method statement
EPC Contractor and Civil Contractor HSE department shall participate in presenting the
STARRT card briefing and monitor the activities to ensure that the work methods are being
followed and all personnel have an understanding of the hazards associated with working
adjacent to live process areas
on site to be noticeable to all persons involved with the crossing
Barricades, cones, markers, night-lights, and floodlights etc. shall be installed as required for a
complete safety. No oil spillage shall be allowed.
Flagman-On all directions, in addition to the traffic sign boards, flagmen shall be engaged full
time to direct the traffic about the ‘excavation work in progress’ by ‘flag signal’
Hand Excavation- Excavation to expose the services shall be carried out manually.

students knowledge
155 of
In case certain services not shown on the record drawings such as fibre optics but it is
discovered, further excavation shall be ceased until a decision is taken for the method to be
adopted for further excavation
come out of the trench. No jumping shall be allowed
Machine Excavation
signal and sound when operating reverse. Banksman shall be engaged during equipment
operation. No violation of the traffic rules shall be allowed
Pre cast members
Since pre cast culvert units, covers and sleepers are heavy in load, proper care has to be
exercised during raising & downing (handling) to the exact locations strictly adhering to the
relevant safety measures
Method
Drawing reference – Piping Interconnections Road Avenue ‘C’: N
Existing Services
One serving electric pole is located away from the crossing towards North
Street light electric cables exist & Some minor plants also growing on the central verge.
The road shall be excavated in one instance by diverting the traffic on both sides as shown
Procedures
Backfilling shall be carried out to the existing excavated cross trenches on both end of the
proposed crossings up to the natural ground level to provide effective traffic ‘divertion routes’
from the road carriageways according to the traffic management scheme attached
Traffic management scheme shall be implemented effectively
Existing services from the central verge shall be diverted or protected as required and directed
by the competent concerned authority
The asphalt and the central verge pertaining to the crossings portion shall be removed
Hand excavation shall be carried out to expose the cables & the other services by seaming the
area with detectors
After the exposure, all the cables shall be covered with split PVC pipe & well supported
temporarily to continue the excavation mechanically
Remaining portion of the trench shall be excavated by machine to the defined levels
Preparation of the trench to construct RCC culverts shall be carried out
The construction pertaining to the pipe carrying culverts including the laying of pipe sleepers
anchored with standard dowels, covers, fixing steps etc.shall be carried out according to the
drawings and the approved procedures using pre cast RCC units / members
In addition, one access boxout on both ends shall be provided to design details
Inspections shall be conducted to the requirement
Backfilling up to the road formation shall be carried out according to specifications

students knowledge
156 of
The broken asphalt portion shall be made good using new asphalt
75 mm dia holes in the pre cast units meant for lifting shall be filled with concrete
Access boxout shall be closed with concrete after the pipes are laid
8 mm galvanised removable chequer plate covers with 2 lifting handles shall be provided to
design details
Major Equipment
Excavator, Dumper trucks, Compactors. Jack Hammer, Compressor, Asphalt finisher, Road
Rollers
Attachment
#69
2 #s road crossings
For laying
1 for 14” desalinated water
1 for 8”potable water
&
1 for 6” propane
Avenue ‘c’ At fire station
Top
Index
Scope
Safety
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
1 # each 14” Desalinated water, 8” Potable water and

students knowledge
157 of
1 # each 20” Raw Ethane, 8” Natural Gas and 6” Propane at locations identified on the
attached drawing pertaining to avenue C / First Street Road Crossing at existing Fire Station
Safety
measures addressed, to raise to a minimum standard
Safety Supervision
to bring the adopted safety measures to an acceptable standard
Phone number :
Shift Controller
Emergency Number
HSE Direct number
Barricades, cones, markers, night-lights, and floodlights etc. shall be installed as required for a
complete safety. No oil spillage shall be allowed.
Access to trench- the workers shall clearly be instructed to use only the ladders to enter in or
Machine Excavation
signal and sound when operating reverse. Banksman shall be engaged during equipment

students knowledge
158 of
Pre cast members
exercised during raising & downing (handling) to the exact locations strictly adhering to the
Method
Drawing reference Piping Interconnections Road Avenue ‘C’:
Existing Services
One serving electric pole is located away from the crossing towards North
Street light electric cables exist & Some minor plants also growing on the central verge.
The road shall be excavated in two instances by diverting the traffic on either lane completing
one after the other as shown on the traffic management scheme
Procedures
Existing services from the central verge shall be diverted or protected as required and directed
by the competent concerned authority
Instance 1
The asphalt and the central verge pertaining to the crossing portion Stage-1 shall be removed
Hand excavation shall be carried out to expose the cables & the other services employing
seaming the area with detectors to detect the existence of cables
In addition, one access boxout at the end shall be provided to design details
Instance 2
The aforesaid activities shall be repeated for this instance for the crossing portion Stage-2
75-mm dia holes in the pre cast units meant for lifting shall be filled with concrete

students knowledge
159 of
design details. Other chequer plates shall be provided to the design details
Major Equipment
Rollers
Attachment
#70
GRC Panel fixing
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Definitions
Responsibilities
Safety
Method Equipment
Attachment
Scope
The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the fixing of
preformed GRC panels to columns, parapet and horizontal bands ( locations where there are
no projected beams and also where the projected beams exist).
Reference documents
Drawings- ELEVATIONS
FIBREX Shop Drawings and
Statement
Definitions
FM Foreman
QC Quality Control
Responsibilities

students knowledge
160 of
Safety
Prior to the commencement of any activity the work force shall receive a Toolbox talk relevant
to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements. Any process is adopted
having a particular safety risk shall be assessed and addressed as required to raise to a
minimum standard / an acceptable mark.
Adequate scaffolding shall be provided for the safe access to the work location
Safety harness shall be provided for the personnel working at heights
Method
The work of the GRC manufacturing and fixing shall be carried out by the
Fibrex Co. W.L.L PO Box #
All the metal hanger sub frames exposed surfaces shall be painted to specifications
Fixing Column Panels
The floor finish level shall be marked and the bottom defined.
The bottom fixing level shall be marked using a template corresponding to the GRC bottom
panel situation.
2 #s Stainless Steel bracket 75x75x6 mm shall be fixed with 10 mm S / S Parabolt pins
drilled on the wall
The bottom panels C1 shall be located to the final true position with slotted holes in GRC
panels prefilled with Polyurethane mastic prior to placing
Stainless Steel double side pin bracket 75x75x6mm shall be fixed on the top of the bottom
panels to have a pin penetration at least 25 mm inside the slot at bottom panel to act as a
lateral restraint with 25mm protrusion beyond top( panel top) level.
FIBREX Drawing Ref
The inverted S / S upper restraint bracket shall be fixed with over sized hole at the C1S panel
top cast in sockets and the panel fixed to the bracket with M10 S / S bolt.
The upper panel C1S shall be located and aligned to the final level and position
The panel shall be fixed to the bracket with M10 S / S bolt
The foregoing sequence shall be repeated for the other column panels
The panel joints shall be filled with Polyurethane sealant
Fixing Parapet Panels
The bottom level of the panel and the location of the steel box brackets shall be marked
according to the details on the FIBREX shop drawings
The steel box brackets shall be fixed to walls according to the details on the drawings
The horizontal 70x60x6 mm U channels shall be fixed to the box bracket at 3 levels as marked
on the drawing
16 mm holes shall be drilled on U channels corresponding to the panel fixing points using
template

students knowledge
161 of
75x75x6xmm steel brackets shall be fixed with over sized holes to the wall locations
corresponding to the cast in sockets in the GRC panels. (Ref drg)
GRC panels shall be located and aligned to the final level and position
The panel cast in socket shall be fixed to the bottom bracket with 10 mm S / S bolt with
washer
2 # S / S brackets shall be fixed on the concrete parapet corresponding to the cast in socket
on the top level of the panel and the panel be fixed with the bracket with M 10 threaded bar,
nuts and washers
The top GRP cover shall be fixed and screwed in
to the GRC panel on one side and parapet on the other as shown on the shop drawing
All the slots / exposed fixings locations shall be closed with GRC closing pieces
The foregoing sequence shall be repeated for the other panels also
Fixing Horizontal Bands
Fixing at locations where there is no projected beams
The level and the fixing locations shall be marked on the wall according to the details on the
shop drawings
2 # 75x75x6mm S / S brackets shall be fixed with pin on the marked locations
2 # 75x75x6mm S / S brackets shall be fixed with hole at higher level as shown on the shop
drawing
The panel shall be located and aligned to final level and position.
Slotted holes in GRC panels shall be prefilled with Polyurethane mastic prior to placing
The panel shall be fixed to the top brackets with S / S M 10 bolts
The top fixing slot shall be closed with GRC closing pieces
Fixing at locations where there is projected beams
The level and fixing locations shall be marked on the wall as shown on the shop drawing
12 mm dia holes shall be drilled on the wall fixing locations
M10 threaded bars shall be fixed to the panels ‘cast in sockets 4 #’ in the panel
4# holes on the wall shall be filled with chemical (Upat chemical anchors)
The panel shall be located and aligned to final level and position
The panel shall be held until the chemical dries
Major Equipment
Attachment
Fibrex Statement

students knowledge
162 of
#71
Painting
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Definitions
Responsibilities
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
Painting System on the above building on various surfaces according to the specifications and
the material system approved.
References
Specifications DG
MAR #
Definitions
FM Foreman
QC Quality Control
Responsibilities
Safety
Prior to the commencement of work, the labour force shall receive a Toolbox talk relevant to
the operation concerned to the Project Site Safety requirements.

students knowledge
163 of
Any process that is adopted which may have a particular Safety risk shall be assessed to the
The personnel shall use the PPE, gloves, masks, eyeglasses etc and to avoid skin contact.
use of barrier cream shall also be made.
Adequate arrangement shall be made to provide access to the top of the wall.
Adequate scaffolding with proper netshade shall be provided wherever required
The personnel shall use the waist safety belt / harness while working on height.
Immediate medical care shall be provided in case the eyes of any personnel are effected due
to the paint splashes or any other reason
Proper ventilation shall be provided to let the workers respirate properly
observed who immediately implement the instructions accordingly.
Storage
The material shall be stored under cover out of direct sunlight and protected from extreme
temperatures. Shelf life 12 months between 5 deg and 35 Celsius
Materials
Berger Paint systems
MAR #
Table 1
S # Sub Strata Surface preparation Operating
temperature
1 Galvanised steel-
Exterior,Polyurethane
Mechanical cleaning to remove
loose deposits
Upto 100 deg C
2 Mild steel-Exterior,
Polyurethane
Blasting to Sa 2.5 Upto 100 deg C
3 Concrete Surface-
Exterior,
Polyurethane
textured
Cleaning with sand stone to
smoothen the surface free from all
dirt etc
Upto 100 deg C
4 Galvanised Steel-
Interior, Alkyd
loose deposits
Upto 60 deg C
5 Galvanised Steel-
Interior, Primed
ferrous metal Alkyd
Mechanical cleaning to St 2 to
remove loose rust, scales
Upto 60 deg C
6 Plaster and Gypsum-
Gypsum wall board
and plaster, Acrylic
Cleaning with fine emery paper to
remove dirt etc.
Upto 50 deg C

students knowledge
164 of
System # 1, Exterior Surfaces –Galvanised Steel, Polyurethane
Table 2
Coats Generic
Type
# of
coat
s
Solids
volume
%
DFT
Microns
Colour Applicat
ion
Berger
Product
Primer Surface
tolerant
high build
epoxy
1 82 100 Alumini
um
Brush /
Spray
Epimast
ic 5100
Al
Finish Gloss
Polyurethan
e
1 50 50 White /
Colours
Brush /
Spray
Robbiat
hane
2 150
System # 2, Exterior Surfaces –Ferrous Metal, Polyurethane
Table 3
Coats Generic
Type
# of
coat
s
Solids
volume
%
DFT
Microns
Colour Applicat
ion
Berger
Product
Primer High build
epoxy
polyamide
primer
1 57 75 Red Brush
/
Spray
Epilux
78
Interme
diate
High build
epoxy
polyamide
1 68 100 Grey Brush
/
Spray
Epilux
218HS
Finish Gloss
Polyurethan
e
1 50 50 White /
Colours
Brush
/
Spray
Robbiat
hane
3 225
Touch up if required with Epilux 78 after power tool cleaning on spots

students knowledge
165 of
System # 3, Exterior Surfaces –Concrete Masonry, Polyurethane Textured
Table 4
Coats Generic
Type
# of
coat
s
Solids
volume
%
DFT
Microns
Colour Applicat
ion
Berger
Product
Primer Epoxy
Concrete
1 45 50 White Brush /
Spray /
Roller
Epilux
Concret
e
Primer
Interme
diate
Epoxy
spray
compound
in textured
finish
1 68 1000 White Hopper
Gun
Luxatile
Epoxy
Spray
Compo
und
Finish Gloss /
Semi Gloss
Polyurethan
e
1 50 50 White
/
Colours
Roller /
Spray
Robbiat
athane
1100
The textured pattern is unpressed and the DFT could vary from 700 to 1000
micron or more as manually applied by hopper gun
System # 4, Interior Surfaces –Galvanised Steel, Alkyd
Table 5
Coats Generic
Type
# of
coat
s
Solids
volume
%
DFT
Microns
Colour Applicat
ion
Berger
Product
Etch
Primer(T
o be
used in
surface
preparati
on
instead
of
blasting)
Two Pack
washer
primer
1 8.5 5 Greenish
Yellow
Brush /
Spray
Luxaprim
e 1500
Primer
Coat
Anticorrosive
rust inhibitive
1 55 55 Red Brush /
Spray
Luxaprim
e 1500

students knowledge
166 of
Primer
Intermedi
ate Coat
Alkyd
Undercoat
Spray
Luxole
1000
Finish
Coat
Alkyd Enamel 1 48 48 White /
Colours
Brush /
Spray
Luxole
5000
4 155
Luxaprime 1000 has to be applied on the same day of Luxaprime 1500
System # 5, Interior Surfaces –Primed Ferrous Metal, Alkyd
Table 6
Coats Generic
Type
# of
coat
s
Solids
volume %
DFT
Microns
Colour Applicat
ion
Berger
Product
Primer
Coat(If
required)
High build
alkyd zinc
phosphate
primer
1 50 50 Red /
Grey
Brush /
Spray
Luxaprim
e 1400
Intermedi
ate Coat
Alkyd
undercoat
Spray
Luxol
1000
Finish
Coat
Colours
Brush /
Spray
Luxol
5000
Note-
Primer
need not
be
applied if
already
primed
3 150

students knowledge
167 of
System # 6, Interior Surfaces –Gypsum Wallboard and plaster, Acrylic
Table 7
Coats Generic
Type
# of
coat
s
Solids
volume
%
DFT
Microns
Colour Applicat
ion
Berger
Product
Primer
Coat
Premium
quality alkali
resisting
primer
Roller
Brolac
Acrylic
AR
Primer
Filler
Coat
High quality
acrylic based
wall filler
1(to
seal
&
smo
othe
n
the
surf
ace)
81 To
smoothe
n the
surface
White Spatula Berger
Super
Wall
Filler
Intermedi
ate Coat
High quality
acrylic
emulsion
1 35 50 White /
Colours
Roller Bergerco
at Acrylic
Emulsion
Finish
Coat
Semi gloss
acrylic
emulsion
1 35 50 White /
Colours
Roller Brolac
Semi
Gloss
Emulsion
3 >100
Method
GENERAL
Marking of containers
Materials shall be delivered in sealed containers clearly labelled with the following information.
Manufacturer’s name, initials or recognised trade mark
Title and specification number
Whether primer or undercoat, finishing coat

students knowledge
168 of
Whether for internal or external use where appropriate
Colour reference from BS 4800
Method of application
Batch number and date of manufacture and re – test
No paint shall be used after 18 months of manufacture or re test
Coating materials other than spray paints, bituminous pants and fine textured masonry paint
shall be in containers not exceeding 5 litres capacity
Samples
Sample panel of 1 sqm in area shall be prepared for each type and colour of coating material
to be used in the work for the approval
Sample material of each paper / fibre material minimum size 500 x 500 mm showing at least
the pattern repeat where applicable shall be submitted for approval
Part 2
Materials
Preparatory Materials
Paint removers, abrasive papers and blocks, cleaning agents, etching solutions, stopping,
knotting, fillers and other commodities shall be of the types recommended by the manufacturer
of the coating to be applied
White spirit shall comply with BS 245
Knotting shall comply with BS 1336
Stopping and filler for woodwork shall be approved proprietary Leadless oil based type
recommended for internal or external work as appropriate. Stopping for woodwork to receive a
coat finish shall be tinted to match with the surrounding work
Filler for plaster or rendering shall be approved proprietary type
Priming Coat
Filler Coat to the requirement
Intermediate Coat
Finishing Coat
All according to the approved system as aforesaid detailed for reference.
Application
PREPARATION OF THE GALVANIZED SURFACES
Dirt and other adherent contaminating matter / loose deposits shall be removed from
galvanised surfaces by mechanical means using Berger tool cleaner. Cleaning shall not
damage the galvanising. Oil or grease shall be removed from galvanised surfaces by the
application of an emulsion cleaner. Any zinc corrosion products remaining shall be removed by
washing with sweet water and scrubbing with hard bristle brushes
After being cleaned and degreased, all galvanised surfaces shall be etched with T-wash as
described in BS 5493. If any surface fails to turn black as cleaning, greasing and etching
processes shall be repeated.
APPLICATION OF PAINT GENERALLY
All paints shall be prepared and applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions. Priming paints shall be applied by brush. Spray application shall only be used for
painting of epoxy resin base

students knowledge
169 of
Exposure of intermediate coats of paint for periods in excess of a few days shall not be
permitted except in case of work delivered to site in a primed condition
The dried films shall be free from bloom, shrinkage, sheeringness, wrinkling, sagging,
curtailing, discoloration and extraneous matter
No exterior or exposed paint work shall be carried out under adverse weather conditions,
during rain, mist, sandstorms nor when the relative humidity exceeds 80%
Painting shall insofar as is practicable be shaded from direct sunlight by netting to prevent
wrinkling and bristling. Whenever possible exterior painting shall be so programmed during the
day so as to be carried out in shadow
Painting of surfaces shall not be carried out when condensation is present on such surfaces or
the application and / or drying of the paints is likely to be affected
Surfaces to be painted shall receive as first coat of paint as quickly as possible after the e
preparation has been completed
In case of metal surfaces this shall preferably be within one hour but always before the metal
temperature drops to less than 3 deg C above dew point and before any rusting
METHOD OF COATING
Each coat shall be applied uniformly over the entire surface. Skips, runs, sags and drips shall
be avoided. When these occur they shall be brushed out immediately or the materials
removed and the surface recoated. On beams and irregular surfaces, edges shall be strip
coated first and at extra pass made later. Each coat shall be allowed to dry for the time
specified by the manufacturer before application of any succeeding coat
Any primer coat exposed to freezing, excess humidity, rain, dust etc., before drying, shall be
removed, surface again prepared and primed
The time interval between application of coats shall not exceed that specified for optimum
results by the manufacturer
All coatings shall be cleaned as specified by the manufacturer before the next coat is applied
All areas not specifically mentioned in the painting specification shall be finished to conform to
the adjacent comparable areas
All fixtures and surfaces not to be painted shall be properly protected during application and
upon completion of the work all paint and varnish removed from glass, fixtures, covering, etc.,
Moveable parts shall not to be painted.
All parts such as pipe supports, seatings and cleats, back to back sections which shall become
inaccessible after fabrication shall be treated on both surfaces with the full paint system prior to
final assembly, thus ensuring adequate protection.
SPRAY APPLICATION
All equipment for spray application shall be inspected and approved before any application
begins. Spray guns, hoses and pumps shall be cleaned before new material is added. An
adequate moisture and oil trap shall be installed between the air supply to each application
unit.
Suitable pressure regulators and gauges shall be provided for the air supply to the application
units. Spray equipment and operating pressures shall comply with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
Coating materials containing heavy pigments that have a tendency to settle shall be kept in
suspension during the application by the power driven, continuous agitator

students knowledge
170 of
The spray gun shall be held at right angles to the surface and each pass overlap the previous
one by approximately 50%. All materials contained herein may be applied by airless spray.
BRUSH APPLICATION
Brushes shall be of a style and quality that permit proper application of the material
Flat brushes shall not be more than 100 mm wide. No extending handles shall be used on
brushes.
Brushing shall be done so that a smooth coat as nearly uniform in thickness as possible is
obtained without any deep or detrimental marks
Paints shall be worked into all corners and crevices.
When applying solvent type coating, care shall be taken to prevent lifting of previous coats.
FILM THICKNESS
Specified film thickness for coating materials shall be strictly observed which be checked with
an appropriate film thickness gauge. Calibration for the thickness range to be checked at least
twice a day
When dry film thickness are less than those specified, additional coats shall be applied as
required. Particular attention shall be paid to full film thickness on edges
In hot weather such additional precautions as are necessary shall be taken to ensure that the
specified dry film thickness on priming or finish coats is obtained
COATING QUALITY
Coatings shall be free from pinholes, voids, bubbles, dust, foreign inclusions and other
holidays and any such defect shall be repaired. Prior to the application of a coating, any
damage to the previous coating shall be repaired with the specified material. Upon completion
of the fabrication any damage to the coating system shall be repaired
TEST EQUIPMENT
Svensk photographic standard SIS 05 59 00
Coating thickness meter such as Elcometer ‘Minitector” Model 150
Wet fill thickness combs
Hygrometer
Maximum and minimum thermometer
Flow cup type B # 4 and timer
Surface profile meter such as Elcometer’Roughness detector’
Bolted site connections other than faying surfaces of Grip Bolt connections shall be brought
together ‘wet’
EPOXY COATING WORK GENERALLY
In addition to the general requirements the following conditions shall apply wherever epoxy-
coating work is being carried out
Forced draught ventilation shall be used wherever required for the needs of the personnel or
for drying out surfaces
Operatives shall work in pairs
Samples areas on substrate shall be prepared and coated for approval
There shall be strict control of surface cleanliness between primer and epoxy coating / and
between coats of the same. Vacuum removal of dust and sand shall be employed and
contamination removed. Where dirt or dust has been trapped in the painted surface it shall be

students knowledge
171 of
removed with suitable abrasive paper. The surface being painted shall be free of visible
moisture throughout these operations
The paint shall be applied only to the clean dry primed or previously coated surfaces. Any thick
runs or collections of paint shall be removed before these harden
Not less than 2 coats shall be applied over the primer by airless spray, less than 3 by brush
Each coat shall be distinctly different in colour from the primer or previous coat. The colour of
the final coat shall be as approved. Each coat shall be seen to have completely covered the
proceeding without ‘ misses’ or pinholes or any areas visibly low in thickness. A high voltage
pinhole detector shall also be used to determine the integrity of the coats
The manufacturer of the coating shall stipulate primer and epoxy recoat interval for all curing
temperatures likely to be encountered and these be adopted with a maximum tolerance of +4
hours. Where this is exceeded, the surfaces to be recoated shall first be suitably abraded to
remove gloss and provide a key
Wet thickness gauges shall be used by the coating operators continually to check that
sufficient paint is being applied to achieve the desired dry film thickness
EPOXY COATING FOR CONCRETE AND RENDERED SURFACES
No priming shall commence until the moisture content of the cementitious surface is less than
5% measured by Wetcheck Moisture meter or other instrument
Similarly moisture measurements over the primer or any epoxy intercoat shall not exceed 1 %
on the concrete scale of the instrument when the probe tips are held against such painted
surfaces just prior to recoating
The priming shall be applied by suitable Nylon bristle brush or spray over the whole area to be
coated at such thickness that it may then be squeezed into the pores of the concrete. Any
excess shall be removed by the most suitable means before application of the high build epoxy
The total DFT of the paint layer shall have a minimum specified value
Whenever the paint inspection gauge has been used and wherever the coating has been
otherwise damaged for 50 mm around such damage, the surfaces shall be abraded followed
by the area touched in with not less than 2 # thick applications to restore the coating integrity
to the specified thickness.
Adhesion tests shall be carried out on the cured coating surface using the test equipment
supplied in accordance with the best practice. The resulting test specimens shall show no
indication of poor adhesion to the substrate, residual laitance or intercoat adhesion weakness.
The following instrument shall be used
1 Adhesion Tester 0 to 35 kg / cm2
1 DC high voltage holiday detector # 105
One paint inspection gauge PIG
1 wet check moisture meter
#72
Painting

students knowledge
172 of
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Definitions
Responsibilities
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
Painting System on the above building on various surfaces according to the specifications and
the material system approved.
References
Specifications
MAR #
Definitions
FM Foreman
QC Quality Control
Responsibilities
Safety

students knowledge
173 of
Storage
Materials
MAR #
Table 8
temperature
1 Galvanised steel-
loose deposits
Upto 100 deg C
Polyurethane
3 Concrete Surface-
Exterior,
Polyurethane
textured
dirt etc
Upto 100 deg C
4 Galvanised Steel-
Interior, Alkyd
loose deposits
Upto 60 deg C
5 Galvanised Steel-
Interior, Primed
ferrous metal Alkyd
Mechanical cleaning to St 2 to
Upto 60 deg C
Gypsum wall board
remove dirt etc.
Upto 50 deg C

students knowledge
174 of
Table 9
Coats Generic
Type
# of
coat
s
Solids
volume
%
DFT
Microns
Colour Applicat
ion
Berger
Product
Primer Surface
tolerant
high build
epoxy
1 82 100 Alumini
um
Brush /
Spray
Epimast
ic 5100
Al
Finish Gloss
Polyurethan
e
1 50 50 White /
Colours
Brush /
Spray
Robbiat
hane
2 150
Table 10
Coats Generic
Type
# of
coat
s
Solids
volume
%
DFT
Microns
Colour Applicat
ion
Berger
Product
Primer High build
epoxy
polyamide
primer
1 57 75 Red Brush
/
Spray
Epilux
78
Interme
diate
High build
epoxy
polyamide
1 68 100 Grey Brush
/
Spray
Epilux
218HS
Finish Gloss
Polyurethan
e
1 50 50 White /
Colours
Brush
/
Spray
Robbiat
hane
3 225

students knowledge
175 of
Table 11
Coats Generic
Type
# of
coat
s
Solids
volume
%
DFT
Microns
Colour Applicat
ion
Berger
Product
Primer Epoxy
Concrete
Spray /
Roller
Epilux
Concret
e
Primer
Interme
diate
Epoxy
spray
compound
in textured
finish
Gun
Luxatile
Epoxy
Spray
Compo
und
Finish Gloss /
Semi Gloss
Polyurethan
e
1 50 50 White
/
Colours
Roller /
Spray
Robbiat
athane
1100
micron or more as manually applied by hopper gun
Table 12
Coats Generic
Type
# of
coat
s
Solids
volume
%
DFT
Microns
Colour Applicat
ion
Berger
Product
Etch
Primer(T
o be
used in
surface
preparati
on
instead
of
blasting)
Two Pack
washer
primer
1 8.5 5 Greenish
Yellow
Brush /
Spray
Luxaprim
e 1500
Primer Anticorrosive 1 55 55 Red Brush / Luxaprim

students knowledge
176 of
Coat rust inhibitive
Primer
Spray e 1500
Intermedi
ate Coat
Alkyd
Undercoat
Spray
Luxole
1000
Finish
Coat
Colours
Brush /
Spray
Luxole
5000
4 155
Table 13
Coats Generic
Type
# of
coat
s
Solids
volume %
DFT
Microns
Colour Applicat
ion
Berger
Product
Primer
Coat(If
required)
High build
alkyd zinc
phosphate
primer
1 50 50 Red /
Grey
Brush /
Spray
Luxaprim
e 1400
Intermedi
ate Coat
Alkyd
undercoat
Spray
Luxol
1000
Finish
Coat
Colours
Brush /
Spray
Luxol
5000
Note-
Primer
need not
be
applied if
already
primed
3 150

students knowledge
177 of
Table 14
Coats Generic
Type
# of
coat
s
Solids
volume
%
DFT
Microns
Colour Applicat
ion
Berger
Product
Primer
Coat
Premium
quality alkali
resisting
primer
Roller
Brolac
Acrylic
AR
Primer
Filler
Coat
High quality
acrylic based
wall filler
1(to
seal
&
smo
othe
n
the
surf
ace)
81 To
smoothe
n the
surface
Super
Wall
Filler
Intermedi
ate Coat
High quality
acrylic
emulsion
1 35 50 White /
Colours
Roller Bergerco
at Acrylic
Emulsion
Finish
Coat
Semi gloss
acrylic
emulsion
1 35 50 White /
Colours
Roller Brolac
Semi
Gloss
Emulsion
3 >100
Method
GENERAL

students knowledge
178 of
Samples
Part 2
Materials
Priming Coat
Intermediate Coat
Finishing Coat
Application

students knowledge
179 of
METHOD OF COATING
SPRAY APPLICATION
unit.
recommendations.
BRUSH APPLICATION
brushes.

students knowledge
180 of
FILM THICKNESS
twice a day
COATING QUALITY
TEST EQUIPMENT
Hygrometer
together ‘wet’

students knowledge
181 of
#73

students knowledge
182 of
Road crossing for laying 2 pipes
&
1 for 6”propane
Avenue ‘c’
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Definitions
Responsibilities
Safety
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
locations identified on the attached drawing to the following references
Reference documents
Drawing No.
Easement Systems Avenue “C”
Piping Interconnection Drawings, Avenue ‘C’
Definitions
SE Site Engineer
FM Foreman
QC Quality Control
Responsibilities

students knowledge
183 of
Safety
ToolBox Talks-
operations to make a record. Only English literate Foreman shall be employed to work on
the excavation execution.
Barricades,cones, markers and the night-lights, flood lights etc. shall be arranged as
required for a complete safety. No oil spillage shall be allowed.
work in progress
barricade limits
Machine Excavation

students knowledge
184 of
Deep Trenches
If required, the shoring shall be provided to prevent the caving in. In case of the trench depth
being more than 1200 mm. Adequate means of exit such as Aluminium ladder or steps shall
be provided and located no more than 8 m of lateral travel.
Plants preservation
The live plants and the trees arboricultured shall be deplanted integrally with the roots and
preserved to the specialist requirement so that these remain live till the replantation is carried
out all to the satisfaction of the specialist
Safety Supervision
Method
barriers, night lighting and road cleaning activities etc.
TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT SCHEME ROAD CROSSING – First Street / Avenue ‘C’
Drawing reference –24168-P40-310-00005 Rev O
This proposed crossing is located on the Road Avenue ‘C’ between the following
Co-ordinates as shown on the referred drawing.
This is a 2-way road with a central verge and carrying 2 lanes on either way
The proposed crossing is located about 160 m from 1st
street road towards North
One serving electric pole is located away from the x-ing
The minor irrigation / hoses are serving on the central verge
Some minor trees and plants are arboricultured on the central verge.
of the carriageway.
The directory signboards shall also be placed on the 1st
street road East West on both ways to
indicate the work at the crossing
For the traffic North to South the first reduce speed for traffic diversion informatory board
depicting shall be located at 300 m from the point of the proposed crossing, the second

students knowledge
185 of
depicting diversion signs be located at 200 m and the third depicting men at work sign be
For the traffic South to North past crossing, one sign shall be placed to direct for the diversion,
to slow down and the men at work ahead
The following activities are involved. Reference to the marked note ‘B’ on the
Easement Systems Drawing
To produce the Traffic Diversion Management Scheme
5.5KV / 0.24KV cables are available
Trial pits to be excavated in size 5mx2mx1.5m deep by hand tools
To seam the area with the detectors to ascertain the access to the cable
After the exposure, all the cables to be covered with split PVC pipe to continue the excavation
mechanically according to the authority directions and as agreed
Details
The first section of the proposed road crossing as per the attached sketch shall be marked by
the surveyor on the actual location. Any existing services shall be identified from the Record
drawings and measures to protect resorted to according to the regulations.
The asphalt shall be cut using jackhammers
The road section shall be excavated to the existing cables manually for which the trial pit may
be made prior to the full manual excavation is proceeded and after ascertaining the safe
procedures the exposures be completed.
The potable and the Desalinated water pipes shall be laid by others.

students knowledge
186 of
The plants or trees if removed and so required, shall be reinstated accordingly.
Major Equipment
Attachment
#74
Earthworks survey system
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Definitions
Responsibilities
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
control of the site earthwork activities.
Reference documents
Method statement. Site Preparation & Earthworks.
Specification Site Preparation.
Definitions
EPC Contractor
Civil Contractor .
ST Survey team.
QM Quality Manager.
RFI Request for Inspection.

students knowledge
187 of
Responsibilities
The PSM shall ensure the implementation of this method statement upon the earthworks
activities.
The IS shall coordinate and supervise the implementation of this method statement by the ST
on a day to day basis.
Safety
The Safety Officer shall monitor the daily earthworks activities, advising and implementing all
safety procedures.
Method
Where areas are to be grubbed, the IS shall direct the ST to establish grid stakes, at 50m
centers, within the area to be grubbed. The ST, prior to the commencement of the machine
activities shall provide a sketch of the area defining the outer Northings and Eastings of the
area.
Upon completion of the establishment of the survey grid stakes and the site sketch, the IS shall
inform the QM.
The QM shall inspect the area to verify the correct establishment of the survey grid stakes.
The QM shall notify the EPC Contractor Engineer of the proposed grubbing activity by using
the RFI notification system.
The EPC Contractor Engineer shall review the proposed grubbing area. Should the EPC
Contractor Engineer have any comments or observations about the area, he shall inform the
QM and / or IS of these observations. The appropriate actions shall be conducted.
Upon completion of the grubbing activity, the IS shall notify the QM, who shall inspect the area
and complete the appropriate RFI.
The EPC Contractor Engineer shall review the area with the QM and Geotechnical Engineer,
and comment if appropriate.
Where the area requires to be “cut”’ the ST shall establish pegs to indicate the correct cut
level. The cut activity shall be conducted.
Upon completion of the “cut” activity, the ST shall produce a ground level survey of the cut
area. This survey shall be forwarded to the QM for record purposes. The QM shall transmit a
copy of the survey report to the EPC Contractor Engineer.
Where the area requires a “fill” activity, the formation level shall be moisturized and compacted
as defined within the earthworks method statement. The IS shall coordinate with the ST to
establish fill stakes, that shall indicate the layer levels. Each fill layer shall be placed,
moisturized and compacted according to the earthworks method statement.
Upon completion of all the fill layers to the area, the ST shall produce a survey of finished
ground levels. This survey shall be forwarded to the QM for record. A copy of this survey shall
be transmitted to the EPC Contractor Engineer.
Should a grubbing level stake or fill stake be damaged or moved, the ST shall re establish the
stake correctly.
The RFI system shall document the comments and observations of an activity by the EPC
Contractor engineer.
Equipment
Total station distomat.

students knowledge
188 of
Stakes.
Marker tape.
Attachment
None.
#75
Road crossing for laying
84”GRE pair seawater
Cooling lines
At
Avenue ‘d’ / corniche
Junction
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Safety
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
the road to facilitate to lay the pipe lines 1 # pair 84” GRE Sea Water Cooling supply lines at
Avenue’D’ and ‘Cornice Road’ junction identified on the attached drawing to the following
references
Reference documents
Drawing No.
Piping Interconnection Drawings- SeaWater Cooling Supply Lines
Safety
the regulated precautions shall be strictly adhered to effect ‘ full safety standard’.

students knowledge
189 of
Safety Supervision
Phone number :
Shift Controller
Emergency Number
HSE Direct number
Flagman-On all directions, in addition to the traffic sign boards, a flagmen shall be engaged
full time to direct the traffic about the ‘excavation work in progress’ by ‘flag signal’
Access to trench- The workers shall clearly be instructed to use only the ladders to enter in
or come out of the trench. No jumping shall be allowed
Machine Excavation
signal and sound when operating reverse. Banksman shall be engaged equipment operation.
Method
Corniche Road / Avenue ‘D Junction’
Avenue ‘D’ is a 2-way road carrying single lane on either way
Corniche Street is a 2-way road with a central verge, carrying 2 lanes on either way on the
West direction and without a central verge but single lane on the Eastern direction.
The essential permit to work shall be obtained from the Refinery Division.
The record drawings pertaining to the existing services shall be obtained.
detailed on the attached sketch for this road crossing

students knowledge
190 of
Pumping out water shall be carried out continuously in case it is necessary
Existing Services
2 # serving electric poles are located one at the curve and the other in the Northern central
verge which shall be effected by the proposed trench as the excavation line is expected to
pass through the verge and the general impacts shall be to the extent of,
“The central verge partly, the island partly, guard rail fully about 30 m with channels, Corniche
street sign board, Kerb stones”
The road shall be divided in 2 parts on either side of the carriageway.
First Instance
The first section covering the length of one pipe to be connected to the existing pipeline at
South of the proposed road crossing shall be marked on the actual location.
The work shall be carried out on part 1 diverting the traffic to the road portion on part 2 and on
the existing natural ground at South as shown on the sketch.
The road section shall be excavated to the existing cables manually and the existence of the
cables confirmed by the use of seaming. After the exposure of the cables, the Operating
Authority authorities shall be invited to inspect and the cables diverted accordingly
The cables shall be protected by PVC split pipe and covered, supported well temporarily. The
machine excavation shall be carried out to the final levels.
level, compacted and tested.
The excavated trench shall be inspected by EPC Contractor
The GRE pipes shall be laid & the line tested by EPC Contractor.
Backfill around the service pipes shall be carried out using the appropriate material.
and compacted to the project specification requirement with the test results provided
confirming the conformance
General fill up to the underside of road formation shall be carried out in 150mm compacted
layers using mechanical methods to the specification conformance.
Second Instance
In the second instance the work shall be carried out on part 2 diverting the traffic to the road
portion on the completed part 1.The second instance shall commence only when the first is
completed allowing the traffic to ply.
All the aforesaid operations shall be repeated for the 2nd
instance allowing the traffic on the
completed Instance 1
The traffic management system shall be removed after the road crossing is cleared of all
debris or obstructions.
Either side of the road X-ing shall be provided with relevant markers to indicate the services
Major Equipment
Jack Hammer, Compressor, hydro jetting (depending on necessity)

students knowledge
191 of
Attachment
#76
Road crossing for laying
84”GRE pair seawater
Cooling lines
At
Avenue ‘d’ / corniche
Junction
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Definitions
Responsibilities
Safety
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
the road to facilitate to lay the pipe lines 1 # PAIR 84” GRE SEA WATER COOLING SUPPLY
LINES at Avenue’D’ and ‘Corniche Road’ junction identified on the attached drawing to the
following references
Reference documents
Drawing No.
Piping Interconnection Drawings- SeaWater Cooling Supply Lines
Definitions
SE Site Engineer

students knowledge
192 of
FM Foreman
QC Quality Control
Responsibilities
Safety
ToolBox Talks
operations to make a record.
Only English literate Foreman shall be employed to work on the excavation execution.
work in progress
Flagman-On all the direction, in addition to the traffic sign boards, a flagman shall be engaged
to operate full time to direct the traffic about the excavation work in progress by waving the flag
for all the vehicles passing by

students knowledge
193 of
barricade limits
Machine Excavation
Deep Trenches
Since the proposed excavation is wide and deep all the safety measures shall be resorted to
and If required, the shoring shall be provided to prevent the caving in. The trench depth being
more than 1200 mm.adequate means of exit such as Aluminium ladder or steps shall be
provided and located no more than 8 m of lateral travel.
Existing Services
2 # electric poles and the other various categories of about 8 to 10 # running services ducts
and the cables etc shall be properly diverted according to the regulatory requirement and
preserved until reinstated
Safety Supervision
Method
barriers, night lighting and road cleaning activities etc.
TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT SCHEME ROAD CROSSING –
Corniche Road / Avenue ‘D Junction’
Drawing reference
This proposed crossing is located on the Road Avenue ‘D’ between the following
Avenue ‘D’ is a 2-way road carrying single lane on either way
Corniche Road is a 2-way road with a central verge, carrying 2 lanes on either way on the
West direction and without a central verge but single lane on the Eastern direction.
2 # serving electric pole are located 1 at the curve and the other in the Northern central verge
which shall be effected by the proposed excavation because of encroachment on the verge.

students knowledge
194 of
The central verge partly, the island partly, guard rail fully about 30 m with channels, Corniche
street sign board, Kerb stones shall all be effected by the construction of the proposed road
crossing
The road shall be divided in 2 parts as shown on the sketch as L1 and L 2 on either side of the
carriageway.
The second instant shall be commenced only when the first has been completed and the traffic
can ply.
For the traffic on both roads at’ 3’ locations bothways, the first reduce speed for traffic
diversion informatory board depicting shall be located at 300 m from the point of the proposed
crossing, the second depicting diversion signs be located at 200 m and the third depicting men
at work sign be located at 100 m on either way in the opposite directions.
The following activities are involved to produce the Traffic Diversion
Management Scheme
Various types of electrical, telecom and other services are running below and near the
proposed crossing
Trial pits to be excavated in size 5mx2mx1.5m deep by hand tools
To seam the area with the detectors to ascertain the access to the cable
After the exposure, all the cables to be covered with split PVC pipe to continue the excavation
mechanically according to the authority directions and as agreed
To reinstate the CORNICHE ROAD board and the metallic rail guard
Details
the surveyor on the actual location. All the existing services shall be identified from the Record
drawings as well as by digging and measures to protect or divert temporarily resorted to
according to the regulations.

students knowledge
195 of
The road section shall be excavated to the existing cables manually for which the trial pit may
be made prior to the full manual excavation is proceeded and after ascertaining the safe
procedures the exposures be completed.
The GRE pipes shall be laid by others.
Either side of the road X-ing shall be provided with markers to indicate the services
Major Equipment
Attachment
#77
Tennis courts surfacing
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Definitions
Responsibilities
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment

students knowledge
196 of
Scope
The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the Surfacing on
2 #s Tennis Courts located in the Camp
Reference documents
Drawing No.
Definitions
SE Site Engineer
FM Foreman
QC Quality Control
Responsibilities
Safety
relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements. Any process
The workers shall take all the precautions to avoid the skin and the eye contacts by using the
safety glasses, hand gloves, the uniform, gun shoes all according to the manufacturer’s
instructions. Immediate medical attention shall be provide when required
Safety Supervision
Storage
The bags shall be stored in a cool shaded area prior to use

students knowledge
197 of
Material
MBT proprietary material
Concresive 1414
MasterTop 512
Concresive 1414 is a 2 parts epoxy bonding agent
Mastertop 512 is a ready to use non-metallic and non oxidising synthetic mineral aggregate
and cementitious product applied as a topping onto the existing new concrete slab as a hard
durable wearing course. 10 to 12 mm thick. Total surface area of the Tennis Courts 2 # 930
m2
Method
The following operations are involved to carry out the surfacing
Substrata preparation
Priming and Bonding
Mixing and Application
Curing
Details
The area shall be closed to all persons except the workers and other personnel
The surface of concrete shall be cleaned of all contamination such as oil, grease or fat which
be removed before the preparations are commenced with
High pressure water jetting shall be used to prepare the concrete surface to a coarse texture
ensuring all weak or friable concrete be removed along with the contaminants
The concrete is already more than 28 days
Oil free Compressed air shall be used to remove dust making the surface clean & dry
The surface shall be primed with Concresive 1414 ensuring total coverage of the surface
A forced action Mixall mixer shall be used to mix Mastertop 512 according to the
The content of the bag shall be poured into the mixer followed by blending for about 30
seconds, thereafter slowly adding 2.3 to 2.4 litres of water per 25 kg bag allowing to mix for 3
minutes
In hot weather chilled clean water shall be used for mixing
The primed surface shall be prepared to be guided for the proposed profile formation by using
timber / wooden straightedge battens 10 mm thick
The mixed mortar shall have a plastic consistency exhibiting low slump which be evenly
spread over the primed surface already prepared as expressed in the foregoing
A straightedge shall be used to systematically tampen and level the Mastertop 512.
The floating material shall be pressed firmly on the primed surface using a wooden float to
produce the material evenly spread and compacted
A steel trowel shall be used to carry out the finishing.
Curing
The curing shall be carried out immediately after the final trowelling operation has been
completed by either covering with polythene sheets or by the application of Masterkure 181
applied at a rate of 1 litre per 5 m2

students knowledge
198 of
All the surfaces shall be protected from traffic until hardened( for light traffic the limit is 24
hours and for heavy 72 to 96 hours )
Major Equipment
Compressor, Mixer, Air Blower
Attachment
MBT Method Statement
#78
Precasting lighting poles foundations
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Definitions
Responsibilities
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the pre casting,
transporting and installing on exact site locations the street lighting poles foundation bases 319
#
Reference documents
Drawing No.
Specification
Definitions
SE Site Engineer
FM Foreman
QC Quality Control
Responsibilities

students knowledge
199 of
Safety
adopted involving a particular safety risk shall be assessed and addressed as required to raise
to a minimum standard / an acceptable mark.
All the safety precautions required to be adhered to while working on the excavations, blinding,
forms, rebars, concrete pouring, waterproofing etc.all according to the acceptable standards
shall be adopted on the operations concerned
Adequate safety shall be observed during lifting and offloading the precast foundations to the
relevant locations to avoid any mishap BY OBSERVING THE REGULATORY CRANE
FITNESS REQUIREMENT AND VALIDITY OF PERMIT. Only competent personnel shall be
engaged to carry out the operation
The crane and the trailer operators shall adhere to all the traffic rules while carrying out the
operations and if so required, a banksman be engaged to direct the movement
The crane shall not be operated during the inclement weather conditions with dust storms
Immediate medical attention shall be provide as and when required
Safety Supervision
Material
Concrete, Rebars / Lifting Lugs, Anchor Bolts,
100 mm dia 350 internal radius PVC Cable Duct etc.
Method
Pre casting Area-The existing yard being used for the pre casting of manholes, catch basins
etc. shall be employed for this purpose also
The following operations are involved to carry out the production of the light poles foundation
bases
Pre installation operations
To fabricate and erect the side forms 4 #s to the specified dimensions
To fabricate the rebars according to the specified details
To provide the non critical cathodic protection
To provide the PVC cable duct
To provide the bolt assesmbly to the requirement and location
To provide the lifting lugs to carry a gravity load of at least 3 tonnes + handling stresses
To pour the concrete
To cure the concrete immediately after pouring

students knowledge
200 of
Post casting operations
To cure for the specified period
To excavate the location to the required formation level
To blind the area to be founded with concrete
To waterproof the blinding as specified
To keep the area ready in all respects well oriented & aligned to receive the foundation directly
to be offloaded
To apply the water proofing membrane around as specified
To provide the protection board as specified
To back fill the surrounding space to the relevant grade level
Details
The typical size of the foundation is 1000x1000mm in plan and 1100mm deep
According to the drawing 319 # are specified to be constructed for a quantity 351 m3
A possible of 10 units shall be produced by pre casting every day on an average
The forms to the exact size with the preformed chamfers shall be prepared and erected
The steel rebars shall be cut, bent to the required shape, placed and the cage prepared
holding 75mm concrete spacers, be positioned into the forms.
1 # 350 mm internal radius 100 mm dia PVC cable duct formed to the dimensions shall be
anchored by binding wires to the exact locations shown on the drawing keeping the upper end
flush with the concrete top
The Lifting lugs as shown on the sketch shall be fixed in to the correct locations
The forms for the block outs for the lifting lugs shall be fixed in to the correct locations as
shown without clashing with the duct or the rebars allowing a protrusion of the hook
The bolt assembly shall be fixed in exact position according to the design details
The non-critical cathodic protection shall be arranged using a metallic continuous binding wire
connecting all the horizontal rebars terminating into a boss fixed at one location near the top in
the middle of the side opposite the duct carrying portion
All the supports and the dimensions shall be checked and the plumb monitored
Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted followed by the EPC Contractor inspection
The concrete shall be poured to all the prepared units in 3 layers in vertical sequence
The appropriate vibrator shall be used for the compaction of the concrete
During concreting, care shall be taken to keep the anchor bolts’ position undisturbed and the
intermittent checks be continuously made to monitor the spacing / centres between the bolts
After the concrete is poured in full & well compacted, the surface shall be levelled using a
wooden float followed by light steel trowel
Immediately after the concrete starts setting, approved curing compound shall be sprayed on
the surface forming a continuous membrane which be covered over with a polythene sheet
according to the specifications
After 2 hours, the polythene sheet shall be temporarily removed to spread over the concrete
surface the saturated burlap cloth or hessian, and recovered immediately
The side forms shall be removed within the specified period
The vertical concrete surfaces shall be spread with the curing compound immediately after
striking the forms and covered with the polythene sheet according to requirement
The curing shall be continued for the specified period

students knowledge
201 of
The relevant locations shall be made ready to receive the precast units by completing the
excavation, blinding, the horizontal waterproofing and forming the correct alignment
Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted for the’location to receive followed by EPC
Contractor approval
The unit shall be lifted by a mobile crane, loaded gently onto a trailer and transported to the
location for offloading on to the prepared ‘location to receive’ the unit
The unit shall be installed on the marked location according to the correct orientation to the
lighting layout drawing
The protruding lifting lug eyes shall be cut to 60 mm inside the block out, the void filled with
concrete by first scabbling the internal surface followed by cement slurry grouting and pouring
concrete
The external surfaces of the foundation shall be applied with the concrete protective
membrane according to the specifications
The membrane protection board shall be provided covering the surface to the specified details
The back filling shall be carried out according to the specification upto the required levels in
layers and upto the required ground grade or the pavement
The points to locate the cathodic protection shall be provided with a marker to trace the boss
The sequence shall be repeated for all the lighting poles foundations
Major Equipment
Compressor, Mobile Crane, Trailer
Concrete Pump, Transit mixer
Attachment
Lifting arrangement sketch
#79
Lighting poles foundations
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the
pre casting, transporting and installing on exact site locations the street lighting poles
foundation bases 319 #

students knowledge
202 of
Reference documents
Drawing No.
Specification
Safety
Toolbox talk relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements.
All safety precautions necessary during working on excavations, blinding, forms, rebars,
concrete pouring, concrete protection etc. shall be applied to acceptable standards
Adequate safety measures shall be adhered to during lifting and offloading precast foundations
to relevant locations avoiding any mishap BY OBSERVING THE REGULATORY CRANE
FITNESS REQUIREMENT AND VALIDITY OF PERMIT.
Only competent personnel shall be engaged to carry out the operation
Crane and trailer operators shall abide by all traffic rules while carrying out operations and if so
required, a banksman shall be engaged to direct the movement
Safety Supervision
Material
Concrete, Rebars / Lifting Lugs, Anchor Bolts,
100 mm dia 350 internal radius PVC Cable Duct, Bitustick XL, Masterseal 300H
Method
Pre casting Area- the existing yard being used to pre cast manholes, catch basins etc. shall be
employed for this purpose also
The following operations are involved to carry out the production of the lighting poles
foundation bases
Pre installation operations
The typical size of the foundation is 1000x1000mm in plan and 1100mm deep
According to drawing 319 # are specified to be constructed (quantity 351 m3)
On an average 10 units shall be produced by pre casting every day
The forms to the exact size with the preformed chamfers shall be prepared and erected
The steel rebars shall be cut, bent to the required shape, placed and the cage prepared
holding 75mm concrete spacers, and positioned into the forms.
1 # 350 mm internal radius 100 mm dia PVC cable duct formed to the dimensions shall be
anchored by binding wires to the exact locations shown on the drawing keeping the upper end
flush with the concrete top
The Lifting lugs as shown on the sketch shall be fixed in at the correct locations
The forms for the block outs for the lifting lugs shall be fixed in at the correct locations as
shown without clashing with the duct or rebars allowing a protrusion of the hook
Bolt assembly shall be fixed in at exact position according to the design details

students knowledge
203 of
Non-critical cathodic protection shall be arranged using a metallic continuous binding wire
connecting all the horizontal rebars terminating into a boss fixed at one location near the top in
the middle of the side opposite the duct carrying portion
All the supports and dimensions shall be checked, corrected if required and the plumb
monitored
An Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted at regular intervals throughout the
operations
The concrete shall be poured to all the prepared units in 3 layers in vertical sequence
During concreting, care shall be taken to keep the anchor bolts’ position undisturbed and the
intermittent checks be continuously made to monitor the spacing / centres between the bolts
An Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted prior to concrete pour & ITP signed off
Curing
Immediately after the concrete is finished, the surface shall be covered with polythene sheet
with the edge lapped or tied down to exclude air circulation without permitting the membrane to
be in touch with concrete surface according to the specifications
After the concrete has stiffened but no longer than 2 hours, the polythene sheet shall be
removed followed by immediate covering the surface with saturated( soaked with mix quality
water) hessian and recovered with polythene sheet to prevent evaporation from the hessian.
Throughout the curing period, the hessian shall be maintained in a permanent wet condition
using mix quality water
The side forms shall be removed after the specified period of 24 to 36 hours as agreed
The vertical concrete surfaces shall be draped with the saturated hessian immediately after
striking the forms and covered with the polythene sheet held firmly in place along all edges &
kept continuously wet for duration of curing
An Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted from time to time throughout the
operations
Installation operations
excavation, blinding, the concrete protection and forming the correct alignment
AN Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted for the'location to receive' & ITP signed
off
relevant area to offload on to the prepared ‘location to receive’
AN Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted
The protruding lifting lug eyes shall be cut to 60 mm inside the block out, the void filled with
concrete by first scabbling the internal surface followed by cement slurry grouting and pouring
concrete

students knowledge
204 of
The below ground surfaces of the foundation shall be applied with concrete protective
membrane according to the specifications
The membrane protection board shall be provided covering the surface to the specified details.
The backfilling shall be carried out in layers according to the specification upto the required
levels The points to locate the cathodic protection shall be provided with a marker to trace the
boss. Top surface of the foundation shall be applied with above ground concrete protection as
specified
EPC Contractor surveillance / inspection / approval shall be according to the approved
ITPs
Major Equipment
Concrete Pump, Transit mixer
Attachment
#80
Sea water surge basin
Concrete protection master seal 550
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Definitions
Responsibilities
Safety
Material
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
This statement is aimed to present the proposed procedures to be adopted to apply the
specialist protection coating material on the internal concrete surfaces (shown on the drawings
by cross hatching) of the sea water surge Basin according to the specifications.
References
Drawings
Specifications

students knowledge
205 of
-Protection to concrete Surfaces
Definitions
SE Site Engineer
FM Foreman
QC Quality Control
Responsibilities
Safety
Prior to the commencement of work, the labour force shall receive a tool box talk on the
Project Site Safety requirements. Any process adopted which may involve a particular Safety
risk, shall be assessed to the requirement for Site conditions and be taken care of.
Scaffolding shall be erected to afford access to the working personnel according to the project
requirements. Hand rails ladders and the toe boards shall be fitted and inspected prior to use.
During mixing and application of master seal 550, personnel protective equipment shall be
used i.e. overalls, goggles, gloves (to avoid material contact to eyes, mouth and skin)
Used containers shall be collected and disposed off according to the state regulations.
Medical attention shall immediately be made available as and when required
Materials
Coating, Masterseal 550
Master seal 550 is a two component acrylic modified cementitious coating that requires only
site mixing to form an ideal product to waterproof, resurface concrete, masonry and most other
construction materials. Simply applied by stiff brush, roller or trowel it forms a waterproof and
flexible coating providing an effective barrier to waterborne salts and atmospheric gases.
Method
The method involves the following sequences in general.
Surface preparation
Mixing
Application
To keep up the exact coverage to form 1 mm thick coating an area of 11 m2 shall be marked
on the concrete surface. The contents of the bag shall be applied on this area only

students knowledge
206 of
At Joints
The material coating shall terminate at the joints (Refer to the attached sketch) which are to be
treated with sealant.
The part of the coating that has to be embedded into the joint sealant shall be applied first
followed by the major area on the panel be coated thereafter
Details
All grease, oil, dust, residual curing compound, mould release agent or other contaminants
which could impair adhesion shall be removed from the surface by degreasing and washing.
Arrises shall be rounded off and the surface protrusions ground down to ensure smooth
substrata
The whole surface to be coated shall be cleaned using water jetting from a distance of 2 to 3 m
from the panel surface and visually inspected to ensure that the required degree of roughness
has been achieved which be evident at a stage when the aggregate be exposed on the
surface.
All the holes, voids, depressions, spalls etc. shall be filled with Masterseal 550 mixed to a
trowel consistency, scraped lightly into the surface, allowed to dry and later roughened by
hand wire brush on the small areas and gently water jetted on the larger areas.
The filled areas shall be visually inspected to ensure that the correct mechanical key is formed.
Mixing
Master seal supplied in the pre-measured units shall be mixed on site using clean containers.
The powder shall be slowly added to the liquid component and agitated / mixed for 2 minutes
using a slow speed hand power drill fitted with a suitable paddle attachment until a
homogeneous lump free consistency is obtained.
The mix quantity shall be such that it could be consumed in one hour during application without
allowing any retempering with water.
Application
The material shall be 1 mm thick applied in one coat
The prepared surface area to be coated shall be saturated with fresh and clean water
The material shall in no case be applied on the dry surface
The mixed material shall be applied while the surface is visibly damp without standing water
using short stiff brush or roller with short hair.
(Roller shall be used in major / large areas)
The evenness and the thickness of the applied coating shall be regularly ascertained by the
consumed quantity to the applicable ratio of 11 m2 each container during application while the
material is still wet.
The coverage of 11-m2 surface shall be the evidence for the actual formation of 1-mm thick
coating.
The material shall be allowed to dry and visually inspected
No curing shall be carried out

students knowledge
207 of
Equipment
Water tanker with water jetting arrangement
Clean container
Attachment
Typical sketch for joint for guidance purpose
#81
Concrete coating of structures using
masterseal 550
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Safety
Material
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to apply the specialist
protection coating material on those concrete surfaces requiring special protection e.g. The
interior of Sea water Surge basin & Collection Sumps
References
Specifications
Protection to concrete Surfaces
Safety
Prior to the commencement of work, the labour force shall receive a STARRT card / Tool box
talk relevant to the operation concerned on the Project Site Safety requirements.
Necessary measures shall be applied to address any risk involved on any process
Tagged scaffolding shall be erected to afford access to the working personnel
Personnel working on sand blasting & mixing and application of master seal 550, shall wear
overalls, gloves, safety glasses and masks
Used containers shall be collected and disposed off according to the state regulations.

students knowledge
208 of
Method
Joints - The material coating shall terminate at the joints to be treated with sealant. As shown
on the attached sketch
The part of the coating to be embedded into the joint shall be applied first to permit sealant
application followed by the major area on the panel to be coated thereafter
Surface preparation
Arrises shall be rounded off and protrusions ground down to ensure smooth substrata
The whole surface to be coated shall be lightly sand blasted & visually inspected to ensure that
the required degree of roughness has been achieved.
All holes, voids, depressions, spalls etc. shall be filled with Masterseal 550 mixed to a trowel
consistency, scraped lightly into the surface, allowed to dry and later roughened by hand wire
brush on small areas and lightly sand blasted on larger areas.
The filled areas shall be visually inspected to ensure that the correct mechanical key is formed.
Mixing
Master seal supplied in the pre-measured units shall be mixed on site using clean containers.
The powder shall be slowly added to the liquid component and agitated / mixed for 2 minutes
using a slow speed hand power drill fitted with a suitable paddle attachment until a
homogeneous lump free consistency is obtained.
The mix quantity shall be consumed in one hour during application without allowing any
retempering with water.
Application
One coat application shall be 1 mm thick
An area of 11 m2 shall be marked on Concrete surface to consume 1 bag content to produce 1
mm thick coating.
Prepared surface area to be coated shall be saturated with fresh and clean water
Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted
Material shall in no case be applied on the dry surface
Mixed material shall be applied on the visibly damp surface without standing water using short
stiff brush or roller with short hair. (Roller shall be used in major / large areas)
Evenness and the thickness of the applied coating shall be regularly monitored relating the
consumed quantity @ 11 sqm / bag during application while the material is still wet.
Applied material shall be allowed to dry and visually inspected
Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted and the ITP signed off
No curing shall be carried out
Field samples shall be taken to confirm 1mm thick coating has been applied
Equipment
Sand blasting package
Compressors
Clean container

students knowledge
209 of
Attachment
Typical sketch for joint (for guidance)
#82
Seawater surge basin
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Definitions
Responsibilities
Safety
Storage
Material
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to form a protection coating
on the above ground RCC walls’ external faces as well as on the internal surface areas other
than those where Masterseal 550 shall be applied
References
Drawing
Specifications
Master seal 300 H-product data sheet
Master seal 181 S-product data sheet
Protection to concrete Surfaces
MAR for Masterseal300 H
MAR for Masterkure 181
Definitions
SE Site Engineer
FM Foreman
QC Quality Control

students knowledge
210 of
Responsibilities
Safety
risk, shall be assessed to the requirement for Site conditions and be taken care of.
Scaffolding with the hand rails, the ladders and the toe boards fitted and inspected prior to use
shall be erected to provide access to the working personnel according to the project
requirements.
Only tagged scaffolding comprising all the guard rails foot rails etc. shall be used for the work
The personnel shall use protective clothing, gloves eye protection glasses, masks etc., for to
avoid skin contact.
Plenty of clean water shall be available all the time.
Medical attention shall be available all time to treat the adverse effects.
Transportation shall be available to move the effected personnel to the hospital should the
circumstances so require.
The material shall be stored under cover out of direct sunlight clear of ground, protected from
rainfall as well as temperature extremes.
Product shelf life is 12 months subject to proper storage
foodstuffs.
The containers shall be resealed after use.
Immediate medical attention shall be called for in case of any adverse effect to the personnel
handling the product
Material

students knowledge
211 of
Method
Priming the surface
Coating the surface
Details
Preparation
All surfaces shall be free from oil; grease, friable matters and curing compound.
smooth.
mixed with Masterseal 300 H filler applied as a scrape coat over blowholes and depressions.
Application
The continuous coating may be achieved in 1 or 2 coats of application
The coating shall be protected from the rain and humidity for 24 hours / until it dries out
using polythene sheets keeping off the area.
The coating shall be applied when the humidity is less than 90 %
The areas to be coated shall be protected from direct sunlight by net shading in the hot
weather conditions and the ambient temperature be more than 5 degree Celsius.
Equipment
Brush
Roller
Attachment
MBT datasheet & Statement
#83
joint seal

students knowledge
212 of
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Definitions
Responsibilities
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
sealant to fill the joints formed in the walls and the base. This statement shall be construed in
conjunction with Method Statement # approved / IFC vide Transmittal site-including an
alternative to this document. Any of the 2 methods may be used for the joint treatment
according to the convenience on site
References
Specifications
Definitions
SE Site Engineer
FM Foreman
QC Quality Control
Responsibilities
Safety
risk shall be assessed to the requirement for Site conditions and be taken care of.

students knowledge
213 of
Scaffolding with the hand rails, the ladders, the toe boards fitted and inspected prior to use
shall be erected to provide access to the working personnel according to the project
requirements.
Only tagged scaffolding comprising all the guard rails foot rails etc. shall be used for the work
Used containers shall be collected and disposed off as per project requirements.
Medical attention shall immediately be made available as and when required
The personnel shall use the PPE, gloves, masks, eyeglasses etc, and to avoid skin contact.
Hands shall be cleaned by Industrial cleaner followed by washing with soap and water.
Storage
Materials
De-bonding tape (to be applied before priming)
Sealant Masterflex 700 (High performance, elastomeric joint sealant)
Masterflex Primer # 1
Masterflex 700 is a high grade, synthetic rubber sealant possessing outstanding resistance to
deterioration due to weathering, ozone, ultra violet light and attack by chemicals present in
industrial atmospheres. The product has the capability to withstand repeated cycles of
compression and extension over a wide range of tempertaure range and has excellent
adhesion properties to all materials employed in buildings
Supplied in pouring and gun grade for horizontal and vertical joints respectively
Masterflex Primer # 1 is meant for porous surfaces such as concrete and masonry
Coverage Joint depth 25 mm, width 25 mm, Filling length 1.6 m per litre
Packages 3 litres sealed containers
Method
This following operational sequences shall be involved
Pre application activity
The corner area to be embedded into the sealant to be made ready with Master seal 550
Refer to Method Statement # 93
Application
Preparation of the surface required to be sealed
Taking the filler board to the required depth
Cleaning the surface and applying the de-bonding tape
Priming the surfaces
Application of the sealant up to the profile shown

students knowledge
214 of
Details
The joint area shall be prepared according to the sketch and the site conditions.
The filler shall be trimmed the the specified depth
All surfaces shall be cleaned of dust and contaminants using wire brush and made dry.
The debonding tape shall be fixed as shown on the sketch
The surface shall be primed using brush according to the instructions given on the primer tins
The primer shall be allowed to dry to a tack free state before Masterflex 700 is applied within 3
hours maximum to avoid repriming
Mixing
One complete unit shall be mixed at one time without subdivision
Mixing shall be carried out for 5 to 10 minutes using a paddle fitted 500 rpm electric drill
A palette knife shall be used to scrap the container surface intermittently to ensure that all
curing agent be completely blended with the base compound.
The material shall immediately be used after mixing
Application
the joint width by cutting
The sealant shall be gunned into the joint using an even trigger pressure and cleaning the
nozzle occasionally to avoid contamination. Deep joints shall be filled in 2 runs to prevent air
entrapment
A smaller timber spatula soaked in soapy water shall be used to compact the sealant into the
joint for a smooth polish finish formation.
The mixing and application equipment shall be cured immediately
Equipment
Paddle mixer
Sealant gun
Attachment
Manufacturer’s statement
#84
Painting Sub stations
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Definitions
Responsibilities
Safety

students knowledge
215 of
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
Painting System on the above building on RCC surfaces, Galvanised surfaces,Metal surfaces,
Dry wall partition and the plastered surfaces according to the specifications and the material
system approved. A brief regarding the proposed surfaces has been mentioned below
Concrete General Wall Surfaces- Textured Epoxy Coating
Equipment Enclosure External Concrete Walls at grade level- Textured Epoxy Coating
Column Faces Features –50mm projection from general wall face with central vertical rebate-
Smooth Epoxy coating & finished
Face-horizontal band finish-50mm projection beyond wall face. Top horizontal edge to be
splayed at 45 degree-Smooth epoxy coating & finished
Vertical ribs fair face concrete face- Smooth epoxy coating & finished
Electrical Equipment / HVAC / Battery / Air Lock-
Walls- High Build Washable Acrylic Emulsion
Ceilings- High Build Emulsion
Steel doors external- Polyurethane
Galvanised external- Polyurethane
References
Notes on the Drawings & the Finishing Schedule
Specifications
MAR # Berger Paint Systems
Definitions
SE Site Engineer
FM Foreman
QC Quality Control
Responsibilities

students knowledge
216 of
Safety
Storage
Materials
Specified: Texotile from Jotun or Equivalent
Approved:
MAR # dated 27.1
The following table provides the details of the approved systems but the appropriate relevant
system shall be followed according to the scope of the work.
Appropriate arrangement adjustment shall be made for the Textured and the smooth surface
applications to the manufacturer’s specifications / instructions
Column head –50-mm epoxy coating shall be separately stated
Table 15
temperature
1 Galvanised steel-
loose deposits
Upto 100 deg C
Polyurethane
3 Concrete Surface-
Exterior,
Polyurethane
textured
dirt etc
Upto 100 deg C
4 Galvanised Steel-
Interior, Alkyd
loose deposits
Upto 60 deg C

students knowledge
217 of
5 Galvanised Steel-
Interior, Primed
ferrous metal Alkyd
Mechanical cleaning to Sa 2 to
Upto 60 deg C
Gypsum wall board
remove dirt etc.
Upto 50 deg C
Table 16
Coats Generic
Type
# of
coa
ts
Solids
volume
%
DFT
Microns
Colour Applica
tion
Berger
Product
Primer Surface
tolerant
high build
epoxy
1 82 100 Alumini
um
Brush /
Spray
Epimast
ic 5100
Al
Finish Gloss
Polyurethan
e
1 50 50 White /
Colours
Brush /
Spray
Robbiat
hane
2 150

students knowledge
218 of
Table 17
Coats Generic
Type
# of
coa
ts
Solids
volume
%
DFT
Microns
Colour Applica
tion
Berger
Product
Primer High build
epoxy
polyamide
primer
1 57 75 Red Brush
/
Spray
Epilux
78
Interme
diate
High build
epoxy
polyamide
1 68 100 Grey Brush
/
Spray
Epilux
218HS
Finish Gloss
Polyurethan
e
1 50 50 White /
Colours
Brush
/
Spray
Robbiat
hane
3 225

students knowledge
219 of
Table 18
Coats Generic
Type
# of
coa
ts
Solids
volume
%
DFT
Microns
Colour Applica
tion
Berger
Product
Primer Epoxy
Concrete
Spray /
Roller
Epilux
Concret
e
Primer
Interme
diate
Epoxy
spray
compound
in textured
finish
Gun
Luxatile
Epoxy
Spray
Compo
und
Finish Gloss /
Semi Gloss
Polyurethan
e
1 50 50 White
/
Colours
Roller /
Spray
Robbiat
athane
1100
micron or more as manually applied by hopper gun. Appropriate instruction to
apply the smooth coat
shall be followed according to the manufacturer’s manual
Table 19
Coats Generic
Type
# of
coa
ts
Solids
volume
%
DFT
Microns
Colour Applica
tion
Berger
Product
Etch
Primer(T
o be
used in
surface
preparati
on
instead
of
Two Pack
washer
primer
1 8.5 5 Greenish
Yellow
Brush /
Spray
Luxaprim
e 1500

students knowledge
220 of
blasting)
Coats Generic
Type
# of
coa
ts
Solids
volume
%
DFT
Microns
Colour Applica
tion
Berger
Product
Primer
Coat
Anticorrosive
rust inhibitive
Primer
1 55 55 Red Brush /
Spray
Luxaprim
e 1500
Intermedi
ate Coat
Alkyd
Undercoat
Spray
Luxole
1000
Finish
Coat
Colours
Brush /
Spray
Luxole
5000
4 155
Table 20
Coats Generic
Type
# of
coa
ts
Solids
volume
%
DFT
Microns
Colour Applica
tion
Berger
Product
Primer
Coat(If
required)
High build
alkyd zinc
phosphate
primer
1 50 50 Red /
Grey
Brush /
Spray
Luxaprim
e 1400
Intermedi
ate Coat
Alkyd
undercoat
Spray
Luxol
1000
Finish
Coat
Colours
Brush /
Spray
Luxol
5000
Note-
Primer
need not
be
applied if
already
primed
3 150

students knowledge
221 of
Table 21
Coats Generic
Type
# of
coa
ts
Solids
volume
%
DFT
Microns
Colour Applica
tion
Berger
Product
Primer
Coat
Premium
quality alkali
resisting
primer
Roller
Brolac
Acrylic
AR
Primer
Filler
Coat
High quality
acrylic based
wall filler
1(to
seal
&
smo
othe
n
the
surf
ace)
81 To
smoothe
n the
surface
Super
Wall
Filler
Intermedi
ate Coat
High quality
acrylic
emulsion
1 35 50 White /
Colours
Roller Bergerco
at Acrylic
Emulsion
Finish
Coat
Semi gloss
acrylic
emulsion
1 35 50 White /
Colours
Roller Brolac
Semi
Gloss
Emulsion
3 >100
Method
GENERAL

students knowledge
222 of
Samples
Part 2
Materials
Priming Coat
Intermediate Coat
Finishing Coat
Application

students knowledge
223 of
Civil Contractor QC inspections shall be conducted at every stage of surface preparation , post
application of the coat, prior to the proceeding and at the final coat completion followed by
EPC Contractor approval all according to the ITP documents attached
METHOD OF COATING
SPRAY APPLICATION
unit.
recommendations.

students knowledge
224 of
BRUSH APPLICATION
brushes.
FILM THICKNESS
twice a day
COATING QUALITY
TEST EQUIPMENT
Hygrometer
together ‘wet’

students knowledge
225 of
Equipment
Spray appliance
Brushes
Rollers
Attachment
ITP-Doc: QCF Rev B
Concrete paint system checklist
ITP-Doc :QCF Rev B

students knowledge
226 of
Internal painting check list
#85
Painting Sub stations
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Definitions
Responsibilities
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
This statement is aimed to present the procedures to be adopted to apply the Painting System
on the various surfaces of all the Sub Station buildings according to the following specifications
and the drawing references
References
Specifications
Definitions
SE Site Engineer
FM Foreman
QC Quality Control
Responsibilities
Safety
Prior to the commencement of work, the labour force shall receive a
STARRT Card / Toolbox talk regarding the painting system operation concerned to the
Project Site Safety requirements.

students knowledge
227 of
Any process involving a particular Safety risk shall be assessed to the requirement for Site
conditions and be taken care of. In this case all the adverse effects of the epoxy paint shall be
informed and the safety measures to be adopted instructed.
Adequate arrangement shall be made to provide access up to the top of the wall.
Tagged scaffolding with proper netshade shall be provided wherever required
The personnel shall use the waist safety belt / harness while working height.
Proper ventilation shall be provided to breathe properly
Storage
temperatures.
Materials
Specified: Texotile from Jotun or Equivalent
Approved: Berger Paint systems MAR dated 27.1.
The following table provides the details of the approved systems
Table 22
temperature
1 Galvanised steel-
loose deposits –Cleaning with
Berger Cleaner-Refer to
manufacturer’s recommendations
Upto 100 deg C
Polyurethane
3 Concrete Surface-
Exterior,
Polyurethane
textured
dirt etc
Upto 100 deg C
4 Galvanised Steel-
Interior, Alkyd
loose deposits - Cleaning with
Berger Cleaner -Refer to
manufacturer’s recommendations
Upto 60 deg C
5 MS / Ferrous Metal-
Interior,
Primed ferrous metal
Alkyd
Mechanical cleaning to Sa 2 to
Upto 60 deg C
Gypsum wall board
remove dirt etc.
Upto 50 deg C

students knowledge
228 of
Table 23
Coats Generic
Type
# of
coa
ts
Solids
volume
%
DFT
Microns
Colour Applica
tion
Berger
Product
Primer Surface
tolerant
high build
epoxy
1 82 100 Alumini
um
Brush /
Spray
Epimast
ic 5100
Al
Finish Gloss
Polyurethan
e
1 50 50 White /
Colours
Brush /
Spray
Robbiat
hane
2 150
Table 24
Coats Generic
Type
# of
coa
ts
Solids
volume
%
DFT
Microns
Colour Applica
tion
Berger
Product
Primer High build
epoxy
polyamide
primer
1 57 75 Red Brush
/
Spray
Epilux
78
Interme
diate
High build
epoxy
polyamide
1 68 100 Grey Brush
/
Spray
Epilux
218HS
Finish Gloss
Polyurethan
e
1 50 50 White /
Colours
Brush
/
Spray
Robbiat
hane
3 225
Touch up shall be carried out with ‘Epilux 78’ after cleaning the effected area using power tool

students knowledge
229 of
System # 3, Exterior Surfaces –Concrete Surface / Masonry, Polyurethane
Textured
Table 25
Coats Generic
Type
# of
coa
ts
Solids
volume
%
DFT
Microns
Colour Applica
tion
Berger
Product
Primer Epoxy
Concrete
Spray /
Roller
Epilux
Concret
e
Primer
Interme
diate
Epoxy
spray
compound
in textured
finish
Gun
Luxatile
Epoxy
Spray
Compo
und
Finish Gloss /
Semi Gloss
Polyurethan
e
1 50 50 White
/
Colours
Roller /
Spray
Robbiat
athane
3 1100
Because the textured pattern is unpressed the DFT may vary from 700 to 1000
micron or more as manually applied by hopper gun.
The smooth surface shall be produced by following the relevant manufacturer’s
instruction
Table 26
Coats Generic
Type
# of
coa
ts
Solids
volume
%
DFT
Microns
Colour Applica
tion
Berger
Product
Etch
Primer(To
be used in
surface
preparation
instead of
blasting)
Two Pack
wash
primer
1 8.5 5 Greenish
Yellow
Brush /
Spray
Luxaprim
e 1500

students knowledge
230 of
Coats Generic
Type
# of
coa
ts
Solids
volume
%
DFT
Microns
Colour Applica
tion
Berger
Product
Primer Coat Anticorrosi
ve rust
inhibitive
Primer
1 55 50 Red Brush /
Spray
Luxaprim
e 1500
Intermediat
e Coat
Alkyd
Undercoat
Spray
Luxole
1000
Finish Coat Alkyd
Enamel
1 48 50 White /
Colours
Brush /
Spray
Luxole
5000
4 155
Luxaprime 1000 primer coat shall be applied the same day when the surface is prepared by
etching using Luxaprime 1500
Table 27
Coats Generic
Type
# of
coa
ts
Solids
volume
%
DFT
Microns
Colour Applica
tion
Berger
Product
Primer
Coat(If
required)
High build
alkyd zinc
phosphate
primer
1 50 50 Red /
Grey
Brush /
Spray
Luxaprim
e 1400
Intermedi
ate Coat
Alkyd
undercoat
Spray
Luxol
1000
Finish
Coat
Colours
Brush /
Spray
Luxol
5000
Note-
Primer
need not
be
applied if
already
shop
primed
3 150

students knowledge
231 of
Table 28
Coats Generic
Type
# of
coa
ts
Solids
volume
%
DFT
Microns
Colour Applica
tion
Berger
Product
Primer
Coat
Premium
quality alkali
resisting
primer
Roller
Brolac
Acrylic
AR
Primer
Filler
Coat
High quality
acrylic based
wall filler
1(to
seal
&
smo
othe
n
the
surf
ace)
81 To
smoothe
n the
surface
Super
Wall
Filler
Intermedi
ate Coat
High quality
acrylic
emulsion
1 35 50 White /
Colours
Roller Bergerco
at Acrylic
Emulsion
Finish
Coat
Semi gloss
acrylic
emulsion
1 35 50 White /
Colours
Roller Brolac
Semi
Gloss
Emulsion
3 >100
Method
GENERAL
Manufacturer’s name or recognised trade mark
Batch number and date of manufacture
Samples
Sample panel of 1 sqm in area shall be prepared for each type of coating for approval on any
of the surfaces to be applied with that paint
Priming Coat

students knowledge
232 of
Intermediate Coat
Finishing Coat
All according to the approved system as aforesaid
Application
damage the galvanising.
APPLICATION OF PAINT (GENERAL)
instructions.
Exposure of intermediate coats of paint for periods in excess of specified time shall not be
The dried films shall be free from all defects such as bloom, shrinkage, sheerings, wrinkling,
sagging, curtailing, discoloration and extraneous matter
No exterior or exposed paintwork shall be carried out under adverse weather conditions i.e.,
during neither sandstorms nor when the relative humidity exceeds 80%
wrinkling and bristling.
the coating application on drying is likely to be affected
Surfaces to be painted shall receive the first coat of paint as quickly as possible after the
In case of metal surfaces, this shall preferably be within one hour but always before the metal
Civil Contractor QC inspections shall be conducted at every stage of surface preparation, post
application of the coat, prior to the proceeding coat and at the final coat completion, all
according to the ITP documents attached
METHOD OF COATING
be avoided. When these do occur, they shall be brushed out immediately or the materials
coated first and an extra pass made later. Each coat shall be allowed to dry for the time
Any primer coat exposed to, excessive humidity, dust etc., before drying, shall be removed,
and the surface again prepared and primed

students knowledge
233 of
SPRAY APPLICATION
unit.
recommendations.
BRUSH APPLICATION
No extending handles shall be used on brushes.
achieved without any deep or detrimental marks
FILM THICKNESS
Specified film thickness for coating materials shall be strictly observed which is checked with
an appropriate ‘film thickness gauge’.
When dry film thickness is less than that specified, additional coats shall be applied as
specified dry film thickness on priming or finishing coats is achieved by monitoring the wet film
thickness using the appropriate gauge. Additional coats shall be applied on the deficient area
COATING QUALITY
holidays and all such defects shall be repaired. Prior to the application of a coating, any
damage to the previous coating shall be repaired with the specified material.
TEST EQUIPMENT
Coating thickness meter such as Elcometer ‘Minitector” Model 150 or equivalent
Hygrometer
EPOXY COATING WORK (GENERAL)
Sample on substrate shall be prepared and coated for approval

students knowledge
234 of
between coats of the same application. Vacuum removal of dust and sand shall be employed
and contamination removed. Where dirt or dust has been trapped in the painted surface, it
shall be removed with suitable abrasive paper. The surface being painted shall be free of
visible moisture throughout these operations
The paint shall be applied only to the clean & dry primed or previously coated surfaces. Any
thick runs or collections of paint shall be removed before these harden
proceeding without ‘ misses’ or pinholes or any areas ‘visibly low’ in thickness. A high voltage
“The manufacturer of the coating shall stipulate primer and epoxy recoat interval for all curing
hours”. Where this is exceeded, the surfaces to be recoated shall first be suitably abraded to
otherwise damaged, the surfaces shall be abraded 50 mm around and the area touched in with
not less than 2 # thick applications to restore the coating integrity to the specified thickness.
Equipment
Spray appliance
Brushes
Rollers

students knowledge
235 of
Attachment
ITP-Doc: QCF Rev B
Concrete paint system checklist
ITP-Doc :QCF Rev B
Internal painting check list
#86
Electrical & instrumentation
trenches
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Definitions
Responsibilities
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
construction of the proposed Electrical and Instrumentation trenches to the following specified
details
Cable trench X-ing with U / G pipe
Cable trench X-ing with U / G pipe with closed drain pipe trench
Pipe X-ing direct buried cables only
Typical elctrical layout at pumps
Typical corner details for walled trench
Direct buried trench X-ing under Dummy Trench
Trench with dummy Trench X-ing under direct buried cable trench
Dummy + walled trench section
References
paving & Under Ground services
Electrical and Instrumentation Trench and Duct Bank details
Specifications
Definitions
SE Site Engineer

students knowledge
236 of
FM Foreman
QC Quality Control
Responsibilities
Safety
The personnel shall use the PPE, gloves, masks (for gas leak in area), eyeglasses (during
dusty winds) etc
Materials
Mass Concrete for strip foundation beam, Concrete blocks, precast covers, oil resistant sealant
Method
GENERAL-Dummy and walled trench section
To set out the exact alignment of the trenches to the specified co-ordinates
To barricade the involved area to the safety requirement
To excavate the trenches to the specified levels
To dress the formations and compact
To prepare the sides for the mass concrete 100mm thick
To pour the mass concrete
To set out the block walls alignment
To carry out 150mm thick block work to the specified levels upto the paving down beam level
To carry out the down standing paving portion & extend to the block wall top
To fill the trench with the excavated earth back according to specifications
To place the precast coloured concrete covers 1m or 3m lengths on the compacted ground
To Seal the paving and cover joint
Where the dummy trench runs over the duct bank (Typical Trench Duct Bank Detail)

students knowledge
237 of
The duct bank with the uPVC sleeves in for the crossing portion below the underground pipe
should be ready formed with the mass concrete the size of which shall vary according to the
number of crossing pipes
To excavate down to the top of the duct concrete in case backfilling has been completed
To clean the concrete surface
To set out the trench alignment
To set out the block wall alignment keeping maximum 50 mm overhang
To construct the block walls to paving down beam level
To carry out the down standing paving portion & extend to the block wall top
To fill the trench with the excavated earth back according to specifications
To place the precast coloured concrete covers 1m or 3m lengths on the compacted ground
To Seal the paving and cover joint
Additionally, in case the underground pipe runs X-ing the Trench, to lay the specified pipe prior
to the block work operation by others
To provide a flat crossing size equal (Duct Bank length + 300x2)
The formation level of the duct bank and the dummy trench shall be the same at the exact
crossing location
Where the dummy trench and the direct buried trench run parallel
To repeat all the sequences as in general in the aforesaid
To follow the profile of the dummy trench while constructing the buried trench for ease
To form the down slope profile at the crossings as shown on the drawing
The slope grade shall be 1 in 2
Where the cable trench crossing the closed drain pipe trench
The following additional operational sequences to the general trench construction for the
dummy or the direct buried shall be required
To provide the profile of the direct buried trench same as that of the cable duct trench
To provide the transition of levels between the dummy trench and the flat below X-ing by a
slope grade 1 in 2 as specified on the drawing
To provide a duct bank of size depending on the dimension of the closed drain trench to pass
above by providing a width (closed drain trench width + 100mmx2)
To provide a total flat width below the crossing equal (duct bank length + 300x2).
To provide the uPVC sleeves in the duct bank prior to the mass concreting
To allow a clear void of 100mm minimum between soffit of closed drain trench base and the
duct bank top
To provide cable tiles under trench crossing in direct buried cable trenches only(By others)
To allow the closed drain trench isolate from the paving
Where direct buried trench crossing under dummy trench
To provide a level difference of 350 mm between the dummy trench elevation and the
compacted surface below the crossing maintaining a transition slope grade 1 in 2

students knowledge
238 of
To allow the cables running in dummy trench to be protected by the cable tiles installed at 75
mm above the top of cables where no paving is shown (By others)
To allow to provide the cable protection tiles above the cables where these pass in the walled
trench to cross under the dummy trench (By others)
To form the walled trench corner detail according to the corner splay internal size 8485 mm
Where dummy Trench crossing under direct buried cable trench
To provide a flat surface below the X-ing at the bottom of the duct bank of size equal (duct
bank length + 300x2) with a slope grade transition 1 in 2
To provide a level difference of 100 mm between soffit of the direct burried cable trench and
the duct bank top
Where direct buried cable trench crossing under direct buried cable trench
To maintain a level difference 700 mm between direct buried trench and the crossing formation
level
To provide a transition grade 1 in 2
To provide a cable tiles in unpaved areas only and at trench crossing (By others)
To provide the formation crossing width equal (direct buried cable trench width + 400x2)
Electric Trench Layout at Pumps
To form the trench termination into an integral chamber of internal dimensions as
(Pump base length / 2+trench internal width) x (Pump base width +300+500)
Details in general
The surveyor shall setout the alignment of the trench concerned according to the details given
on the paving and underground services layouts to the reference co-ordinates
Civil Contractor QC shall conduct the inspection followed by EPC Contractor approval
The required safety arrangement shall be discussed with the safety department and
implemented accordingly to control the trench excavation, to provide barricades night-lights
etc, to divert the traffic if so required and to adopt any other unforeseen measures.
The excavation shall be carried out by an excavator to the lines and the surveyor monitor
various stages during the operation to maintain the required profile
The excavated material shall be transported immediately after being taken out using a dumper,
to the earth stockpiles temporarily
The formation levels after the excavation is over shall be well dressed and compacted to the
specification requirement
The forms of width 350mm and depth 100 mm shall be readily available to be fixed on the
prepared compacted formation duly aligned
The mass concrete shall be poured to the marked levels and tamped by wooden float
The curing shall be carried out according to approved procedures

students knowledge
239 of
The alignment of the block walls 150 mm thick shall be set out, the block work carried out in
courses in a straight line and plumb
The whole number of courses shall be laid, the fraction remained to be completed for the wall
height shall be covered by pouring during the paving down beam concrete
The connecting integrated / pouring area including the down beam shall be carried out to the
specified details according to the procedures
The backfilling shall commence and the trench filled according to the specifications
The precast covers of 1m or 3 m standard length already precast shall be placed on the
formed trench internal surface to the specified levels
The concrete shall be coloured to the specification requirement
Option
If so required and felt convenient for certain standard equal depth reaches, precast concrete
members of 100 mm thick sections may be utilised to substitute 150 mm thick walls directly
resting on the prepared formation
Equipment
Excavator
Dumper truck
Compactor
Attachment
None
#87
Electrical & instrumentation
trenches
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Definitions
Responsibilities
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
This statement is aimed to present the procedures to be adopted to carry out the construction
of the Electrical and Instrumentation Trenches to the typical details.

students knowledge
240 of
References
Drg Paving & Under Ground services
Electrical and Instrumentation Trench and Duct Bank details
Specifications
Definitions
SE Site Engineer
FM Foreman
QC Quality Control
Responsibilities
Safety
Prior to the commencement of work, the labour force shall receive a STARRT card / Toolbox
talk relevant to the operation concerned to the Project Site Safety requirements.
Any process involving a particular Safety risk shall be assessed to the requirement for Site
conditions and be taken care of.
dusty winds) etc
Materials
Mass Concrete for strip foundation beam, Concrete blocks, Precast trench covers,
oil resistant joint sealant
Method
GENERAL
Dummy / walled trench section (Detail 5 on the reference drawing)
The following operational sequences in brief are involved
Setting out to the exact alignment the route of the trench to the specified co-ordinates
Barricading the involved area to the safety department direction and requirement
Excavating the trench to the specified levels and sectional details
Preparing the formation to the required levels and dimensions
Form work for the sides of the mass concrete strip beams
Pouring the mass concrete to the strip beam forms
Setting out the alignment for the trench block walls

students knowledge
241 of
Block work 150mm thick in walls to the specified levels upto the pavement downstand beam
soffit level
Preparation and concreting the pavement portion monolithic with the downstand beam
extended upto the top of the block wall
Backfilling the trench with the excavated earth to the specifications
Placing the precast coloured concrete covers in 1m or 3m standard lengths on the relevant
compacted area
Sealing the joint between the pavement and the trench cover
Details about the above operations in general
The surveyor shall set out the alignment of the trench concerned according to the relevant
details given on the paving and underground services location plans to the reference
Co-ordinates
Civil Contractor QC shall conduct the inspection
The safety arrangement shall be discussed with the safety department and implemented
accordingly to control the trench excavation, to provide barricades, night-lights, to divert the
traffic if so required, and to adopt any other necessary measure.
The excavation shall be carried out by an excavator to the lines and the levels.
The surveyor shall monitor all stages of excavation to achieve the required profile
The excavated material shall be transported immediately by a dump truck to the earth
stockpiles temporarily
After the excavation is over, the formation levels shall be well dressed and compacted to the
specification requirement
The forms shall be fabricated for the mass concrete section
The fabricated forms of width 350mm and depth 100 mm shall be erected / fixed on the
prepared compacted formation duly aligned and levelled
Civil Contractor QC shall conduct the inspection throughout the stages of construction
The mass concrete shall be poured to the marked levels and tamped by wooden float
The forms shall be struck after the specified period
The curing of the mass concrete shall be carried out according to approved procedures and for
the specified period
The alignment of the block walls 150 mm thick shall be set out and the block work carried out
in courses in a straight line and plumb
The whole number of courses shall be laid. The fractional block course if so remained to make
up the required wall height, shall be constructed as a part of the pavement down beam
concrete by extending the bottom to the top of the block walls
The pavement / down beam monolithic pouring shall be carried out to the specified details
according to the procedures
The backfilling shall commence and the trench filled according to the specifications
The precast covers of 1m or 3 m standard length shall be placed on the filled trench internal
surface to the specified levels
The concrete shall be coloured to the specification requirement
Where the dummy trench runs over the duct bank (Ref drawing Detail 4, Sec A)

students knowledge
242 of
All the operations described in general shall be applicable herein as well with the following
amendments / additions to certain activities
Excavation shall be carried out to the top of the duct concrete only
The walls shall be started from the duct top level
Additionally, where the underground pipe runs X-ing the Trench, the specified pipe shall be laid
prior to the block work is commenced or openings shall be formed in the walls (Pipe laying
operation by others)
Flat width of the crossing shall be in size equal to the value given by the equation
“Duct Bank length + 300x2 “
Where the dummy trench and the direct buried trench run parallel
(Ref Drg Detail 4,sec B)
While constructing the buried trench, the profile of the dummy trench shall dictate the profile of
the buried trench
Sloping profile to a grade 1 in 2 shall be formed as shown on the drawing
Where the cable trench crossing with the closed drain pipe trench
(Ref drg Detail 6 sec C)
The profile of the cable duct trench shall dictate the profile of the direct buried trench
The transition of the formations between the trenches and the crossing shall be in grade 1 in 2
as shown on the drawing
The length of the duct bank shall be equal to the value given by the equation
Width of the closed drain trench in mm + 2x100
The crossing flat width shall be the duct bank length + 2x300
A gap of 100mm shall be kept between the duct bank top and the closed drain bottom surfaces
The duct bank shall be constructed according to the details
Cable tiles under the closed drain trench shall be provided in the direct buried trench only
A joint shall be provided between the pavement and the closed drain trench wall
Where direct buried trench crossing under dummy trench
(Ref Drg Detail) Sec G & H)
A level difference of 350mm shall be kept between the elevations of the crossing formation and
the dummy trench
The level transition shall be established by grading 1 in 2
The cables passing under the dummy trench shall be protected by cable tiles (By others)
The trench corner wall shall be constructed to the details showing the corner length on the
trench internal face 8485mm
Where trench with dummy Trench crossing under direct buried cable trench
(Ref Drg Detail 3 Sec E)

students knowledge
243 of
The profile of the cable duct trench shall dictate the profile of the direct buried trench
The transition of the formations between the trenches and the crossing shall be in grade 1 in 2
The length of the duct bank shall be equal to the value given by the equation
Width of the direct buried cable trench in mm + 2x100
The crossing flat width shall be the duct bank length + 2x300
A gap of 100mm shall be kept between the duct bank top and the closed drain bottom surfaces
The duct bank shall be constructed according to the details
Cable tiles under the closed drain trench shall be provided in the direct buried trench only
Where direct buried trench crossing under direct buried cable trench
(Ref Drg Detail 7 Section D)
A level difference 700 mm shall be kept between direct buried trench and the crossing
formation level
The crossing formation width shall be equal to the value from the equation in mm
(direct buried cable trench width + 400x2)
The transition of the formations between the trenches and the crossing shall be to grade 1 in 2
Cable tiles shall be provided in unpaved areas and at trench crossing (By others)
Electric Trench Layout at Pumps (Ref Drg Detail 13)
The pump base shall be constructed to the details
The trench walls shall be continued to the shape as shown
Option
If so required and felt convenient for certain uniform section reaches, precast concrete units
100 mm thick may be utilised to substitute 150 mm thick walls directly resting on the prepared
formation
Equipment
Excavator
Dumper truck
Compactor
Attachment
None
#88
Pull pits
Top
Index
Scope

students knowledge
244 of
Reference documents
Definitions
Responsibilities
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
construction of the Pull Pits
References
Specifications
Definitions
SE Site Engineer
FM Foreman
QC Quality Control
Responsibilities
Safety
Any process involving a particular safety risk shall be assessed and addressed as required to
raise to a minimum standard / an acceptable mark.
All the safety precautions required to be adhered to while working on the excavations, mass
concrete, forms, rebars, concrete pouring etc all according to the acceptable standards, shall
be adopted on the operations concerned
Adequate safety shall be observed during lifting and offloading the precast concrete covers to
the relevant locations to avoid any mishap BY OBSERVING THE REGULATORY CRANE
The crane and the trailer operators shall adhere to all the traffic rules while carrying out the

students knowledge
245 of
Safety Supervision
Materials
Mass Concrete of specified grade, Structural concrete of specified grade, Blocks, 16 mm dia
GI Lifting Lugs, Rebars all according to requirement
Method
The following operations are involved (Brief description) ( Details on the following page)
Operations in prcasting Yard
Form work to the details shown for Pit type 1 and 2 i.e. P1 and P2
Rebars placement to the details shown for Pit type 1 and 2 i.e. P1 and P2
Lifting lugs fixing to the details on the sketches attached
Pouring concrete & finishing by a steel float
Curing according to specified procedures
Lifting & loading by a crane to a trailer for transportation
On site operations- post laying of Cable ducts
Setting out
Excavation of the pit manually in case of the ducts are not encased in concrete
Mass concrete base on formation according to the details
Concrete protection according to specifications
Block work in walls according to specifications
Uncompacted sand fill only for pit Type 1
Compacted backfill only for pit Type 1
Placing the precast covers
300 mm deep sand backfill over the laid ducts not encased in concrete
As dug compacted backfill above to the specifications
Pre casting Area-The existing yard being used for the pre casting of manholes, catch basins
and lighting poles foundations etc. shall be employed for this purpose also
Details about operations in the pre-casting yard
The typical size of the Pit type 1 cover is 1990x500mm in plan and 200mm deep
According to the schedule 71 #s for type 1 and 81#s for type 2 are specified to be constructed
On an average 5 units shall be produced by pre casting every day
The forms to the exact size with the pre -formed chamfers shall be prepared and erected
The steel rebars shall be cut, bent to the required shape, placed with 75mm concrete spacers
and positioned into the forms.
The Lifting lugs as shown on the sketch shall be fixed in to the correct locations
All the supports and the dimensions shall be checked and corrected if required
Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted from time to time throughout the operations
The concrete shall be poured to all the prepared units in 1 layers

students knowledge
246 of
Immediately after the concrete starts setting, saturated hessian shall be spread over the
finished surface covered with polythene sheet according to the specifications
The side forms shall be removed after the specified period
striking the forms and covered with the polythene sheet according to specifications
excavation, mass concrete, the horizontal concrete protection, block walls, backfill and forming
the correct alignment
location for offloading on to the prepared ‘location to receive’ the unit
Details about operations on site
The area around the excavation coverage shall be barricaded to the site requirement based on
the direction of the safety incharge
The setting out shall be carried out by the surveyor to the required coordinates
Excavation shall be carried out (manually if the ducts are not encased in concrete) to the
specified formation levels i.e. 1300 mm from the finished grade monitored by surveyor
Compaction and the tests if so required, shall be carried out accordingly
The form work for the mass concrete 500mm wide and 150mm thick shall be prepared and
erected to the settings
Concrete shall be poured to the exact levels, finished properly and cured to the specified
procedures
Concrete protection shall be applied to the mass concrete top to the details & specifications
Block work shall be carried out in 200 mm width as shown on the drawings to the required
levels so that the cover placing level is 1050mm from the top of mass concrete including the
thickness of the levelling mortar. In case of the ducts are not laid in, opening shall be left in the
wall
Uncompacted sand shall be filled as shown on the drawing in case of pit type 1
The remaining portion shall be backfilled and compacted to the specification requirement in
case of pit type 1
The top surface shall be well prepared, compacted and levelled to receive the precast covers
in case of pit type 1
The top of the block walls shall be given a cement mortar bearing in the form of a levelling
course about 20mm thick allowed to be fully set in prior to the precast cover is placed on

students knowledge
247 of
The covers shall be offloaded by a crane from a trailer as transported from the precasting yard
to the relevant locations. The covers shall be properly spaced and levelled to the details
shown on the drawing
#89
Pull pits
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Definitions
Responsibilities
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
References
Specifications
Definitions
SE Site Engineer
FM Foreman
QC Quality Control
Responsibilities
FM shall execute the operations deploying the work force & Instruct, through the medium of
language they understand, all safety precautions to be strictly adhered to as STARRT Card /
ToolBox talks every day and ascertain that these are followed up regularly
Safety

students knowledge
248 of
Any process involving a particular safety risk shall be assessed and addressed to raise the
measures to a minimum standard / an acceptable mark.
The safety precautions required while working on the excavations, mass concrete, forms,
rebars, concrete pouring etc all according to the acceptable standards, shall be strictly adhered
to on the operations concerned
The crane and the trailer operators shall abide by all traffic rules while carrying out the
Safety Supervision
snag observed during the inspection shall be notified to the supervisor present who must
Materials
Mass Concrete of specified grade, Structural concrete of specified grade, Blocks,
16 mm dia GI Lifting Lugs, Rebars all according to requirement
Method
The following operations are involved
Operations in Precasting Yard
Pre casting Area
The existing yard being used for the pre casting of manholes, catch basins and lighting poles
foundations etc. shall be employed for this purpose also
Form work
According to the schedule 71x 6 #s each=426 #s Type 1 and 81x 6 #s each=486 #s
Type 2 covers are quantified to be constructed
On an average, 20 units shall be produced by pre casting every day
The wooden forms to the exact dimensions with pre -formed chamfers shall be prepared and
erected
Rebars placement
and positioned into the forms according to the details shown for type P1 & P2
Lifting lugs fixing
The Lifting lugs as shown on the attached sketch shall be fixed in to the correct locations
All supports and dimensions shall be checked and corrected if required
Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted before pouring concrete and signatures
appended to ITPs
Pouring concrete & finishing
The concrete shall be poured into all the approved preparatory works in 1 layer by directly
delivering from the concrete truck / transit mixer through the chute

students knowledge
249 of
1 # ¾” needle vibrator shall be used to compact the concrete and 1 #
reserved standby
Curing
water ) hessian and recovered with polythene sheet to prevent evaporation from the hessian.
Throughout the curing period the hessian shall be maintained in a permanent wet condition
The curing shall be continued for the specified period of 14 days
Lifting, loading & transportation
The covers shall be lifted by a mobile crane, loaded gently onto a trailer and transported to the
area concerned to offload on to the prepared ‘location to receive’
the direction of the Construction Superintendent
Setting out
The setting out shall be carried out by the surveyor to the required co-ordinates
Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted throughout the operation and ITP for the
survey check signed off
Excavation
specified formation levels i.e. 1300 mm (varying from area to area) from the finished grade
monitored by surveyor
Mass concrete base
The form work for the mass concrete 500mm wide and 150mm deep shall be prepared and
and concrete pour ITPs signed off
procedures
Concrete protection
Concrete protection shall be applied to the mass concrete to the details & specifications
Block work in walls

students knowledge
250 of
200mm Block work shall be carried out as shown on the drawings to the required levels so that
the cover top level is 100mm from the finished grade / ground level.
In case the ducts are not laid in, opening shall be provided in the wall
Uncompacted sand fill
Uncompacted sand shall be filled as shown on the drawing & in accordance with the
specifications
Compacted backfill
The remaining portion shall be backfilled and compacted to the specification requirement
The top surface shall be well prepared, compacted and levelled to receive precast covers
to the relevant locations. The covers shall be properly spaced and levelled to the details
shown on the drawing
Sand fill
300mm deep sand backfill shall be carried out over the laid ducts not encased in concrete
Backfill
As dug compacted backfill shall be carried out above the sandfill to the specifications
with the relevant ITPs signed off
Lugs Fill
The sand shall be filled in the lifting lugs recess
Concrete Protection
The exposed concrete surface is a part of pavement and therefore no protection shall be
applied
Equipment
Transit mixer, Trailor, Vibrator, Crane,
Attachment
3 # Sketch -showing the lifting lugs arrangement
#89
Pull pits
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Safety
Method
Equipment

students knowledge
251 of
Attachment
Scope
References
Specifications
Safety
Any process involving a particular safety risk shall be assessed and addressed to raise the
measures to a minimum standard / an acceptable mark.
The safety precautions required while working on the excavations, mass concrete, forms,
rebars, concrete pouring etc all according to the acceptable standards, shall be strictly adhered
to on the operations concerned
The crane and the trailer operators shall abide by all traffic rules while carrying out the
Safety Supervision
snag observed during the inspection shall be notified to the supervisor present who must
Materials
Mass Concrete of specified grade, Structural concrete of specified grade, Blocks,
16 mm dia GI Lifting Lugs (Exposed portion only), Rebars all according to requirement
Method
Operations in Precasting Yard
Pre casting Area
The existing yard being used for the pre casting of manholes, catch basins and lighting poles
foundations etc. shall be employed for this purpose also
Form work
According to the schedule 71x 6 #s each=426 #s Type 1 and 81x 6 #s each=486 #s
Type 2 covers are quantified to be constructed
On an average, 20 units shall be produced by pre casting every day
The wooden forms to the exact dimensions with pre -formed chamfers shall be prepared and
erected
Rebars placement

students knowledge
252 of
and positioned into the forms according to the details shown for type P1 & P2
Lifting lugs fixing
The Lifting lugs as shown on the attached sketch shall be fixed in to the correct locations
All supports and dimensions shall be checked and corrected if required
Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted before pouring concrete and signatures
appended to ITPs
Pouring concrete & finishing
The concrete shall be poured into all the approved preparatory works in 1 layer by directly
delivering from the concrete truck / transit mixer through the chute
1 # ¾” needle vibrator shall be used to compact the concrete and 1 #
reserved standby
Curing
water ) hessian and recovered with polythene sheet to prevent evaporation from the hessian.
Throughout the curing period the hessian shall be maintained in a permanent wet condition
The curing shall be continued for the specified period of 14 days
Lifting, loading & transportation
The covers shall be lifted by a mobile crane, loaded gently onto a trailer and transported to the
area concerned to offload on to the prepared ‘location to receive’
the direction of the Construction Superintendent
Setting out
The setting out shall be carried out by the surveyor to the required co-ordinates
Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted throughout the operation and ITP for the
survey check signed off
Excavation
specified formation levels i.e. 1300 mm (varying from area to area) from the finished grade
monitored by surveyor

students knowledge
253 of
Mass concrete base
The form work for the mass concrete 500mm wide and 150mm deep shall be prepared and
and concrete pour ITPs signed off
procedures
Concrete protection
Concrete protection shall be applied to the mass concrete to the details & specifications
Block work in walls
200mm Block work shall be carried out as shown on the drawings to the required levels so that
the cover top level is 100mm from the finished grade / ground level.
In case the ducts are not laid in, opening shall be provided in the wall
Uncompacted sand fill
Uncompacted sand shall be filled as shown on the drawing & in accordance with the
specifications
Compacted backfill
The remaining portion shall be backfilled and compacted to the specification requirement
The top surface shall be well prepared, compacted and levelled to receive precast covers
to the relevant locations ready with one layer 0.25mm thick polythene sheet with laps 300mm,
spread over.
The covers shall be properly spaced and levelled to the details shown on the drawing
Sand fill
300mm deep sand backfill shall be carried out over the laid ducts not encased in concrete
Backfill
As dug compacted backfill shall be carried out above the sandfill to the specifications
with the relevant ITPs signed off
Lugs Fill
Concrete Protection
applied
Equipment
Attachment
#90

students knowledge
254 of
Road crossing to make good
Wearing course over completed
1# for 14” desalinated water
&
1# for 8”potable water
Avenue ‘c’
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Definitions
Responsibilities
Safety
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out to make good
the wearing course over the completed road crossing to facilitate the smooth traffic plying.The
pipe lines 1 # each 14” Desalinated water and 8” Potable water at locations identified on
attached drawing for this X-ing were completed to the following references
Reference documents
Drawing No. -Easement Systems Avenue “C”
Piping Interconnection Drawings, Avenue ‘C’
Definitions
SE Site Engineer
FM Foreman
QC Quality Control
Responsibilities

students knowledge
255 of
Safety
involving a particular safety risk shall be assessed and addressed as required to raise to a
minimum standard / an acceptable mark.
In the present case the minor debris removal / excavation has to be carried out on the
Operating Authority area, therefore all the regulated precautions shall be resorted to effect a
full safety standard.
ToolBox Talks-
While conducting ToolBox Talks, every precautionary measure to be adopted shall be
explained expressely to all the personnel and translated to the language understood by them
Only English literate Foreman shall be employed to work on the critical execution.
Traffic Management-Sign boards keep up- All the personnel shall be briefed about the safe
The barriers shall be placed to indicate the excavation work in progress
Jack Hammer- The workers if engaged on operating this equipment shall use protective glass
barricade limits
Machine Excavation
Safety Supervision

students knowledge
256 of
Method
barriers, night lighting and road cleaning activities.
This completed crossing is located on the Road Avenue ‘C’ between the following
This is a 2-way road with a central verge and carrying 2 lanes on either way
The proposed crossing is located about 60 m from 1st
One serving electric pole is located away from the x-ing to North
The minor irrigation / hoses are lying disconnected
Some minor trees and plants are arboricultured on the central verge.
of the carriageway.
For the traffic North to South the first reduce speed for traffic diversion informatory board
depicting shall be located at 300 m from the point of the proposed crossing, the second
depicting diversion signs be located at 200 m and the third depicting men at work sign be
For the traffic South to North past crossing, one sign shall be placed to direct for the diversion,
to slow down and the men at work ahead
The following activities are involved. Reference to the marked note ‘B’ on the Easement
Systems Drawing
To produce the Traffic Diversion Management Scheme
To excavate mechaniclly the loose wearing portion to a depth so that a total concrete thickness
of 70 mm is poured
To pour the concrete

students knowledge
257 of
Details
the surveyor on the actual location. The debris / asphalt shall be cut using jackhammers or
grader to the require levels so that a final concrete thickness 70mm be poured
Major Equipment
Grader,Excavator,Dump trucks.Compactors.
Attachment
#91
Road crossing to make good
132 kv electric cable
Avenue ‘c’
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Definitions
Responsibilities
Safety
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out to make good
the wearing course over the completed road crossing to facilitate smooth traffic plying. Laying
of 132 KV electric cable at location identified on the reference drawing for this X-ing has been
completed
Reference documents
Specification. Excavation

students knowledge
258 of
Drawing No. -Easement Systems Avenue “C”
Definitions
SE Site Engineer
FM Foreman
QC Quality Control
Responsibilities
Any mishap on the crossing operation shall immediately be notified to the CS and the CM for
the immediate action if so required, for any possible remedy or record or the relevant authority
review whatsoever the case may be
FM shall execute the operations deploying the work force .and instruct in full in the medium of
language the work persons understand about all the required measures
and the STARRT / ToolBox talks every day and check that the same are followed up
regularly
QC shall inspect all the operations according to the specifications & ITP requirement
Safety
Prior to the commencement of any activity the labour force shall receive a
STARRT Card / Toolbox talk relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety
requirements. Any process involving a particular safety risk shall be assessed and addressed
as required to raise to a minimum standard / an acceptable mark.
In this case the minor debris removal / excavation has to be carried out on the Operating
Authority area, therefore all the regulated precautionary measures shall be strictly adhered to
ToolBox Talks
While conducting ToolBox Talks, every precautionary measure to be adopted shall be explicitly
instructed to all personnel to abide by through the medium of language they understand
A Foreman who also understands English shall be employed to work on the critical execution.
Excavation Work Permit
A copy of the work permit shall be posted on a mini board installed on site to be noticeable to
all the relevant persons involved on the crossing
Barricades, cones, markers and the night-lights, flood lights etc. shall be arranged as required
for a complete safety.
engaged full time to direct the traffic about the excavation work in progress by means of flag
signal to all vehicles passing by

students knowledge
259 of
barricade limits
Machine Excavation
The operators shall be explicitly instructed about the requirement of the reverse signal and
sound when operating reverse. The truck driver shall also be instructed similarly. Banksman
shall be engaged while the equipment operate.
No oil spillage shall be allowed
Safety Supervision
A competent inspector shall inspect the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted.
Method
temporary diverted roads sign, men at work sign, warning signs, safety barriers, night lighting
and road cleaning activities.
This completed crossing is located on the Road Avenue ‘C’ between the following
This is a 2-lane dual carriageway road with a central verge
This crossing is located about 60 m from 1st
One serving electric pole is located away from the crossing to North
The minor irrigation / hoses are lying disconnected
Some minor trees and plants are growing on the central verge.
of the carriageway.
portion on the completed portion on the part L1 as shown on the sketch.
For the traffic North to South, the first informatory board for traffic depicting ‘reduce speed’
shall be located at 300 m from the point of the proposed crossing, the second depicting
‘diversion’ signs be located at 200 m and the third depicting ‘men at work ‘sign be located at
100 m on either way in the opposite directions.
For the traffic South to North past crossing, one signboard shall be located to depict
‘diversion’, ‘slow down’ and ‘the men at work ahead’

students knowledge
260 of
The following activities are involved.
The Traffic Diversion Management Scheme shall be executed as explained in the foregoing
and to the traffic manual requirement reflected on the attached sketch
The first section of the crossing shall be marked by the surveyor on the actual location.
The debris / asphalt shall be cut using jackhammers or grader to the required level so that a
final concrete thickness 70mm can be poured
Concrete wearing slab 70mm thick shall be cast up to the finished asphalt level
These activities shall be repeated for the second section after the first is completed
The traffic management system shall be removed after the road crossing has been cleared of
all debris or obstructions.
Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted to the ITP requirement
In future, after the completion of the proposed pipe laying operations
(For which the methodology is included separately, ref. method statement # 86),
an approved asphalt wearing course shall be laid to the requirement to replace 70mm concrete
paving
Major Equipment
Attachment
applied
Equipment
Attachment
#92
Road crossing
To make good (temporarily)

students knowledge
261 of
132 kv electric cable
Avenue ‘c’
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Safety
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out to make good
the wearing course over the completed road crossing to facilitate smooth traffic plying. Laying
of 132 KV electric cable at location identified on the reference drawing for this X-ing has been
completed
Reference documents
Specification. Excavation
Drawing No.
Safety
Prior to the commencement of any activity the labour force shall receive a
STARRT Card / Toolbox talk relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety
requirements. Any process involving a particular safety risk shall be assessed and addressed
as required to raise to a minimum standard / an acceptable mark.
In this case the minor debris removal / excavation has to be carried out on the Operating
Authority area, therefore all the regulated precautionary measures shall be strictly adhered to
ToolBox Talks
While conducting ToolBox Talks, every precautionary measure to be adopted shall be explicitly
instructed to all personnel to abide by through the medium of language they understand
A Foreman who also understands English shall be employed to work on the critical execution.
Excavation Work Permit
A copy of the work permit shall be posted on a mini board installed on site to be noticeable to
all the relevant persons involved on the crossing
Barricades, cones, markers and the night-lights, flood lights etc. shall be arranged as required
for a complete safety.
engaged full time to direct the traffic about the excavation work in progress by means of flag
signal to all vehicles passing by
barricade limits

students knowledge
262 of
Machine Excavation
The operators shall be explicitly instructed about the requirement of the reverse signal and
sound when operating reverse. The truck driver shall also be instructed similarly. Banksman
shall be engaged while the equipment operate.
No oil spillage shall be allowed
Safety Supervision
A competent inspector shall inspect the area daily to assess the safety measures adopted.
Method
temporary diverted roads sign, men at work sign, warning signs, safety barriers, night lighting
and road cleaning activities.
commencing the work and agreed with Plant Refinery Division.
TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT SCHEME ROAD CROSSING – First Street / Avenue C’
This crossing is located about 83 m from center line of 1st
of the carriageway.
portion on the completed portion on the part L1 as shown on the sketch.
Signboards shall be positioned as shown on the sketch
The temporary stone surface on lane L1 shall be excavated to a depth of 70mm and replaced
by mass concrete to level with the adjacent asphalt.
Traffic shall be allowed on to the concrete after 2 days and the operation shall be repeated for
lanes L2
All excavated material shall be removed to an approved tipping area.
The concrete surface shall be replaced by asphalt to the same specification as the existing
construction at the earliest opportunity
Major Equipment
Attachment
#93

students knowledge
263 of
Drinking water connection
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Definitions
Responsibilities
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
connection and laying of the pipeline, from the Operating Authority supply pit No 21, to the Civil
Contractor camp.
Reference documents
Excavation permit.
Definitions
Operating Authority Abu Dhabi National Oil Company.
EPC Contractor
Civil Contractor .
Responsibilities
The Civil Contractor PSM shall ensure this method statement is implementation for the
connection and laying of the drinking water pipeline.
Safety
procedures.
Method
The proposed drinking water connection location and route of the pipeline, shall be defined
upon a drawing, which shall be reviewed and approved by Operating Authority.
The approved pipeline route drawing shall define the materials and fitting locations.
All trenching activities shall be excavated by hand. The excavated material shall be stockpiled
for re-use as fill material. The pipe trench shall be excavated to a depth of 500mm.
All stones and hard materials from the bottom of the trench shall be removed. The pipe shall
be located within the trench. Selected backfill shall be placed around the pipe.
The trench shall be backfilled with the excavated material. Any surplus material shall be
removed from site.
The laying and connection of the pipes shall be conducted by experienced people.
Where the pipeline passes beneath a roadway, a sleeve pipe shall be incorporated to protect
the water pipe from damage.
Testing of the pipes shall be conducted to ensure that leakage does not occur.

students knowledge
264 of
Marker posts to indicate a buried service shall be installed upon completion of backfilling and
clearing of the site.
Equipment
Hand tools.
Pipe jointing and cutting tools.
Attachment
Work permit.
Drawing Site Sketch
#94
Protection to transformer foundation sides in
sub stations
with aluminium bead termination for below ground and
masterseal 300h for above ground in gravel fill area
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Definitions
Responsibilities
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to protect the vertical
surfaces of the transformer bases concrete using Aluminium Beads to clampin the
waterproofing membrane termination around the foundation sides and apply concrete
protection coating on the surfaces above ground
References
Main Substation Drawing Transformer Foundations Sec A & D and the relevant drawings for
all other sub stations
Specifications-
Definitions
SE Site Engineer
FM Foreman
QC Quality Control

students knowledge
265 of
Responsibilities
Safety
Prior to the commencement of work, the labour force shall receive a toolbox talk on the Project
Site Safety requirements relevant to the application of below ground and above ground
concrete surface protection operations
Any process which may involve a particular Safety risk shall be assessed to the requirement
for Site conditions and be taken care of.
foodstuffs.
To avoid skin contact, use of barrier cream to protect from the adverse effect of sealant and
other chemicals application shall also be made.
Material safety data shall also be referred to for disposal and any further information.
Materials
Bitustick XL Polybit MAR 003
Fixing screws 3 mm dia
Joint filler Alpex Joint Fill BCR MAR 008
(Manufacturer BCR) (Emirates Specialities) or equivalent MAR
Masterseal 300H MBT MAR 059
Masterseal 181S Primer system
Masterseal 300H filler
Storage
The manufacturer’s instructions shall be followed for this purpose.

students knowledge
266 of
extremes.
Method
Waterproofing membrane shall be applied according to the specifications to the defined levels
keeping the top 50 mm above the gravel fill
Marking shall be made to the exact line and level as per drawing
Required lengths to the exact site dimensions shall be cut to suit a close fit between the bead
ends
Every bead shall be fixed with screws @ 400mm centres drilled and tightened to the concrete
penetrating the membrane
The screws shall be drilled and fixed using an electrical operated equipment
After the screws are drilled in with the beads in proper alignment / location, compressed fibre
shall be installed as protection over the Bitustick XL membrane as specified
The vertical surface above the bead as well as a 50mm wide strip around the top periphery of
the foundation shall be prepared for the above ground concrete protection and Master seal 300
H be applied to the manufacturer’s instructions
Priming the surface
Coating the surface
Preparation
smooth.
mixed with Masterseal 300 H filler applied as a scrape coat over blow holes and depressions.
Application
The areas to be coated shall be protected from direct sunlight by shading in the hot weather
conditions.
At the time of coating application the ambient temperature shall be more than 5 degree
Celsius with humidity less than 90 % and no dusty weather
The continuous coating shall be achieved in 1 or 2 coats of application
The coating shall be protected from the humidity for 24 hours / or until it dries out using
polythene sheets keeping off the area.

students knowledge
267 of
Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted followed by EPC
Contractor approval
Application of sealant after 24 hours
the width
The sealant shall be gunned into the junction using an even trigger pressure,
The nozzle shall be cleaned occasionally to avoid contamination.
A smaller timber spatula soaked in soapy water shall be used to compact the sealant into the
joint for a smooth polish finish formation.
The mixing and application equipment shall be cleaned immediately after use
Equipment
Brush and roller
Attachment
None
#95
Timber doors fixing
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Definitions
Responsibilities
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
fixing of the workshop / factory builtin wooden doors to the exact locations on the prepared
openings left in the walls

students knowledge
268 of
References
Specifications
MAR
Teak Wood
Definitions
SE Site Engineer
FM Foreman
QC Quality Control
Responsibilities
Safety
dusty winds) etc
Materials
Material from Aldiar UAE
1 hour fire rated, ½ hour fire rated
Method
Equipment
Attachment
None
#96

students knowledge
269 of
Grouting to steel tanks bearings on
ring beams
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Definitions
Responsibilities
Safety
Method
Equipment
Scope
The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to grout the space between
the top of the ring beams and the steel tank base plate(acting as bearing) according to the
following drawings and the specifications.
Reference Documents.
Drgs Demineralised Water Tank
Drgs Spent Caustic Storage Tank
Drgs Fire Water Storage Tank
Drgs Caustic Storage Tank
Drgs Neutralisation Tank Water Tank
Specification
Definitions
SE Site Engineer
FM Foreman
QC Quality Control
Responsibilities

students knowledge
270 of
Safety
talk on the Project Site Safety requirements relevant to the application of Masterflow 928T
MBT grouthing material according to the manufacturer’ s instruction and the filling the sand into
minutely narrow spaces
foodstuffs.
To avoid skin contact, use of barrier cream to protect from the adverse effect of grouting
material shall also be made.
Method
Refer to the sketch attached
The space to be grouted shall be cleaned to remove all dirt and loose particles using
compressed air
The surrounding area shall be shaded to avoid the effects of temperature extremes
The grouting operation shall be carried out in pieces on the tank circumference
The surface shall be soaked in water for 24 hours prior to conmmence the operations
Sandfilling shall be carried out into the spaces leaving a clear portion 200 mm wide for the
grouting purpose. A backing rod 25 mm dia shall be provided as shown on the sketch
The space to be filled in various locations shall be prepared by form strips of the size equal to
the thickness of the grout circumferentially and radially. The pouring end shall be kept open
and after the pouring is completed in the prepared area, shall be closed
An electric drill fitted with a paddle mixer shall be used for the grout mixing purpose. The mixer
shall be cleaned with no standing water.
Using water @ 3.5 to 4.5 litres per 25 kg bag of Master flow 928T according to the
requirement, the mixing shall be carried out as follows
90 % of the measured quantity of water required to achieve the desired consistency according
to the batch volume shall be added to the mixer followed by the grout material Masterflow
928 T added gradually.The remaining 10 % water quantity shall be poued during mixing, which
has to be kept continued for at least 3 to 5 minutes until a uniform lump free consistency is
achieved.
Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted according to the ITP requirement
The grout shall be poured continuously using the pour cone with a constant hydrostatic head
of at least 15 cm

students knowledge
271 of
After pouring the grout Masterflow 928 in place, all the exposed surfaces shall be covered
with clean and damp Hessian to keep the applied material moist until it is firm enough to
accept a curing membrane
The specified temperature range(4 to 32 degree C) shall be maintained for the 3 post pour
continuous days
Major Equipment
Peddle Mixer
Grout Flow Cone
Attachment
Sketch
#97
Grouting to steel tanks bearings on
ring beams
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Safety
Method
Equipment
Scope
The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to grout the space between
the top of the ring beams and the steel tank base plate(acting as bearing) according to the
following drawings and the specifications.
Drgs Demineralised Water Tank
Drgs Spent Caustic Storage Tank
Drgs E Fire Water Storage Tank
Drgs Caustic Storage Tank
Drgs Neutralisation Tank Water Tank
Specification
Safety
talk on the Project Site Safety requirements relevant to the application of Masterflow 928T
MBT grouting material according to the manufacturer’ s instruction and the filling the sand into
minutely narrow spaces

students knowledge
272 of
The personnel shall use the PPE, gloves, masks, eyeprotection etc.
foodstuffs.
To avoid skin contact, use of barrier cream to protect from the adverse effect of grouting
material shall also be made.
Industrial cleaner shall be used followed by washing with soap and water where grout comes
in contact with skin.
Method
The space to be grouted shall be cleaned to remove all dirt and loose particles using
compressed air
The surrounding area shall be shaded to avoid the effects of temperature extremes
The grouting operation shall be carried out in pieces on the tank circumference
The surface shall be soaked in water for 24 hours prior to conmmence the operations
Sandfilling shall be carried out into the spaces leaving a clear portion 200 mm wide for the
grouting purpose. A backing rod 25 mm dia shall be provided as shown on the sketch
The space to be filled in various locations shall be prepared by form strips of the size equal to
the thickness of the grout circumferentially and radially. The pouring end shall be kept open
and after the pouring is completed in the prepared area, shall be closed
An electric drill fitted with a paddle mixer shall be used for the grout mixing purpose. The mixer
shall be clean with no standing water.
Using water @ 3.5 to 4.5 litres per 25 kg bag of Master flow 928T according to the
requirement, the mixing shall be carried out as follows
to the batch volume shall be added to the mixer followed by the grout material Masterflow
928 T added gradually.The remaining 10 % water quantity shall be poued during mixing, which
has to be kept continued for at least 3 to 5 minutes until a uniform lump free consistency is
achieved.
The grout shall be poured continuously using the pour cone with a constant hydrostatic head
of at least 15 cm
After pouring the grout Masterflow 928 in place, all the exposed surfaces shall be covered
with clean and damp Hessian to keep the applied material moist until it is firm enough to
accept a curing membrane
Major Equipment
Paddle Mixer

students knowledge
273 of
Grout Flow Cone
Attachment
Sketch
#98
Excavation for ccb underground
water tank
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Definitions
Responsibilities
Safety
Method
Equipment
Scope
The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to excavate the area for the
underground water tank foundation where one cable trench is passing 1400 mm apart from
one of the longitudnal (East) walls
Drgs Underground WaterTank Structural Details
Specification
Definitions
SE Site Engineer
FM Foreman
QC Quality Control
Responsibilities

students knowledge
274 of
Safety
Prior to the commencement of work, the labour force shall receive a STARRT Card /
Toolbox talk on the Project Site Safety requirements relevant to the deep excavation.
Required safety arrangements shall be made by installing barricades and night lights
observed, who immediately implement the instructions accordingly to get the measures to an
acceptable standard
Method
The setting out of the tank area shall be carried out to the relevant co-ordinates
Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted to the ITP requirement
Safety barricades shall be provided according to the requirment
Since the work is also in progress on the chiller area, the access to the formation shall be
provided from the two shorter sides by benching
The location of the longitudnal walls shall be marked adding 50 mm margin for the
backblinding
Longitudnally the excavation line shall be kept to vertical profile that is feasible for the soil is
sufficiently stiff
Necessary forms shall be erected in stages for the vertical / back blinding and the concrete
poured to form a soil protective surface
After the blinding is over, further activities of the tank construction shall be followed according
to the relevant drawings and the specifications
Major Equipment
Excavator
Truck
Attachment
Sketch
#99
Excavation for ccb underground
water tank
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Safety
Method
Equipment

students knowledge
275 of
Scope
The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to excavate the area for the
underground water tank foundation where one cable trench is passing 1400 mm apart from
one of the longitudnal (East) walls
Drgs Underground WaterTank Structural Details
Specification
Safety
talk on the Project Site Safety requirements relevant to the deep excavation.
Required safety arrangements shall be made by installing barricades and night lights
observed, who immediately implement the instructions accordingly to get the measures to an
acceptable standard
Method
The setting out of the tank area shall be carried out to the relevant co-ordinates
Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted to check the coordinates
Safety barricades shall be provided according to the requirment
The location of the longitudnal walls shall be marked & the excavation lines demarcated
according to the sketch attached
Excavation shall commence from the free side and continued to the cable trench line following
the section shown on the sketch
The existing soil is stiff enough to be excavated to a vertical profile but tempararily,on the cable
trench side pre cast concrete cubes 1mx1mx1m shall be used to retain the earth pressure as
shown on the sketch
After the cubes are placed in, further construction operations shall be carried out to the
drawings and specifications
Cubes shall be used to act as a support to the forms
After the cubes placement, further activities of the tank construction shall be followed
according to the relevant drawings and the specifications
Major Equipment
Excavator
Truck
Attachment
Sketch
#99
Soakaway chambers

students knowledge
276 of
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the construction
of soakaway chambers
Reference documents
Drawing No
Specification
Safety
Toolbox talk relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements.
All safety precautions necessary during working on excavations, mass concrete, forms, rebars,
concrete pouring, etc. shall be applied to acceptable standards
Adequate safety measures shall be adhered to during lifting and offloading precast perforated
concrete manhole rings & covers to relevant locations avoiding any mishap BY OBSERVING
THE REGULATORY CRANE FITNESS REQUIREMENT AND VALIDITY OF PERMIT. Only
competent personnel shall be engaged to carry out the operation
Crane and trailer operators shall abide by all traffic rules while carrying out operations and if so
required, a banksman shall be engaged to direct the movement
Safety Supervision
Material
Concrete, Rebars / Lifting Lugs, Steps, Manhole covers
Method
Pre casting Area- the existing yard being used to pre cast manholes, catch basins, lighting
poles etc. shall be employed for this purpose also
The following operations are involved to carry out the production of the soakaway chambers

students knowledge
277 of
The typical size of the precast rings are dia 1800mm and 1200 mm & other details as shown
on the sketch
The internal forms shall be erected to the exact internal dia and the specified height
Drain holes blockout forms dia 75 mm shall be fixed to the internal shutter to suit circular
profile at ends 8 #s in each row for 1200 mm dia and 12 #s in each row in 1400 mm dia
staggered as shown on the sketch
The 8T(not specified) steel rebars shall be cut, bent to the circular shape, placed and the cage
prepared holding concrete spacers, and positioned into the forms.
The blockout form for the inlet pipe shall be prepared and fixed to the circular form wherever
required
Polystyrene sleeves shall be inserted for the steps to be grouted after the forms are struck
After all the blackouts are fixed in, the dimensions and the plumb shall be checked
An Civil Contractor preliminary inspection shall be conducted
External forms shall be erected to specified dia and height & correctly supported.
All the supports and dimensions shall be checked, corrected if required and the plumb
monitored
An Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted & ITP for concrete pour signed off
Concrete grade 30 shall be poured to the prepared units in 3 layers in vertical sequence
The needle vibrator shall be used for the compaction of the concrete
wooden float
Top circular strip shall be finished with a wooden float and covered with polythene sheet
An Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted at regular intervals throughout the
operations
removed followed by immediate covering the surface with saturated (soaked with mix quality
water) hessian and recovered with polythene sheet to prevent evaporation from the hessian.
Throughout the curing period, the hessian shall be maintained in a permanent wet condition
The external and the internal forms shall be removed after a specified period of 24 to 36 hours
as agreed
kept continuously wet for the duration of curing
An Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted from time to time throughout the
operations
Similarly RCC covers 250mm thick with circumferential web section 150x450mm shall be
precast to specified dia
The relevant locations shall be made ready to receive the precast rings by completing the
excavation, mass concrete ring footing, and forming the correct alignment

students knowledge
278 of
AN Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted for the'location to receive' & ITP signed
off
The rings shall be lifted by a mobile crane, loaded gently onto a trailer and transported to the
relevant area to offload on to the prepared ‘location to receive’
The rings shall be installed on the marked location according to the correct orientation to the
relevant layout drawing keeping one ring above the other in such a way that the steps are
formed in vertical alignment and the perforations are staggered but centred vertically
Space surrounded by the mass concrete ring footing shall be backfilled with 40mm nominal
single size stones
Another ring shall be placed over the previous and jointed with cement mortar
The excavation and laying of inlet pipe shall be carried out to the details and the block out filled
with concrete. The surrounding pipe and the rings shall be backfilled with 40 mm nominal
single size stones
Precast covers shall be transported from the precasting yard, offloaded and properly located
over the approved rings to the correct alignment
Manhole cover bedding / bearing shall be made of concrete by forming to the given profile to
suit the cover placing level
After the bearing concrete stiffens, the cover frame shall be fixed and levelled using cement
mortar 1 : 3
Forms shall be erected for the mass concrete surround with preformed chamfers and concrete
poured to a level 50 mm above the grade level
EPC Contractor surveillance / inspection / approval shall be according to the
approved ITPs
Major Equipment
Transit mixer
Attachment
Drain Holes locations indicative only
#100
Epoxy flooring Buildings
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment

students knowledge
279 of
Scope
of Epoxy Flooring 3 and 5mm thick in buildings
Reference documents
Drawing No.
Specification
Safety
Safety Supervision
Material
Mastertop 1230i, MBT MAR #
Mastertop 1200i Resin
Method
Surface Preparation
The floor base concrete shall be lightly scabbled to remove the laitance
Surface shall be cleaned of all dust and dirt by compressed air
An Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted
Prior to the application of Mastertop1230i the concrete scabbled & cleaned surface shall be
sealed by applying Mastertop1200i resin diluted with 5% solvent #2 as follows.
Sealer Mixing
Base and reactor components shall be poured into a mixing vessel and half a litre of Solvent #
2 added.
All these components shall be mixed using a slow speed drill with a paddle attachment for 1
minute
Sealer shall be applied at a rate of 5-8 sqm per litre using a medium pile roller
Sealed surface shall be allowed to become tack free before the application of Mastertop1230i
An Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted
Mastertop1230i shall be applied as follows
Mixing
Reactor base and colour pack components of the Mastertop1230i shall be poured into a vessel
of 25 litre capacity
The components shall be mixed with a drill with paddle attachment until a uniform colour is
achieved.
1230i aggregate shall be slowly added to the mixed components keeping the mixer running
until the mixture is of smooth and lumpsfree consistency

students knowledge
280 of
Laying
Mixed material shall be poured on to the primed & sealed surface & spread to 5mm thickness
in stores & warehouses and 3 mm thickness in other areas using a pin screed, notched trowel
or steel float.
Immediately after the spread of the material to the required thickness, rolling shall be carried
out by a ‘Spiked Roller’ to release entrapped air and remove the trowel marks
Rolling shall be continued until all air is released and a uniform colour is obtained
Rolling shall again be carried out after 20 to 30 minutes
Operator shall wear the ‘spiked shoes’ when using the ‘spiked roller’ to walk on wet material.
Rolling shall cease before Mastertop 1230i begins to gel
An Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted & ITP signed off
Mastertop1230i shall be removed from the tools and equipment whilst still wet using cleaning
solvent # 2
Equipment
Slow speed drill with suitable paddle
Brushes, Short nap hair rollers
Grinder, Spiked roller, Pin screed
Attachment
MBT 1230 i Data sheet
#101
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
Reference documents
Drawing No. & like
Specification Clause 13
Safety
Prior to commence any activity, the labour force shall receive a STARRT Card / Toolbox
Talk relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements. Necessary
measures shall be applied to any process involving a safety risk

students knowledge
281 of
Safety Supervision
Material
Applicators
Skilled applicators shall carry out the work
Manufacturer’s demonstrator shall train a group of personnel on site for one room and later the
remaining work of epoxy coating shall be carried out by this group
Method
(Surface Preparation)
Equipment shall be protected by covering with polythene sheet
The floor base concrete shall either be grit blasted or acid etching applied to remove the
laitance
Surface shall be cleaned of all dust and dirt by compressed air
An Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted to accept substrate
Prior to the application of Mastertop1230I, the prepared concrete surface shall be sealed by
applying Mastertop1200i resin diluted with 5% solvent #2 as follows.
(Sealer Mixing)
2 added.
minute
An Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted to approve that the surface is properly
sealed with no imperfections.
(Mixing)
achieved.
(Laying)
or steel float.

students knowledge
282 of
solvent # 2
Equipment
Grinder, Spiked roller, Pin screed, Spiked shoes
Attachment
#102
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
Reference documents
Drawing No. & like
Specification Clause 13
Safety
Talk relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements. Necessary
measures shall be applied to any process involving a safety risk
Safety Supervision
Material

students knowledge
283 of
Applicators
Skilled applicators shall carry out the work
Manufacturer’s demonstrator shall train a group of personnel on site for one room and later the
remaining work of epoxy coating shall be carried out by this group
Method
(Surface Preparation)
Equipment shall be protected by covering with polythene sheet
The floor base concrete shall either be grit blasted or acid etching applied to remove the
laitance
Surface shall be cleaned of all dust and dirt by brush & vacuum cleaner
An Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted to accept substrate
Prior to the application of Mastertop1230I, the prepared concrete surface shall be sealed by
applying Mastertop1200i resin diluted with 5% solvent #2 as follows.
(Sealer Mixing)
2 added.
minute
An Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted to approve that the surface is properly
sealed with no imperfections.
(Mixing)
achieved.
(Laying)
or steel float.
solvent # 2

students knowledge
284 of
Equipment
Grinder, Spiked roller, Pin screed, Spiked shoes
Attachment
#103
Vinyl wall covering Buildings
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to apply Fabric Backed Vinyl
Wall Covering paper over dry walls in buildings
Reference documents
Drawing No. and like
MAR
Ref
Safety
Safety Supervision
Material
Fabric backed Vinyl wall covering Suwide Scala N 5858
Manufacturer-Swide, Supplier / Sub Contractor-Trade Line
Method
The surface shall be made dry, firm, smooth & free from grease
A vertical line shall be marked at 200 mm from the corner to apply first drop
Higher material roll # shall be used first
Plenty of adhesive shall be coated on the wall portion for the first piece of material using a
lambswool roller or a block brush

students knowledge
285 of
Pieces shall be cut & numbered using a graphite pencil
Strips shall be fixed in reverse alternate
Material piece shall be cut to a length equal to wall height plus 40mm (20mm extra at ceiling
and 20mm extra at skirting)
Edge of the first piece shall be located against the vertical line making sure that there is a
small selvedge at top and bottom for subsequent trimming
Smoothening shall be carried out using a spatula along the length of the material
Second length shall be placed against the adhesive tape and smoothened out with a spatula
and if necessary rolled over
The uppermost length shall fall off by itself while the lower length shall be removed.
A thin coat of adhesive shall be applied to the wall before the joint is closed
Rubber roller shall be moved over the material to make sure that no bubble emerges
A small vertical cut shall be made in the overlap near the ceiling using a Stanley knife
Joint shall be closed and sealed smooth with spatula
Before hanging the second piece the marker pins shall be placed at about 4 cm from the edge
of the first piece
Overlap shall be cut with a suitable cutting knife
Slevedge shall be removed from the ceiling and the plinth with Stanley knife
Knife shall be kept in cut and spatula moved
An Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted and the ITP signed off
Equipment
Rubber roller, Stanley knife, Spatula, Marker pins
Attachment
SUWIDE Instruction Sheet
ITP- Civil Contractor / ITP / Rev B
Check List- QCF Rev B
#104
Dry wall linings buildings
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to install dry wall linings in
the buildings.
Reference documents
Specs (Gypsum Wall boards Systems)

students knowledge
286 of
STQ
Safety
Safety Supervision
Material
MAR 076
Galvanised Studs, Runners & Furrings (Metal Framing System)
Gypsum wall lining & wall partitions
Framing System- TMI (Technical Material Industrial Company) UAE
External wall lining-Studs & Runners Galvanised Steel
Stud depth 63mm-Thickness 1mm, Runner depth 65mm-Thickness 0.7mm Metal
Internal wall lining, Furring channels-Galvanised Steel,
Material Width 50mm-Thickness 0.7mm, depth 22mm
Metal Framing for dry wall partitions, Studs & Runners- Galvanised Steel
Stud width 92mm-Thickness 1mm, Runner Width 94mm-Thickness 0.7mm,
MAR
Gypsum Wall Board system
Regular wall board 12.5mm thick 1.2 x 2.4 m panel, tapered edges
Moisture Resistant board 15 mm thick, tapered edges, Knauf Australia, Trade line,
MAR
Acoustical Fibreglass for demountable partitions
Accoustical glasswool insulation material 60mm thick for internal partition walls &
50 mm thick for external walls, Kimmco- Isover Fibre Glass, Kimmco
Specialist Sub Contractor- Trade Line
Method
De-mountable panels shall be fixed to flooring / top of tiles while the others to the screed
Floors & Ceilings shall be constructed as specified
For the levelling purpose, a chalk line shall be marked to be used as a datum
Floor and ceiling tracks shall be fixed by shot firing nails as per details
Vertical studs shall be placed every 600mm c / c wherever possible
Bracing shall be fixed between studs and walls & at all board joints for rigidity & strength to the
requirement
Gypsum boards shall be fixed using dry walls screws at 300 mm c / c in the middle and 200
mm c / c at the edges of the board
For the internal partitions where the insulation is to be provided, shall be installed after one
board is fixed
Civil Contractor QC inspections shall be conducted
The other board shall be fixed after the approval of the insulation

students knowledge
287 of
On the external walls where the insulation is to be provided, shall be installed prior to Gypsum
board is fixed
The tapered surface at the board joints shall be pasted from lower to higher level vertically
with fibre tape to act as a support for joint compound to be filled in.
Joint compound shall be filled in to a suitable & acceptable profile
Hole ends posed due to the fasteners shall also be filled in with the compound
All external corners shall have stainless steel corner beading fitted
Gypsum board shall be sanded to smoothen the surface to receive sequential finishing items
Civil Contractor QC inspections shall be conducted throughout the above operations and the
ITP signed off
Equipment
Hilty relevant drills
Attachment
Trade Line method statement
#105
Rubber flooring (buildings)
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to install Rubber Flooring in
the buildings.
Reference documents
Main Sub Station
Utility Sub Station
Building Sub Station
Sub Station
MAR
Safety
requirements.

students knowledge
288 of
Safety Supervision
Material
MAR, Norament 926 Manufactured by Nora / Freudenberg-Germany-Colour # 0884
Manufacturer recommended Adhesives from UZIN-Werk German (MAR in process)
1) UZIN KR 430 A+B Two Component Polyurethane Adhesive for fixing 6mm thick Coned
Back Rubber Tiles
2) UZIN GN 276 Neoprene adhesive for fixing Cove Skirting and Angles
Primer PE 412 PUR
KR 410 PUR Levelling Compound
(To be used to remove large unevenness if so required)
Specialist Applicator
The flooring application shall be carried out by M / S JOS HANSEN, the authorised agent
Method
For installation, the sub floor shall be even, clean, dry, firm, to the correct levels with no major
unevenness & free of cracks.
Surface shall be free from oil, wax, paint residues with minimum porosity and roughness
If required on large uneven areas, KR410 shall be applied to self level the surface
Smaller unevenness shall be made up by the adhesive itself
Civil Contractor QC inspections shall be conducted to approve that the surface is suitable
Priming PE 12 PUR shall be applied in 1 or 2 coats depending on surface porosity
Within 24 hours of priming while the surface is still tacky, floor covering operation shall
proceed. In case the primed surface has cured, it shall be roughened to provide a satisfactory
bond with adhesive
Civil Contractor QC inspections shall be conducted to approve that the primed surface is fit to
receive the floor covering
“Rubber tiled” floor shall be installed fully in accordance with pages 2-6 of the attached
installation instructions
Civil Contractor QC inspections shall be conducted throughout the above operations to ensure
compliance with specifications and ITP requirements
Equipment
Adhesive spreader, Hooked blade, Smoothing spatula, wax
Serrated blade 21
Attachment
Adhesive data sheet from UZIN-Werk
Manufacturer’s Installation instructions
#106

students knowledge
289 of
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
the Sub Station buildings.
Reference documents
Main Sub Station
Utility Sub Station
Sub Station
MAR
Safety
requirements.
Safety Supervision
Material
Back Rubber Tiles
The flooring application shall be carried out by an applicator approved and certified by M / S
JOS HANSEN, the authorised agent
Method
Smaller unevenness if any, shall be made up by the adhesive itself
The concrete surfaces are more than 28 days old

students knowledge
290 of
Equipment
Serrated blade 21
50 Kg Metal Roller
Attachment
#107
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
the buildings.
Reference documents
Main Sub Station
Utility Sub Station
Sub Station
MAR
Safety
requirements.

students knowledge
291 of
Safety Supervision
Material
Back Rubber Tiles
Primer PE 412 PUR
KR 410 PUR Levelling Compound
(To be used to remove large unevenness if so required)
The flooring application shall be carried out by M / S JOS HANSEN, the authorised agent
Method
If required on large uneven areas, KR410 shall be applied to self level the surface
Smaller unevenness shall be made up by the adhesive itself
Priming PE 12 PUR shall be applied in 1 or 2 coats depending on surface porosity
Within 24 hours of priming while the surface is still tacky, floor covering operation shall
proceed. In case the primed surface has cured, it shall be roughened to provide a satisfactory
bond with adhesive
Civil Contractor QC inspections shall be conducted to approve that the primed surface is fit to
receive the floor covering
Equipment
Serrated blade 21
Attachment
#108

students knowledge
292 of
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
the Sub Station buildings.
Reference documents
Main Sub Station
Utility Sub Station
Sub Station
MAR
Safety
requirements.
Safety Supervision
Material
Back Rubber Tiles
The flooring application shall be carried out by an applicator approved and certified by M / S
JOS HANSEN, the authorised agent
Method
Smaller unevenness if any, shall be made up by the adhesive itself
The concrete surfaces are more than 28 days old

students knowledge
293 of
Equipment
Serrated blade 21
50 Kg Metal Roller
Attachment
#109
Suspended ceilings All buildings
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to install suspended ceilings
in the buildings.
Reference documents
Specifications : for Acoustical Ceilings
MAR
MOM MM-
Safety
Safety Supervision
Material
MAR - Acoustical Metal Ceiling
Fully accessible suspended modular grid type perforated metal ceiling panels with concealed
insulation pads- Telecom Room- Administration Building
Colour RAL 9010- Ref MAR for fire proof material

students knowledge
294 of
MOM MM-
SAS ceiling system 120, manufacturer SAS ceilings UK,
MAR
Mineral fiber ceiling- Mineral fiber lay in suspended ceiling-Plane Done Plus
MOM MM- - Prima, manufactured-Armstrong UK,
MAR
Humidity resistant tile suspended Ceiling
Ceramaguard, Armstrong UK, Trade Line
Drg & Drg
MAR
Plastic Faced Ceiling- VL BIO, Armstrong USA,
Drg 2& Drg
MAR
Metal Panel Suspended Ceiling
600 x 600mm metal panel suspended ceiling in a lay-in-system
RAL 9010 (Cleaner’s Room Administration Building)
System 130 TrueGrid T24 System, Manufacturer SAS Ceiling UK, Trade Line
MAR
Aluminium Strip Ceiling- Suspended Ceiling with colour coated Aluminium strip
Only one colour RAL 9016 (Toilets)-Matador 100, Manufacturer Matador, UAE
MAR
Satin Anodised Strip Ceiling with rounded off & closed cleat
Product SMSC 100, Manufacturer Saddi Metal, UAE
MAR
Insulation pads for metal acoustical ceiling
Rockwool fill material with non combustible black glass tissue, Man-SAS, UK
Method
Installation of Lay in suspended ceiling tiles- 600 x 600 mm
Acoustic Tiles 600mmx600mm & Aluminium Tiles 600mmx600mm on exposed suspension
Chalk line shall be marked around the periphery to form a datum to be used for levelling
purpose
Suspension hangers shall be shot fired to the slab using Hilty equipment
Wall angles shall be fixed to the correct levels using steel nails
Main channels shall be fixed at 1200mm c / c to the details shown on shop drawings
Cross Tees 1200mm shall be fixed perpendicular to the main channels at 600mm c / c to
form cells of grid (600mmx1200mm)
Cross Tees 600mm shall further be fixed at the centre of 1200mm Cross Tees to form cells in
final grid (600mmx600mm)
Full tiles shall be installed in 600mmx600mm cells & the ‘cut tiles’ to suit the site requirement
as agreed
Openings for AC diffusers, spot lights, smoke detectors, fire alarm etc, all shall be provided to
the requirement

students knowledge
295 of
ITPs signed off. Ceilings shall not be fully closed until QC confirms that all preceding electrical
& HVAC installations have been completed.
Installation of Aluminium Clip in Tiles
Chalk line shall be marked around the periphery to form a datum to be used for levelling
purpose
Suspension hangers shall be shot fired to the slab at 1000mm c / c using Hilty equipment
Wall edge trims shall be fixed to correct levels using steel nails
Main channels shall be fixed at 1200mm c / c by holding clamps to the details shown on
shop drawings
Spring Tees shall be secured every 600mm by wire clips perpendicular to main channels
Tiles 600mmx600mm shall be inserted into Spring Tees
Openings for AC diffusers, spot lights, smoke detectors, fire alarm etc, shall be provided all to
the requirement
ITPs signed off. Ceilings shall not be fully closed until QC confirms that all preceding electrical
& HVAC installations have been completed.
Equipment
Shot firing gun
Attachment
Trade Line method statement
#110
Pit 21 water connection
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Definitions
Responsibilities
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
connection of the water pipeline, from the Operating Authority supply pit No 21, to the Civil
Contractor camp.
Reference documents
Excavation permit.
Drawing No:
Operating Authority easement Drawing No:

students knowledge
296 of
Definitions
Operating Authority
EPC Contractor
Civil Contractor
Responsibilities
The Civil Contractor PSM shall ensure this method statement is implementation for the
connection to pit 21, the laying of the drinking water pipeline, as well as the reinstatement to pit
21.
Safety
procedures.
Method
The position of the proposed pipe location through the wall of pit 21 shall be marked.
Using hand tools, a hole shall be made through the concrete pit wall.
The size of the hole in the pit wall, shall be adequate to allow the positioning of a purpose
made Upvc pipe sleeve.
Upon the positioning of the pipe sleeve, the pit wall shall be made good using a mortar mix of 1
part cement to 3 part sand.
As the hole is above the local water table, no provision against the ingress of water shall be
required.
When the water pipe is correctly located through the pipe sleeve, the gap between the water
pipe and the pipe sleeve shall receive a mastic seal.
The route of the pipe from pit 21 to the pipe sleeve in avenue C, is indicated upon the drawing
The pipe shall be located in a hand excavated trench, above the existing services.
Where necessary, thrust blocks shall be installed to resist any pressure movements.
The relevant pipe fittings required to control and monitor the water flow within the pipe, shall be
located inside of pit 21.
The area around the pit and along the route of the pipeline shall be left clean of construction
material.
Upon completion of the project, the water pipe shall be removed in accordance with the
instruction of Operating Authority. The fittings within the pit provided by Civil Contractor shall
be removed, leaving the existing Operating Authority valve and small vent pipe.
The pipe sleeve through the wall of pit 21, shall be capped with purpose made Upvc end caps,
that may be removed at a later date for future use if required.
Equipment
Hand tools.
Pipe jointing and cutting tools.
Attachment
Work permit.
Drawing Site Sketch
Operating Authority drawing No:
#111

students knowledge
297 of
Cement based non shrink grouting to
foundation bases
Using masterflow 928 t
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Safety
Method
Equipment
Scope
stationary equipment / vessels foundation bases using cement based non shrink grout
materia for a grouting thickness of 25 – 50 mm.
Reference Documents
Specification
Safety
Safety Supervision
Method
The surface of the foundation under the base plate or equipment to be grouted shall be
chipped / scabbled & brushed to remove the weak upper layer of the concrete, damaged
concrete and any oil soaked concrete areas without using mechanical bush hammer
Prior to grouting, loose concrete or dust shall be removed by compressed air.
The concrete surface shall be soaked with clean water for 24 hours prior to grouting grouting to
minimize the localized absorption as well as to assist the free flow of the grout.
Just prior to grouting,all standing water shall be removed leaving only a damp film.
Baseplates shall be clean and free of oil, grease, paint and correctly aligned according to the
drawings. The levelling plates shall be set to proper elevation.
Base plates and equipment bases shall be uniformly supported in order to eliminate sag and
distortion.
Equipment bases shall be levelled using both anchor bolts and jackscrews.
Stainless steel shims 50x50x10 mm thick shall be in correct locations covered with mortar so
as to allow at least 50 mm grout cover on shim sides.

students knowledge
298 of
The forms as shown on the attached sketch shall be erected on the required locations with
chamfers.
An electric drill fitted with a paddle shall be used for the grout mixing purpose.
Water @ 3.5 to 4.5 litres per 25 kg bag of Master flow 928 shall be used according to
requirement. The mixer shall be clean with no standing water.
to the batch volume, shall be added to the mixer prior to adding Masterflow grout material,
which has to be added into the mixer gradually and remaining 10 % water quantity shall be
poured during mixing , which has to be kept on for at least 3 to 5 minutes until a uniform lump
free consistency is achieved.
The grouting material shall be poured continuously using’ grout pour cone’ with a constant
hydrostatic head of at least 15 cm
Grouting shall extend to the edge of the concrete surface where it is to be finished with a 25
mm chamfer
After pouring Masterflow 928 in place, all exposed grout shall be covered with clean dampen
/ saturated Hessian and kept moist until the applied grout is firm enough to receive a curing
membrane
Temperature less than 32 degree C shall be maintained for the 3 post pour continuous days
Major Equipment
Peddle Mixer
Grout Flow Cone
Attachment
Sketch
#112
Repair of concrete floor screeds
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Safety
Method
Equipment
Scope
This statement outlines the repair procedures to be followed for the repair and reinstatement of
defective floor screeds, so as to provide a durable and serviceable levelling layer for the floor
covering placed above.
Safety

students knowledge
299 of
Safety Supervision
Responsibilities
All inspection and repair work related to the concrete floor screeds shall be under the sole
direction of a dedicated Site Engineer (SE) who shall have full authority and responsibility for
ensuring that the works are carried out in accordance with this Method Statement.
Procedure
1. Repair activities shall be restricted to a limited number of rooms at any time, and access to
the rooms restricted during repair. Before commencing any repair activity, including
preparation, the SE shall ensure that previously completed works are suitably protected
from damage and dust, using a combination of polythene sheeting and ply boarding as
appropriate.
2. Before commencing any repairs in a room, the SE shall agree the scope of the repairs to
be undertaken with the Site Quality Manager, with the agreed repair marked on the floor.
The scope shall be recorded on a sketch and identify which type of repair is to be used and
the approximate area of the repair. The repairs shall be selected from the following:
Repair Type A – Removal and Reinstatement with Cement Screed.
This repair should be adopted where the existing screed has completely disbonded and
broken up, leaving loose isolated sections of screed.
Repair Type B – Repair with Epoxy Mortar
This repair should be adopted where there are significant isolated cracks in the screed. It is
not intended to repair minor hairline cracks by this method, or construction joints between
adjacent panels of screed, unless they have become otherwise damaged.
Repair Type C – Repair with Resin Injection
This repair should be adopted where the screed appears to be disbonded and cracked or
lifting but is otherwise intact. This may be carried out in conjunction with repair Type B
above. It is not necessary to use resin injection on hollow sounding areas where there is
no other sign of failure.
Repair Type D – Surface Epoxy Coating
This repair shall be applied as a final protective coating to all repaired areas. As well as
sealing any un-repaired hairline cracks, this shall also ensure an overall uniform
appearance of the repaired areas.
3. The repairs shall be carried out as follows:
Repair Type A: Removal and reinstatement with Cement Screed
A1. The affected area shall be sawcut to the full depth of the top layer of screed
(typically 35mm) and the affected section removed carefully so as to cause minimum
disruption to adjacent areas.
A2. The removed area shall be fully cleaned of all dust and debris, and any loose
material removed.

students knowledge
300 of
A3. The cleared area shall be thoroughly soaked (not just dampened) for at least one
hour before reinstatement.
A4. Immediately before placing the replacement screed, remove any surplus water
(the substrate should still be wet) and apply one coat of NITOBOND PVA bonding
agent to all surfaces – horizontal and vertical.
A5. Place and compact the replacement screed material. Trowel and immediately
cover with polythene sheeting placed flat against the surface.
A6. Remove the polythene sheet after 4 hours and replace with wet hessian, covered
with polythene sheeting. Ensure that further water is added to the hessian at least twice
daily for a minimum of three days.
A7. Ensure that no-one walks on the repair for minimum three days. If unavoidable,
lay ply sheet over repair, ensuring it remains in place.
B1. Using a hammer and chisel, carefully chase a ‘V’ notch along the length of any crack
and along the edge of any loosened area. This should typically be 5mm from the edge
of the crack and 5mm deep.
B2. Physically remove all loose material and clean using a using a wire brush or similar.
Remove all dust and debris, using a brush and / or vacuum cleaner.
B3. Mix the repair material – NITOMORTAR FC-B (or FC) – in accordance with
manufacturers recommendations and firmly press the repair mortar into place using a
steel trowel. Finish the material flush with the surrounding concrete. It may be
necessary to apply a second levelling coat if the material settles.
B4. Ensure that the repair area is not walked on for 24 hours.
C1 Drill three 10mm holes in the area to be repaired, to a depth of approximately 35mm,
representing the interface between the two screed layers. This can be determined by
the change in sound of the drill.
C2. Fix an injection nipple to the drilled holes using an epoxy mortar e.g NitoMortar
FC-B, and seal using a trowel. Allow to set for eight hours.
C3. Mix the repair resin – NITOFILL EPLV – in accordance with the manufacturers
reccomendations, and insert into injection gun.
C4. Commence filling the central nipple, and continue until resin is observed at the outer
nipples. If neccesary, continue filling the outer nipples. Note that material usage rate
should be approximately 1litre per 1m2
. Do not attempt to place more than this, or the
floor could lift further.
C5. Leave for 6 hours, then remove the nipples and fixing mortar, and make the surface
good.

students knowledge
301 of
D1. Ensure all repairs have been completed and allowed to cure (24 hours for epoxy repair
– 5 days for cement screed repair).
D2. Brush the surface thoroughly to remove all dust and debris. Ensure that the
surface is not wet or damp.
D3. Mix the material – NITOFLOR FC140 - in accordance with the manufacturers
instructions. Firstly apply a stripe coat to any untreated minor cracks, taking care to
work the paint into the crack.
D4. Starting at the furthest corner, apply a single coat to the entire surface using a brush or
roller, ensuring that the material fully coats the surface but without ponding.
D5. Ensure that the surface is not walked on for 24 hours.
4. Details of all repairs shall be recorded on a Screed Repair Sheet – see QCF 91 attached.
Attachment
Check list Doc QCF Rev A
Location Sketch
#113
Repair of concrete floor screeds
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Safety
Method
Equipment
Scope
This statement outlines the repair procedures to be followed for the repair and reinstatement of
defective floor screeds, so as to provide a durable and serviceable levelling layer for the floor
covering placed above.
Safety

students knowledge
302 of
Safety Supervision
Responsibilities
All inspection and repair work related to the concrete floor screeds shall be under the sole
direction of a dedicated Site Engineer (SE) who shall have full authority and responsibility for
ensuring that the works are carried out in accordance with this Method Statement.
Procedure
5. Repair activities shall be restricted to a limited number of rooms at any time, and access to
the rooms restricted during repair. Before commencing any repair activity, including
preparation, the SE shall ensure that previously completed works are suitably protected
from damage and dust, using a combination of polythene sheeting and ply boarding as
appropriate.
6. Before commencing any repairs in a room, the SE shall agree the scope of the repairs to
be undertaken with the Site Quality Manager, with the agreed repair marked on the floor.
The scope shall be recorded on a sketch and identify which type of repair is to be used and
the approximate area of the repair. The repairs shall be selected from the following:
Repair Type A – Removal and Reinstatement with Cement Screed.
This repair should be adopted where the existing screed has completely disbonded and
cracked, leaving loose isolated sections of screed.
This repair should be adopted where there are significant isolated cracks in the screed. It is
not intended to repair minor hairline cracks by this method, or construction joints between
adjacent panels of screed, unless they have become otherwise damaged.
This repair should be adopted where the screed appears to be disbonded and cracked or
lifting but is otherwise intact. This may be carried out in conjunction with repair Type B
above. It is not necessary to use resin injection on hollow sounding areas where there is
no other sign of failure.
This repair shall be applied as a final protective coating to all repaired areas. As well as
sealing any un-repaired hairline cracks, this shall also ensure an overall uniform
appearance of the repaired areas.
7. The repairs shall be carried out as follows:
Repair Type A: Removal and reinstatement with Cement Screed
A8. The affected area shall be sawcut to the full depth of the screed to be removed
and the affected section removed carefully so as to cause minimum disruption to
adjacent areas.
A9. The removed area shall be fully cleaned of all dust and debris, and any loose
material removed.
A10. The cleared area shall be thoroughly soaked (not just dampened) for at least one
hour before reinstatement.

students knowledge
303 of
A11. Immediately before placing the replacement screed, remove any surplus water
(the substrate should still be wet) and apply one coat of NITOBOND PVA bonding
agent to all surfaces – horizontal and vertical.
A12. Place and compact the replacement screed material. Trowel and immediately
cover with polythene sheeting placed flat against the surface.
A13. Remove the polythene sheet after 4 hours and replace with wet hessian, covered
with polythene sheeting. Ensure that further water is added to the hessian at least twice
daily for a minimum of three days. The hessian to be kept damp the whole time
A14. Ensure that no-one walks on the repair for minimum three days. If unavoidable,
lay ply sheet over repair, ensuring it remains in place.
B1. Using a hammer and chisel, carefully chase a ‘V’ notch along the length of any crack
and along the edge of any loosened area. This should typically be 5mm from the edge
of the crack and 5mm deep.
B2. Physically remove all loose material and clean using a using a wire brush or similar.
Remove all dust and debris, using a brush and / or vacuum cleaner.
B3. Mix the repair material – NITOMORTAR FC-B (or FC) – in accordance with
manufacturers recommendations and firmly press the repair mortar into place using a
steel trowel. Finish the material flush with the surrounding concrete. It may be
necessary to apply a second levelling coat if the material settles.
B4. Ensure that the repair area is not walked on for 24 hours.
C1 Drill three 10mm holes in the area to be repaired, to a depth of approximately 35mm,
representing the interface between the two screed layers. This can be determined by
the change in sound of the drill.
C2. Fix an injection nipple to the drilled holes using an epoxy mortar e.g NitoMortar
FC-B, and seal using a trowel. Allow to set for eight hours.
C3. Mix the repair resin – NITOFILL EPLV – in accordance with the manufacturers
reccomendations, and insert into injection gun.
C4. Commence filling the central nipple, and continue until resin is observed at the outer
nipples. If neccesary, continue filling the outer nipples. Note that material usage rate
should be approximately 1litre per 1m2
. Do not attempt to place more than this, or the
floor could lift further.
C5. Leave for 6 hours, then remove the nipples and fixing mortar, and make the surface
good using epoxy mortar ( Nitomortar FC-B or FC).

students knowledge
304 of
D1. Ensure all repairs have been completed and allowed to cure (24 hours for epoxy repair
– 5 days for cement screed repair).
D2. Brush the surface thoroughly to remove all dust and debris. Ensure that the
surface is not wet or damp.
D3. Mix the material – NITOFLOR FC140 - in accordance with the manufacturers
instructions. Firstly apply a stripe coat to any untreated minor cracks, taking care to
work the paint into the crack.
D4. Starting at the furthest corner, apply a single coat to the entire surface using a brush or
roller, ensuring that the material fully coats the surface but without ponding.
D5. Ensure that the surface is not walked on for 24 hours.
8. Details of all repairs shall be recorded on a Screed Repair Sheet – see QCF 91 attached.
Attachment
Check list Doc QCF Rev A
Location Sketch
#114
Epoxy grouting to
Vibrating installation bases
Using masterflow 648 cp
General foundations
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Safety
Method
Equipment
Scope
vibratory installations using epoxy grout material for varying grouting thickness for normal
thickness range
Reference Documents
Specification

students knowledge
305 of
Safety
Safety Supervision
Method
Thin section- A gap between a base plate and substrate below 25 mm
Thick section- A gap between a base plate and substrate above 80mm
Normal thickness- In between the thin and the thick sections
Refer to MBT clarification attached
The following activities are involved for normal thickness
Surface preparation
Metal parts that should not be bonded to the grout like jack screws of the reciprocating
machinery and part of the foundation bolts shall be sealed with tape prior to grouting.
Base plates and equipment bases shall be uniformly supported in order to eliminate sag,
distortion and levelled using both anchor bolts and jackscrews.
Stainless steel shims 50x50x10 mm thick shall be placed in correct locations covered with
mortar so as to allow at least 50 mm grout cover on shim sides.
Full extent of the foundation surface under the base plate or equipment to be grouted shall be
chipped / scabbled & brushed to remove the weak upper layer of concrete and any oil
soaked concrete areas prior to the installation of the base plate
Base plate surfaces in contact with epoxy grout shall be grit blasted so as to expose white
metal
All surfaces and bolt pockets to receive grout must be clean & free of rust, oil, dirt, paint and
residual curing compound
All base plate holding down bolts etc must be free of rust, oil, dirt or contaminants that could
impair bond
Formwork
Unless otherwise shown on design drawing, the entire area under the base plate shall be
grouted and the forms fixed around the plate keeping a minimum of 25 mm clearance from the
plate edge and at least 50 mm from the edge of the pouring side so that total groutable area is
equal to underside of the plate and the clearance around the plate.
Before the form work is fixed, it shall be ensured that the foundation area to be grouted and the
bolts holes are clean
A liquid tight formwork as practicable, shall be fixed around the base plate to prevent the
leakage of the resin keeping the top of the forms 25mm above the underside of the base plate
A chamfer 25mm x 25mm shall be provided on the sides so that top of the chamfer and the top
of grout are in one level in case the whole of the foundation area around the plate is to be
grouted,

students knowledge
306 of
A 45 sloping surface above the form on the pouring side shall be constucted to create a
pressure head to enable the grout material flow to cover full width of the pour
A coating of an approved release agent shall be applied to the form work
Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted to ascertain the form profile and general
preparatory works
Grouting application
All dirt and debris shall be removed from the form work using compressed air
Sufficient Grout material to completely fill the prepared area in a continuous process shall be
made available
Mixing equipment shall be demonstrated to be in a suitable as well as in good working
condition
A standby equipment shall also be made available
Concrete surfaces to be grouted shall be completely dry before grouting
Mixing
Base and reactor components shall be poured into a suitable mixing vessel and mixing carried
out for 1 minute or until successfully blended
All required quantity of aggregate shall be added to the mixing vessel which is to be kept
turning and mixing continued until a uniform lumpfree consistency is achieved.
Overmixing shall be avoided to prevent air entrainment
Placing
All bolt pockets shall be filled with grout prior to pouring the rest of the underplate space as a
separate operation to prevent voids formation
Pouring of the grout shall start from one end of the base plate and continued until the material
reaches the far side.
Mixed grout shall be steadily poured down the form work slope to avoid air entrapment
Pouring shall be carried out only from one side of the base plate to avoid creation of voids and
any reduction of the effective bearing area
When the grout reaches the far side of the formwork which shall be ensured by poured
material rising above the bottom of base plate, the pouring location has to move along the
length of the base plate keeping the process continued until the whole area is completed.
Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted throughout the above operations to
ascertain the proper implementation of the procedures according to the manufacturer’s
instructions
Shoulders- Exposed surfaces shall be brushed with Solvent # 2 just before or as the grout gels
Curing
No curing is required
Major Equipment
Peddle Mixer / Mixing Vessel
Attachment
Sketches
Masterflow 648 CP datasheet
MBT Method statement

students knowledge
307 of
#115
Kerbs & interlocking blocks paving around
buildings
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Safety
Method
Equipment
Scope
This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to lay kerb stones and
concrete interlocking blocks in paving around buildings
Reference Documents
Specification
MAR and
Safety
Talk relevant to the operation concerned on the project site safety requirements.
Safety Supervision
Material
Kerb stones, Interlocking Paving blocks
Method
All loose soil shall be cleared and formation level made up and well compacted
(Laying Kerb stones)
Setting out kerb excavation lines according to drawing
Excavation upto the formation level i.e 325mm from the kerb top level
Form work fixing and pouring grade 20 concrete 200mm wide and 100 mm thick
Bedding in cement mortar 1 :4, 25mm thick for kerb stones
Fixing kerb on the mortar to the true lines and levels with chamfer facing pavement & jointing
with mortar
Placing haunch back concrete grade 20, 150 mm high in triangular section
Filling above haunch portion with soil
An Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted for kerb laying approval and ITP signed
off
(Laying Paving Interlocking blocks)

students knowledge
308 of
Thickness of the interlocking blocks 60mm
Thickness of the sand bedding 50mm
Top level of sand in joint from the kerb top level 50mm
Sharp sand to be consumed shall be piled up along the area to be paved and evenly spread
with the blocks laid over snugly to the agreed pattern and colour
Plank runs shall be used to allow barrows to move on to avoid level disturbance
The blocks shall be laid in full but at the edges of the obstacles such as inspection covers
where cut blocks may be required, whole blocks shall be laid first wherever possible and the
trimmable blocks exactly marked & cut to the required size.
After sufficient blocks have been laid, sand bedding shall be carried out using a plate vibrator
pressing the blocks to the required level in 2 passes covering entire area with each pass to
make the bedding even
Sand shall be spread on the surface of the blocks with 2 more vibrator passes applied &
brushed under the leading edge of the vibrator to allow the joints vibrated
A Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted to approve the paving
Major Equipment
Plate Compactor
Attachment
Manufacturer’s Conctruction method
#116
Erection of steel structures (for higher
levels)
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Definitions
Responsibilities
Safety
Method
Equipment
Scope
be implemented for the erection of the steel structures.
Reference Documents
Specification Grouting

students knowledge
309 of
ANSI A 10.13 Safety Requirements for Steel Requirements
Relevant IFC Drawings
Method Statement – Structural Steel
Definitions
EF Erection Foreman
Responsibilities
The CM shall plan and resourse the steel structure erection activies, to ensure that they are
erection work force. The CS shall control the day to day activities.
The EF shall control the workforce ensuring the full implementation of this method statement
Safety
Before commencement of any task the relevant qualified labour force shall first receive a
Safety Task Analysis Risk Reduction Talk about the task to be performed and all safety
hazards shall be addressed as required.
Main activities to be implemented are:
a) Safe access to elevated levels
b) Man baskets
c) Full body harness
d) All P.P. Equipment
e) Extra Harness Lanyard
f) Stay ropes
g) Life Line
Method
Material Receivables
All structural steel material to be used for permanent works shall be received on site and
checked against relevant documents. All members shall be checked for quantity and
identification and transportation damage.
Concrete Foundations
The surface of the concrete foundation shall be prepared in accordance with the specification
to receive grout.
All concrete foundations on which the steel structures shall be erected shall be released by the
QC department, upon completion of the civil activity.
Method Briefing
Structures erected to date were low levels, varying from 6m to 16m and access was easy. Now
the structures are at levels from 12m to 33m.
These main columns or grid frames shall be assembled on the ground near the foundation.
These shall then be installed on the columns using the appropriate capacity crane. Stay ropes

students knowledge
310 of
shall be used to secure these till the connecting horizontal member beams are installed. All
splice plates shall be installed and bolted down before the horizontal members are connected.
Steel Catcher crew with the necessary full body harness & lanyard shall be placed in position
on the beams using either a man lift or man basket. The full body harness shall secure the
steel catcher to the steel. Steel Catcher shall move around on the steel by the “Slip & Slide”
method to get in position for the next member. Life lines shall also be pulled between columns,
so that the steel catchers can walk on the beams below with their Safety Harnesses hooked
onto the life line. Access ladders shall be installed as soon as possible for safe access. The
other option shall be to install step ladders. All fasteners shall be installed and then the line &
levels checked. When the first level of steel with the majority of the horizontal members are
installed, line & levels checked, the grouting of the column base plates shall then be grouted
as per the approved procedure.
PlatformHandrailsGratings:
After completion of the main steel erection, the platformhandrails shall be installed as required
as per drawings.
Major Equipment
Mobile cranes
Man lift
Man basket
Guy ropes and tensioning equipment
Flat bed trailers and forkliftsother mobile shifting equipment
Air compressor
Impact wrench
Welding generators
Grinding machines
Drilling machines
#117
Vinyl flooring buildings
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Safety
Method
Equipment
Scope
This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to lay Vinyl tiles floor finish
on cement sand screed in buildings
Reference Documents
Specification

students knowledge
311 of
MAR
Safety
Safety Supervision
Material
Vinyle Tiles, Adhesive- Laybond Multibond Gold (Multi Purpose Acrylic )
Method
Surface shall be broomed followed by vacuum cleaning.
The sub floor shall be dry and free from contaminants, hardening compound , dust and other
deleterious matter immediately prior to floor installation
Adhesive shall be spread evenly over the surface with a triangular notched trowel 1.5mm deep
cut at 5mm centres with a sweeping motion at about 60 degree angle to horizontal &
allowed to reach a tacky consistency
Vinyl covering shall be placed into position and rolled using 68 kg roller to ensure overall
contact
A Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted for approval and ITP signed off
Major Equipment
Roller 68 Kg, Notched Trowel
Attachment
Adhesive Manufacturer’s Conctruction method
#118
Concrete paving
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Safety
Method
Equipment
Scope
This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to construct the concrete
paving
Reference Documents
Drawing Road & Paving Details Sheet 1

students knowledge
312 of
Specification
Safety
Safety Supervision
Material
Fibre Concrete grade 30, Joint filler board, Crack Inducer, Welded Wire Fabric, Oil resistant
joint sealant
Method
All the relevant underground services shall be laid in all respects prior to the commencement
of the pavement work
The area to be paved shall be made ready by clearing all weak soil & by scarifying
Approved sub base material 150mm thick shall be filled up to the bottom of the concrete slab
following the profile given on the drawing and compacted to 95 % dry proctor density
Weed killer chemical shall be applied to the soil to prevent the organic growth
The whole area shall be divided into parts to suit the services and the contraction joints
formations & as shown on drawings
On the’ compacted filled area’ to be paved, polythene sheet 0.25mm shall be placed with end
overlaps at least 150mm at all joints and intersections
End forms shall be fixed on sides allowing a provision to place 20MS dowel bars 650mm long
& 300mm centres half painted with 2 coats bitumastic paint with 100mm long cardboard cap
containing compressible material such as cotton waste at the
expansionjoint to the details shown on the drawing. The thickness of the expansion joint shall
be 20mm Refer to detail 9
At contraction joints 25x25 mm plastic crack inducer shall be provided as shown in the detail
10 & the joints cut for a depth of 20mm with a concrete cutting machine
Welded wire fabric mesh dia 7mm –200# shall be placed in the bay centrally located with
concrete spacers below
Forms shall be set to correct levels so that the total thickness of the concrete is as specied on
the drawings
Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted for the pour approval
Concrete shall be poured in one layer and compacted using parker vibrator to brush finish & to
correct levels.
Curing compound shall be spread on the surface for immediate curing covered with polythene
sheet and later within 2 hours damp hessian added by removing polythene sheet temporarily
and recovered thereafter
The expansion joints between the two adjacent slabs shall be filled with an elastic joint filler
and sealed with a chemical resistant sealant complying with the details shown on the drawings
Refer to detail 12 – Details A & B

students knowledge
313 of
Details A shows 20mm x 25 mm joint seal and detail B shows 15mm x 20mm slightly rounded
to prevent damage to edges
Major Equipment
Concrete Pump, Transit Mixer, Parker / Dr Kewande Vibrator, Concrete cutting machine
Attachment
None
#119
Central control building
Top
Index
Scope
Definitions
Material
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
Reference documents
Drawing Nos.
Specifications page
STQ Qand
Safety
Safety Supervision

students knowledge
314 of
Materials
Cementitious adhesive- Nitotile GP
Method
rules.
screed (1 cement: 4 mortar sand) to be mixed by weight and 10 mm thick ceramic tiles, shall
be applied as described below.
screed board and given a smooth trowel finish.
Civil Contractor QC visual inspection shall be conducted to ascertain proper compaction and
levels.
The surface of the screed shall be cleaned by brush prior to the application of the adhesive.
The adhesive shall be mixed with water using a slow speed drill to the water adhesive ratio per
manufacturer’s data sheet.
Adhesive Nitotile GP mix shall be applied in uniform thickness of 2 to 3 mm over the surface of
the cement sand screed bedding and then combed horizontally.
Tiles shall then be laid on the adhesive layer with a twisting motion ensuring good contact
between the tile and the adhesive bed. For this purpose the adhesive manufacturer’s
instruction shall be adhered to.

students knowledge
315 of
required finishes. (Reef STQ Q)
Excessive adhesive shall be removed with a damp cloth before the material has set.
Grouting of the joints shall be carried out after a period of 24 hours after completion of laying of
tiles.
machine bases etc.,
Major Equipment
Mechanical Mixer
Wheel barrows
Slow speed drill
Attachment
Adhesive manufacturer’s Datasheet
#120
Concrete placement
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Definitions
Responsibilities
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
placement of structural concrete upon the project.
Reference documents
Project Specification
ACI 301 chapter 8.
Definitions
EPC Contractor

students knowledge
316 of
Civil Contractor
Responsibilities
The Construction Superintendent shall ensure that the concrete Foreman implements this
procedure. The Concrete Foreman shall ensure that the concrete crew is fully aware of this
procedure and the correct methods of working.
Safety
The Safety Officer shall monitor the concrete activities, advising and implementing all safety
procedures.
Method
The structure that is to be concreted, shall be inspected and approved as correct, by both Civil
Contractor and EPC Contractor.
The permission to place concrete shall be authorized by EPC Contractor
The concrete Foreman shall ensure that he has adequate equipment resources (vibrating
pokers, compressors, hoses, steelfixer, carpenter, water etc), at the location of concrete
placement.
When the site laboratory concrete technician, has approved the concrete delivery, the concrete
placement activity can commence. Refer to Method statement, Testing of Fresh Concrete.
The concrete shall be discharged by one of two methods. For pours greater than two cubic
meters in volume, the concrete shall be discharged through a concrete pump. For pours less
than two cubic meters, the concrete can be discharged direct from the truck mixer.
Regardless of the method of discharge, no concrete shall be dropped from a height greater
than two meters, or in a manner that shall cause the segregation of the aggregates.
Immediately prior to placement activities commencing, the reinforcement within the concrete
pour, shall be sprayed with clean water.
The placement of the fresh concrete within the shutters, shall be in a logical sequence.
Concrete shall be placed at locations that do not exceed 1.5 meters from the final location of
the concrete. The maximum concrete layer thickness of 450 mm shall be observed.
The fresh concrete shall be compacted with pokers of sufficient size and number.
Consolidation of the fresh concrete, shall commence when the placement of the concrete is
adequate, so that uncontrolled segregation does not occur.
Concrete shall be placed in a sequence that ensures that cold joints are eliminated. Each
subsequent layer of concrete shall be adequately compacted into the concrete layer below.
Where encast plates, holding down bolts, or any other critical embedded item is included within
the pour, the surveyor shall check the location and elevation of that item, when concrete
placement has been completed.
Immediately the concrete finishing has been completed, the concrete shall be covered with
white polythene sheeting, ensuring that the edges are sealed to prevent the circulation of air.
Upon adequate setting of the concrete, the white polythene sheeting shall be removed.
Hessian which has been soaked in water, shall be placed over the set concrete. The white
polythene sheeting shall be replaced and sealed at the edges. The hessian shall be kept moist
for a period of 14 days.

students knowledge
317 of
(Note: it is proposed to apply for a specification concession to use a water based curing
compound, in leu of water curing.)
When shuttering is removed from a pour, the resultant concrete surface shall be inspected.
Where a defect is observed, the defect shall be classified as minor or major.
A minor defect is one which does not impair the strength of the structure or is greater than
10mm by 10mm. This minor defect shall be repaired using a patching mortar.
A major defect shall be brought to the attention of the QA department. A major defect shall be
any other surface defect that is larger than 10mm by 10mm. The method of repair of such
defects shall be discussed and agreed with EPC Contractor.
The repairs to the concrete surfaces shall be cured according to the requirement for fresh
concrete.
Equipment
Truck Mixer.
Concrete Pump.
Vibrating Pokers.
Compressors.
Attachment
ITP No: Concrete Placement.
#121
Precast rcc covers
Cable & instrumentation trenches
Top
Index
Scope
Definitions
Material
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the construction
of the covers for the Instrumentation and the electrical cable trenches.
Reference documents

students knowledge
318 of
Drawing Nos
Specifications
Safety
Safety Supervision
Materials
Coloured concrete Grade 30
Red colour concrete for the covers to be used on Electric cable trenches
Green colour concrete for the covers to be used on Instrumentation cable trenches
Red or Green oxides to be added to the concrete @ 9 kg per cum
Lifting Lugs, 16mm dia with exposed portion galvanised, to be flush with concrete
Pre fabricated mesh, 7 dia at 200 / 200
Method
Since various dimensions are involved for these typical pre cast concrete covers, the details of
the lifting lugs with the exposed steel portion of the lug to be galvanised, have been given on
the Attachment.
Relevant details 5 L & 5 H on the above drawing indicate transverse joints to be formed at a
spacing of 3m in case of 150mm thick covers and 1 m in case of 50 mm (proposed to be
substituted by 100 mm) covers
The pre casting shall be carried out in the pre cast yard to the approved procedures using
coloured concrete
All other procedures pertaining to the concreting & transporting the members to the site
locations shall be similar to as being adopted
Prior to placing the covers, the filled compacted base in the trench shall be prepared and
polythene sheet spread to receive the covers.
The covers shall be offloaded to the locations at the specified spacing leaving a gap of 25 mm
between the ends to allow for the oil resistant joint sealant
Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted to ascertain the correct alignment and level
Major Equipment
Transit mixer
Wheel barrows
Trailor
Crane
Attachment

students knowledge
319 of
Sketching showing lifting lugs
#122
Black top repair Ist street between
Avenue c & b
Top
Index
Scope
Definitions
Material
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the repair to the
road-wearing course damaged superficially to a portion on Ist Street between
Avenue ‘’ and Avenue ‘’.
Reference documents
None
Safety
Safety Supervision
Materials
Tack coat bituminous material 60 / 100 penetration to be applied @ 2.5 litres per sqm of
road surface
Asphalt for 40mm thick course according to requirement
Water
Method
Traffic diversion if so required shall be effected to the requirement
Damaged portion of the ‘wearing course’ shall be removed using ‘Asphalt Remover’ and the
surface cleaned using a ‘Mechanical Cleaner’
Tack coat shall be applied to the clean surface according to the specified rate of application as
above
Asphalt shall be applied to a required thickness (minimum 40 mm) finished to full extent of the
damaged area making up the level to the existing wearing course

students knowledge
320 of
Laid material shall be spread and finished to the required level using Asphalt Finisher
First rolling shall be carried out using pneumatic roller ‘6’ tonne capacity giving required
number of passes
Then second rolling shall be carried out using Tandem roller 8 / 10 tonnes capacity according
to the requirement giving required number of passes Water shall be used during rolling
according to the requirement
Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted to ascertain the correct finished level
Major Equipment
Asphalt Remover
Asphalt Finisher
Pneumatic Roller
Tandem Roller
Water Tank
Attachment
None
#123
Repair of
Single leaf swing gates
Top
Index
Scope
Definitions
Material
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the repair to the
emergency gates to be installed in the sub station fence for transformers.
A lock usable from outside is to be added to the gate.
Reference documents
Attached sketch

students knowledge
321 of
Safety
Safety Supervision
Materials
New post
Self levelling grout to specification
Epoxy paint system or galvafroid
Method
Vendor – Link Middle East Ltd
Existing gate post shall be cut using gas cutting equipment to a level as shown on the sketch
and discarded
A new post dia 88.9mm including a locking lug shall be added with a sleeve- slot by welding at
the vendor’s shop with 70 mm out to out PVC coated per specification. A circumferencial
overlap shall be made in such a way that a minimum of 100mm overlapping length lies below
finished concrete level in addition to projection above
A portion of the concrete necessary to allow working area (150 mm deep apprx) to weld the
circumference on site shall be removed prior to the new post is erected for installation
The new assembled post shall be properly aligned to the requirement
Welding shall be carried out to the circumference
After welding galvafroid or epoxy paint system shall be applied according to manufacturer’s
instructions
An Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be carried out for the approval of the welding and the
paint system
The surface of the broken concrete shall be cleaned and approved, forms if necessary,
prepared and self-levelling grout shall then be applied to the manufacturer’s instructions and
finished accordingly
Major Equipment
Oxy Acetylene Gas cutting system
Welding set
Attachment
Sketch showing proposed arrangement
#124
Repair to Floor screed levels
Top

students knowledge
322 of
Index
Scope
Definitions
Material
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the repair to
eliminate the uneveness from the floor screed surface, prior to applying the Rubber flooring
Reference documents
None
Safety
Safety Supervision
Materials
Fosroc Nitoflor Leveltop
This is a self-levelling, cementitious underlay for a wide variety of floors finishes requiring a
smooth level substrate
Method
Preparation
The sub strata shall be clean, sound and free from loose material and contamination such as
plaster oil and grease
Excessive laitance shall be removed by light scabbling or acid etching followed by washing
and debris removed using vacuum cleaner
Large cracks and holes shall be filled with a mix of Nitoflor leveltop and clean sharp sand
made to a trowel consistency by adding small quantity of water.
Substrate shall be primed with 1:1 water Nito bond PVA mixture prior to the repair is done
Mixing
Material shall be mixed using a heavy-duty drill fitted with a purpose made paddle.
Clean water @ 6.5 liters per bag of 25 kg material shall be used as per manufacturer’s
instructions
First 2 / 3 rd required quantity of water shall be added to the mixing vessel followed by
gradually and slowly adding the material from the bag and mixed for 3 minutes minimum
Remaining 1 / 3 rd required quantity of water shall be slowly added throughout to the mix and
mixing continued until a smooth, self levelling & pourable mix consistency is obtained

students knowledge
323 of
Material shall be poured onto the primed substrate, spread with trowel or squeegee and
allowed to self level
The material shall be rolled with a Fosroc spiked roller to achieve air release with final level.
Rolling shall be carried out immediately after material is placed.
High spots or splashes shall be scraped off with the edge of a trowel after initial set
Required thicknesss shall be achieved in one application only with maintaining continuous
process of pouring and levelling until the designated area is completed
Curing is generally not required
An Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be carried out throughout during the above operations
Major Equipment
Heavy duty drill
Mixing Vessel
Squeegee and other tools
Attachment
Fosroc Data Sheet
#125
Resin injection to leaking joint
Top
Index
Scope
Definitions
Material
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the injection to
the leaking joints at the sea water surge basin observed during water tightness test according
to the BS code 8007.
Reference documents
BS code 8007

students knowledge
324 of
Safety
Safety Supervision
Materials
Master Building Technology, Masterseal 505
Concresive 1335 and 1320
Method
Leakage Control Technology
The’ leaking joints’ shall be reinstated by injecting resin using MBT material according to the
MBT proposed statement and the material data sheet attached
Preparation and application of a ‘Low Viscosity Polyurethane Injection Resin’ used for
reinstating the structural integrity of cracked concrete accommodating slight movement
Preparation
The location of the leakage shall be marked
Leaking water shall be plugged with Masterseal 505
Once the water running is temporarily stopped, holes shall be drilled on both sides of the
expansion joint at an angle and at 200 to 500 mm spacing
Metal screw packers shall be installed in the drilled holes and tightened so that the injected
material does not leak
Application
First stage injection
Concresive 1335 shall be injected into the packers to further stop the water as it foams and
cures within 30 seconds stopping any flow of water
Second stage injection
Concresive 1320 shall be injected using a high pressure (up to 240 bars) an electrically
operated injection machine at a suitable pressure. This injection shall react with water as well
as bubble up to a fine foam and seal the leaking crack / joints permanently
Leak shall be checked again after 24 hours and re-injection applied if required
Packers shall be removed the next day and holes re-profiled using non shrink grout
During the complete operations Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be carried out to record
that the leakage has been controlled to the code requirement
Major Equipment
High pressure electric Injection system
Metallic Packers
Attachment

students knowledge
325 of
Material Datasheet
#126
Resin injection to leaking joint
Top
Index
Scope
Definitions
Material
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
Reference documents
BS code 8007
Safety
Safety Supervision
Materials
Master Building Technology , Concresive 2200 / Masterseal 505
Method
The leaking joints shall be reinstated by injecting resin using the MBT material according to the
MBT proposed statement and the material datasheet attached
Preparation and application of a low viscosity Polyurethane injection resin used for reinstating
the structural integrity of cracked concrete accommodating slight movement
The water shall be pumped out from the basin
Laitance and contaminants shall be removed from the surface from a band 50mm wide
centered on crack using light grit blasting

students knowledge
326 of
Holes shall be drilled along the center of the crack for packers at not more than 300 mm apart
Compressed air shall be used to remove dust and debris
Mixed concresive 2200 shall be applied to the bottom of the flange at perimeter ensuring the
paste does not block the port
Ports shall be located over the crack center
Concresive 2200 shall be applied in a strip 20mm wide and 2-3 mm thick between the ports
and the crack center after all the ports have been placed
Forcing the paste into the substrate to ensure intimate contact and seal around the port and
allowed to cure
Application
In case of flowing water Concresive 1335 shall be injected into the crack / joint befire using
concresive 1320 and when the water ingress stops, the concresive 1320 shall be injected into
the joint / crack
Injection process shall be started from one end of the crack moving bottom upwards in the
case of a vertical joint
Both the components of concresive 1320 shall be mixed for at least 1 minute
Injection gun shall be filled with mixed resin
And connected to the port and injection started
Resin shall continue to be injected until it starts flowing from the next port. The port under
injectin shall be closed at this stage and the other started being injected
All ports shall be injected similarly
Resin shall be allowed to cure.
Injection ports shall be removed and the paste ground ver the cracks if so required
An Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be carried out for the approval of the welding and the
paint system
Water shall be filled to the specified test levl and test reconducted according to the code
requirement
Major Equipment
Injection system / Hand gun
Compressor
Grit blasting unit
Port flanges
Grinder
Attachment
Material Datasheet
#127
resin injection to leaking joint
sea water surge basin

students knowledge
327 of
Top
Index
Scope
Definitions
Material
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
Reference documents
BS code 8007
Safety
Safety Supervision
Materials
Master Building Technology, Masterseal 505
Master Builders Technologies confirms that Concressive 1335 is a flexible / compressible
material once set. No materials are to be introduced into the expansion joint that interfere with
the function of the joint (ref the attachment)
Applicator- Track record for appraisal respecting Dicotech, the applicator attached
Measurement of injection quantity
Since the material is supplied in small packing of 1 or 5 lts, the used quantity can be measured
by counting the number of cans used
According to Dicotech the most effective means of injection is from outside as point of crack or
leakage can be seen which is almost impossible from inside
Method
Leakage Control Technology
The’ leaking joints’ shall be reinstated by injecting resin using MBT material according to the
MBT proposed statement and the material data sheet attached
Preparation and application of a ‘Low Viscosity Polyurethane Injection Resin’ used for
reinstating the structural integrity of cracked concrete accommodating slight movement

students knowledge
328 of
Preparation
Leaking water shall be plugged with Masterseal 505
Once the water running is temporarily stopped, holes shall be drilled on both sides of the
expansion joint at an angle and at 200 to 500 mm spacing
Metal screw packers shall be installed in the drilled holes and tightened so that the injected
material does not leak
Application
First stage injection
Concresive 1335 shall be injected into the packers to further stop the water as it foams and
cures within 30 seconds stopping any flow of water
Second stage injection
Concresive 1320 shall be injected using a high pressure (up to 240 bars) an electrically
operated injection machine at a suitable pressure. This injection shall react with water as well
as bubble up to a fine foam and seal the leaking crack / joints permanently
Leak shall be checked again after 24 hours and re-injection applied if required
Packers shall be removed the next day and holes re-profiled using non shrink grout
During the complete operations Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be carried out to record
that the leakage has been controlled to the code requirement
Major Equipment
Metallic Packers
Attachment
Material Datasheet
Dicotech ref containing all details giving clarifications
#128
Fire water line excavation around consumer
receipt station
Top
Index
Scope
Definitions
Material
Method
Equipment

students knowledge
329 of
Attachment
Scope
This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the excavation
for Fire Water Lines to be laid by EPC Contractor around Consumer Receipt Station. Method
Statement for the part of road crossing shall be submitted separately
Reference documents
Specification Excavation & Backfilling for Underground installations
Interconnects underground layout drainage Sheet 16
Safety
Safety Supervision
Phone number :
Shift Controller
Emergency Number
HSE Direct number
Method
Permit pertaining to the relevant excavation area shall be obtained from Plant Refinery
division. Existing services drawings shall also be obtained to ascertain safety
Supervision at the workface must have a copy of the permit, drawing and
the method statement
Attached sketch shows the location of the proposed Fire Water Line and existing Natural Gas
pipe. Any existing services shown on the record drawings shall be located, identified &
protected adequately with warning as required
Cables or pipes that span the excavation shall be supported using split ducts and trays
All existing services encountered shall be plotted by the surveyor on as built drawing
The surveyor shall set out the routes of the proposed 8”dia fire water line trenches conforming
to the IFC drawings and to the sections shown on the attached sketch keeping a clear level

students knowledge
330 of
difference between existing natural gas and proposed firewater line 1000mm. which shall also
be applicable between the existing 132 kv cable and the proposed fire water line
Where necessary or as defined on the work permit, hand excavation shall be carried out
When cable markers have been exposed, work shall be temporarily suspended and an
evaluation made about the soil conditions. This evaluation shall be conducted by EPC
Contractor Superintendent and Operator operations representative. Where necessary, a
revised method of work may be necessary and in this instance, all personnel shall be briefed
Cables shall be protected by fitting split sleeves after exposure
The trench shall be excavated by an excavator to correct lines and levels to the specification
requirement providing benching where necessary and employing all safety means. Barriers
(including warning tape) shall be placed to indicate an open excavation
The excavated material shall be stockpiled in agreed areas for reuse.
Surplus material shall be removed to the tip area in dump trucks.
The surveyor shall monitor the lines and levels of the excavation operation
Exposed (Existing) cables and pipelines shall be checked for damage by EPC Contractor
supervision and combined inspection shall be held by EPC Contractor and Civil Contractor.
Operation department shall be invited to attend
EPC Contractor engineer shall approve the suitability of the formation material by inspecting
the trench bottom and after the approval, compaction of the formation level shall be
carried out , the specified tests conducted and the results reported accordingly
The surveyor shall provide level pins to indicate the correct elevation of the bedding required
for 8” Fire Water line.
The bedding shall be laid, compacted, tested and the results reported accordingly.
The fire water pipes shall be placed correctly within the trench by EPC Contractor (not Civil
Contractor) in accordance with EPC Contractor own method statements (noting that Al Jaber
equipment is under the Direct Control of EPC Contractor).
Upon acceptance of the pipe installation, the laid pipes shall be surrounded with further
bedding material that shall be compacted using suitable equipment, tested and reported
The approved backfill material shall be spread uniformly in layers of 150 mm up to the existing
ground level, compacted to the specification requirement, tested & reported accordingly
The site shall be left tidy of excavated and backfill material
Major Equipment
Excavator
Dump Truck
Compactor
Attachment
Sketch and the drawing extract depicting proposed excavation route
#129

students knowledge
331 of
Road crossing
For laying
1 for 6” propane
First street
Top
Index
Scope
Safety
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
1 # each 20” Raw Ethane and 6” Propane
at location identified on the attached drawing pertaining to First Street
Safety
Safety Supervision
Phone number :
Shift Controller
Emergency Number
HSE Direct number

students knowledge
332 of
Flagman-On both directions, in addition to the traffic sign boards, a flagmen shall be engaged
Machine Excavation
Pre cast members
exercised during raising and downing (handling) to the exact locations strictly adhering to the
Method
A traffic management scheme shall be produced on site as detailed on the attached sketch
Drawing reference –Piping Interconnections
F Street Culvert XTH
Existing Services
3 # cables exist north side of the proposed crossing already exposed
The road shall be excavated in two instances by diverting the traffic on either lane completing
one after the other as shown on the traffic management scheme
Procedures
Instance 1
The asphalt pertaining to the crossing portion Stage-1 shall be removed

students knowledge
333 of
In addition, one access boxout at the end shall be provided to design details
Instance 2
The aforesaid activities shall be repeated for this instance for the crossing portion Stage-2
75-mm dia holes in the pre cast units meant for lifting shall be filled with concrete
Major Equipment
Rollers
Attachment
#130
Road crossing
For laying
1 for 6” propane
First street
Top
Index
Scope
Safety
Equipment
Attachment

students knowledge
334 of
Scope
1 # each 20” Raw Ethane and 6” Propane
at location identified on the attached drawing pertaining to First Street
Safety
Safety Supervision
in the area and the Plant Shift Controller and HSE department immediately notified
Phone number :
Shift Controller
Emergency Number
HSE Direct number
Machine Excavation

students knowledge
335 of
The operators / drivers shall be explicitly instructed to abide by the requirement of the
reverse signal and sound when operating reverse. Banksman shall be engaged equipment
Pre cast members
Method
F Street
Existing Services
3 # cables exist north side of the proposed crossing already exposed
The road shall be excavated in one instance by diverting the traffic on north side as shown
Procedures
Backfilling shall be carried out to the existing excavated cross trench on north end of the
proposed crossing up to the natural ground level to provide effective traffic ‘divertion routes’
from the road carriageway according to the traffic management scheme attached
The asphalt pertaining to the crossing portion shall be removed
After the exposure, all the cables shall be covered with split PVC pipe and well supported
Preparation of the trench to construct RCC culvert shall be carried out
The construction pertaining to the pipe carrying culvert including the laying of pipe sleepers
anchored with standard dowels, covers, fixing steps etc. shall be carried out according to the
75 mm dia Holes in the pre cast units meant for lifting be filled in with concrete
Access box out shall be closed with concrete after the pipe are laid

students knowledge
336 of
Major Equipment
Rollers
Attachment
#131
2 #s road crossings
For laying
1 for 6” propane
&
1 for 14”desalinated water
1for 8” potable water
Avenue -d
Top
Index
Scope
Safety
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
1 # each 20” Raw Ethane, 6” Propane & 8”Natural Gas
1# each 14” Desalinated Water and 8” Potable water
at locations identified on the attached drawing pertaining to Avenue -D
Safety
Prior to the commencement of any activity, the labour force shall receive a STARRT card /
In this case, the excavation has to be carried out on the Operating Authority area, therefore, all

students knowledge
337 of
Safety Supervision
Phone number :
Shift Controller
Emergency Number
HSE Direct number
Hand Excavation- Excavation to expose the services if any, shall be carried out manually. In
case certain services not shown on the record drawings such as fibre optics but it is
Access to trench- the workers shall clearly be instructed to use only the ladders to enter in or
Machine Excavation
Pre cast members
Method

students knowledge
338 of
Avenue D ,
Culvert
Procedures
Both the crossings shall be excavated in one instance together
Hand excavation shall be carried out to expose the cables & the other services if any,
employing seaming the area with detectors to detect the existence of cables
8 mm-galvanised removable chequer plate covers with 2 lifting handles shall be provided to
Major Equipment
Rollers
Attachment
#132
Treatment to moved expansion joints
Top
Index
Scope
Definitions
Material
Method

students knowledge
339 of
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
the moved expansion joints in the roof and the base at Sea Water Surge Basin observed
during water tightness test
Reference documents
BS code 8007
Safety
Safety Supervision
Materials
Master Building Technology,
Concresive 1320
Epoxy putty Concressive 2200
Hypaton / Combiflex Tape
Colma Cleaner
Applicator- Dicotech
Method
Roof Expansion Joint
Preparation
The joint shall be plugged with a rapid setting cement plug at top and soffit
Application
When the cement is set, drilling shall be carried out and screw packers fixed to inject
polyurethane in the joint
Concresive 1320, a two component, low viscosity flexible polyurethane resin shall be injected
into the prepared joint using an electric injection machine affecting the joint sealed after
polyurethane cures
Next day, cement plugs shall be removed from the top and sofit of the slab and the joint
cleaned to a depth 100mm to get a uniform depth
A suitable dia Backup rod shall be provided and the surface reprofiled using 2 part
Polysulphide sealant “Arbokol AG2” and allow that to cure
Base slab expansion Joint
This joint shall be treated if the leakage is observed
Preparation
The adjacent area of the joint shall be groind , cleaned and plugged by rapid setting mortar
Screw packers shall be drilled and fixed for injection

students knowledge
340 of
Application
Concressive 1320 shall be injected into the prepared space using an electric injection
machine so as to seal the joint permanently after the polyurethane resin comes in contact with
water
The cement plugs & the old sealant from the joint shall be removed the next day
Sides of the joint shall be ground using an angle grinder to remove any deleterious material to
avoid debonding of the new sealant
Backup rod shall be installed followed by priming the sides by “Arbo Primer”
Joint shall be reprofiles using “Arbokol AG2” joint sealant and allowed to cure
Adjacent area of the joint shall be ground to remove the coating from the surface
An Aluminium foil shall be provided on top of the joint sealant
1mm or 2 mm thick “Hypaton Tape / Combiflex Tape” 200 mm wide shall be fixed using
“Concressive 2200” (a 2 parts epoxy putty) after activating the tape with “Colma Cleaner”
The top surface of the tpe shall be closed with the putty leaving a neat band of 50 mm joint in
between
The system shall be allowed to cure for 3 days prior to the basin is put to use
Major Equipment
Metallic Packers
Attachment
Material Datasheet
#133
Testing of fresh concrete on site
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Definitions
Responsibilities
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
on site testing of fresh concrete delivered from the Batch plant.
Reference documents

students knowledge
341 of
Definitions
EPC Contractor
Civil Contractor
Responsibilities
The Construction Superintendent shall ensure that the laboratory technician is aware of the
concrete program. The laboratory technician shall ensure that he implements this procedure.
Safety
The Safety Officer shall monitor the concrete activities, advising and implementing all safety
procedures.
Method
The Site Laboratory shall be informed of the concreting program.
Each delivery of concrete to the site, shall report to the concrete Foreman.
The concrete Foreman shall assist the laboratory technician is testing the fresh concrete
delivery.
The delivery ticket shall first be checked for the correct grade and type of concrete.
The truck mixer shall discharge his delivery into the concrete pump.
Upon commencement of a pour, the concrete pump operator shall flush his line with the fresh
concrete. The initial discharge from the concrete pump line shall be discarded.
A sample of concrete circulated through the concrete pump, shall be taken from the end of the
concrete pump line. The pumping operation shall then cease until the laboratory technician has
completed his testing.
The temperature of the concrete sample shall be determined according to ASTM C1064.
A slump of the concrete sample shall be conducted according to ASTM C143.
These details shall be recorded upon the test record format QC.
Once these test results have been established as conforming to the specification
requirements, the pumping operation can proceed.
Subsequent deliveries of fresh concrete shall follow a similar procedure. The exemption being
that the initial discharge of the subsequent truck mixers shall not be discarded.
The laboratory technician shall take concrete samples from random truck mixers, for the
purpose of concrete test cubes. The frequency of these concrete test cubes shall be three
cubes per 100 cubic meters of delivered concrete. Additional concrete cubes shall be taken as
directed by the laboratory manager, for conducting further tests upon hardened cubes as
defined within the specifications.
Equipment
Truck Mixer.
Concrete Pump.
Slump Cone.
Thermometer.
Cube molds.
Attachment
ITP No:

students knowledge
342 of
#134
Road crossing
To install culvert for
1# 14” desalinated water
Corniche road / road c
At gup gate noth
Top
Index
Scope
Safety
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the excavation
and installation of 1 # pre cast culvert at the road crossing as shown on the attached sketch
Safety
Safety Supervision
Phone number :
Shift Controller
Emergency Number
HSE Direct number

students knowledge
343 of
Machine Excavation
Pre cast members
Method
Corniche Road Culvert
Existing Services
On East End of the crossing exist banks of electrical cables & also exist some utility pipes.
On West End exist certain services
An electric pole exists on the West of the gate but out of culvert reach
On the South adjacent to road exists sea water pipe in the trench
Procedures
Backfilling shall be carried out to the existing excavated sea water trench on south of the
Corniche road crossing up to the natural ground level to provide effective traffic access to the
working area from the road carriageway according to the traffic management scheme attached
Traffic management scheme shall be implemented effectively subject to RRD approval

students knowledge
344 of
Major Equipment
Rollers
Attachment
#135
Road crossing
To install culvert
For
1 # 14” desalinated water
Avenue ‘c’ road gup gate east
Main entrance
Top
Index
Scope
Safety
Equipment
Attachment
Scope

students knowledge
345 of
Safety
Safety Supervision
in the area and the Shift Controller and HSE department immediately notified
Phone number :
Shift Controller
Emergency Number
HSE Direct number
Machine Excavation
Pre cast members

students knowledge
346 of
Method
Avenue C Culvert
Existing Services
On North and South end of the crossing exist many electrical cables, minor irrigation cables &
also exist some utility pipes.
Two trees on either end shall be effected and need preservation
On the side terrace a small portion of interlocking block paviors shall be effected
Procedures
Trees under effect shall be removed and preserved
The crossing shall be carried out in two instances
Instance 1
Removed trees shall be replanted
Instance 2
All the activities shall be repeated for this instance

students knowledge
347 of
Major Equipment
Rollers
Attachment
#136
ROAD CROSSING
TO INSTALL CULVERT
FOR
Main entrance
Top
Index
Scope
Safety
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
Safety
Safety Supervision
Phone number :
Shift Controller
Emergency Number
HSE Direct number

students knowledge
348 of
Access to trench- The workers shall clearly be instructed to use only the ladders whether to
enter in or come out of the trench. No jumping shall be allowed
Machine Excavation
Pre cast members
exercised during raising and installing / downing (handling) to the exact locations strictly
adhering to the relevant safety measures
Method
Avenue C Culvert
Existing Services
Procedures
The crossing shall be carried out in one instance

students knowledge
349 of
75 mm dia Holes in the pre cast units meant for lifting shall be filled in with concrete
Access box out shall be closed with concrete after the pipes are laid
Removed / Preserved trees shall be replanted
Major Equipment
Rollers
Attachment
#137
Road crossing
To install culvert
For
Main entrance
Top
Index
Scope
Safety
Equipment

students knowledge
350 of
Attachment
Scope
Safety
Safety Supervision
Phone number :
Shift Controller
Emergency Number
HSE Direct number
Access to trench- The workers shall clearly be instructed to use only the ladders whether to
enter in or come out of the trench. No jumping shall be allowed
Machine Excavation

students knowledge
351 of
Pre cast members
exercised during raising and installing / downing (handling) to the exact locations strictly
adhering to the relevant safety measures
Method
Avenue C Culvert
Existing Services
Procedures
The entrance road shall be closed to all traffic.
The traffic shall be diverted to use the North gate
The crossing shall be carried out in one instance
75 mm dia Holes in the pre cast units meant for lifting shall be filled in with concrete
The traffic diversion shall be removed after the road crossing is cleared of all debris and
obstructions.
Access box out shall be closed with concrete after the pipes are laid
Removed / Preserved trees shall be replanted & all landscaping reinstated to RRD / GUP
satisfaction

students knowledge
352 of
Major Equipment
Rollers
Attachment
Sketch showing the traffic diversion
#138
Replacement of misaligned anchor bolts in
Foundation 55-vv-906
Using renderoc lax tra
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Safety
Method
Equipment
Scope
This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the replacement
to the foundation damaged anchor bolts.
Reference Documents
Method Statement 36 approved for concrete repairs Item F (Renderoc Lax Tra FOSROC)
Safety
Safety Supervision
Method
3 # Anchor bolts installed for this foundation were damaged post pouring
The following operations are invloved to reinstate the bolts into the foundation
The effected concrete portion shall be removed in a triangular form from the foundation
corners in an approximate prismatic shape of base 250mmx200mm and height of the prism
600mm approximately.
During breaking the concrete, care shall be taken to not to damage the rebars.
The exposed rebars shall be properly cleaned using hard brush so that no loose particles
remain intact to the rebar surface

students knowledge
353 of
The surface of the broken concrete shall be cleared of all debris and new bolts installed in
correct locations
Forms shall be erected to the correct profile, alignment , properly leveled and plumbed.
Chamfer shall be aligned properly.
The form and the concrete surface shall be properly sealed using silicon seal to avoid any
leakage of the material
Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted to ascertain the correct alignment of the
anchor bolts and the forms
Then the prepared surface shall be soaked in water for 24 hours prior to grouting
The material shall be mixed with specified quantity of clean water according to the
manufacturer’s instruction and poured in layers 200 mm thick
Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted throughout the pouring operation
After the approval of the repair works and giving allowance of specified number of days, further
operations shall be carried out
Major Equipment
Peddle Mixer
Attachment
None
#139
Replacement of misaligned anchor bolts in
Foundation 55-vv-906
Using renderoc lax tra
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Safety
Method
Equipment
Scope
This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the replacement
to the foundation damaged anchor bolts.
Reference Documents
Method Statement 36 approved for concrete repairs Item F (Renderoc Lax Tra FOSROC)
Safety

students knowledge
354 of
Safety Supervision
Method
3 # Anchor bolts installed for this foundation were damaged post pouring
The following operations are invloved to reinstate the bolts into the foundation
The effected concrete portion shall be removed in a triangular form from the foundation
corners in an approximate prismatic shape of base 250mmx200mm and height of the prism
600mm approximately.
During breaking the concrete, care shall be taken to not to damage the rebars.
The exposed rebars shall be properly cleaned using hard brush so that no loose particles
remain intact to the rebar surface
The surface of the broken concrete shall be cleared of all debris and new bolts installed in
correct locations
Forms shall be erected to the correct profile, alignment , properly leveled and plumbed.
Chamfer shall be aligned properly.
The form and the concrete surface shall be properly sealed using silicon seal to avoid any
leakage of the material
Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted to ascertain the correct alignment of the
anchor bolts and the forms
Then the prepared surface shall be soaked in water for 24 hours prior to grouting
The material shall be mixed with specified quantity of clean water according to the
manufacturer’s instruction and poured in layers 200 mm thick
Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted throughout the pouring operation
After the approval of the repair works and giving allowance of specified number of days, further
operations shall be carried out
Major Equipment
Peddle Mixer
Attachment
None
#140
Buildings
screeds for vinyl and epoxy floor finishes
Top
Index
Scope
Safety
Material
Method
Equipment

students knowledge
355 of
Attachment
Scope
This statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to lay the floor screed
For the vinyl tile and the epoxy floor finishes
Reference documents
None
Safety
Safety Supervision
Materials
Cement, washed sand, screened sand, bonding agent, water
Method
(Laying floor screed by SEMI DRY method)
The floor area to be laid with screed shall be divided in equal or as considered convenient
strips / bays, not more than1500mm wide so that alternatively screed could be laid in.
The concrete surface shall be cleared of all loose particles and cleaned using hard wire brush
to ensure enough roughness on the concrete surface
The levels up to which the floor screed is to be laid, shall be profiled by using Mechanical
levelling points with steel pipes to maintain levels so that complete compartment is given a
proper level
The cleaned area shall be soaked with water 24 hours prior to the application of screed.
Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted for the examination pertaining to the
preparatory works for the ready to pour compartments
Application
After the preparation for the alternate bays or strips of 1500 mm width or as sized on site is
ready with all levels, cleaned, duly soaked in water for 24 hours and ready for pouring, the
prepared surface shall be spread with cement slurry ratio 1:1
(1 part cement and 1 part sand) mixed with mix quality water
The mortar for screed shall be mixed semi dry by a mechanical mixer with only sufficient water
added to give a crumbly consistency which retains its shape when squeezed by hand
permitting no fluidity
One layer application with 1:2.5 cement –screened sand mortar
The mix shall be placed to a thickness approximately 10 mm greater than that actually
required, thoroughly compacted by tamping and drawing off to the required level with a screed
board.

students knowledge
356 of
After compacting the layer of mortar, the compacted surface shall be finished by a steel float to
achieve a smooth surface ready to receive the vinyl tiles or the epoxy painting floor finishes
and then covered with polythene membrane for immediate curing
The finished surface shall be permanently cured by adding water soaked hessian after a few
hours of finishing and recovered with polythene. The surface shall be kept wet for a period of 3
days and then protected till the floor finishes are laid over the surface
Throughout the above operations Civil Contractor QC visual inspection shall be conducted
Major Equipment
Mechanical Mixer
Wheel barrows
Attachment
None
#141
Buildings
Screeds for vinyl and epoxy Floor finishes
Top
Index
Scope
Safety
Material
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
Reference documents
None
Safety

students knowledge
357 of
Safety Supervision
Materials
Method
The floor area to be laid with screed shall be divided in equal or as considered convenient
strips / bays, not more than1500mm wide so that alternatively screed could be laid in.
to ensure enough roughness on the concrete surface
proper level
preparatory works for the ready to pour compartments
Application
prepared surface shall be spread with cement slurry ratio 1:1
The mix shall be placed to a thickness approximately 10 mm greater than that actually
required, thoroughly compacted by tamping and drawing off to the required level with a screed
board.
hours of finishing and recovered with polythene. The surface shall be kept wet for a period of 3
days and then protected till the floor finishes are laid over the surface
Major Equipment
Mechanical Mixer
Wheel barrows
Attachment

students knowledge
358 of
None
#142
Buildings
Screeds for vinyl and epoxy Floor finishes
Top
Index
Scope
Safety
Material
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
Reference documents
None
Safety
Safety Supervision
Materials
Method
The floor area to be laid with screed shall be divided in equal or as considered practicable
strips / bays, not more than1500mm wide (may be wider if convenient), so that alternatively
screed could be laid in.
Scabbling of the concrete surface shall be carried out if so required
to ensure sufficient roughness to receive the screed
proper level

students knowledge
359 of
preparatory works for the ‘ready to pour’ compartments
Application
pourable surface shall be spread with cement slurry ratio 1:1
The mix shall be placed in one layer progressively to a thickness approximately 10 mm greater
than that actually required, thoroughly compacted by tamping and drawn off to the marked
level with a screed board.
hours of finishing and recovered with polythene sheet. The surface shall be kept wet for a
period of 3 days and then protected with hard boards spread over till the floor finishes are
applied over the surface
Prior to full-scale commencement of the screeding operation, a sample shall be produced on
site in the presence of EPC Contractor representative so that an agreement pertaining to the
stated procedures to carry out the screeding and about the Quality could reach
Major Equipment
Mechanical Mixer
Wheel barrows
Attachment
None
#143
Directional boring at 3# locations for
14”desalinated water pipe corniche
road North of Operating Authority
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents

students knowledge
360 of
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
boring under the existing culverts to facilitate to lay the sleeves for pipe lines 1 # 14”
Desalinated Water at 3 # locations
Safety
Method
Trial pits shall be made manually on both ends of the proposed boring to ascertain the
Case 1
Existing 1 box culvert and a 14” dia pipe about 1 m from culvert
A sleeve 5 m long of required material dia 20 “is to be laid beneath the box culvert (about 3m x
3m in section), 1 m below the base by directional boring so that 1 m projection remains on both
sides of the culvert. The laying pertaining to the remaining portion of the pipes other than the
sleeve shall be carried out by ordinary approved procedures by excavation to the required
level, bedding, compaction and the filling above the portion over the pipe and tested
accordingly
Case 2
Existing 1 box culvert and 1 pipe 1.5 m dia 2 m from the culvert and 1 pipe 1 m dia about 3.3
m below ground. 4 # existing services also have been exposed
A sleeve 7.3 m long has to pass beneath the box culvert (about 3m x 3m in section) ,1 m
below the base by directional boring so that 1 m projection remains on both sides of the
culvert & the existing 1.5 m GRP pipe approximately 2.5 m below the existing ground. . The
laying pertaining to the remaining portion of the pipes other than the sleeve shall be carried out
by ordinary approved procedures by excavation to the required level, bedding, compaction and
the filling above the portion over the pipe and tested accordingly after the pipes are laid

students knowledge
361 of
Case 3
Existing 1 box culvert and 2 # 60” dia ABB Cooling water pipe laying at about 10 m from the
culvert is in progress. Proposed 14 “ Desalinated water pipe has to cross over ABB pipes
keeping 1 m apart vertically
A sleeve 5 m long has to pass beneath the box culvert (about 3m x 3m in section) below the
base by directional boring so that 1 m projection remains on both sides of the culvert. The
pipes shall then be raised over the existing 2 #s 6” dia ABB cooling water lines at about 2. 3 m
from the existing ground level so that the top of the pipes is 1.2 m from the ground level. The
the filling above the portion over the pipe and tested accordingly. The work for the portion to
cross over ABB pipes shall be carried out after the ABB pipes are laid and backfilled
carried out
First stage-
The sleeve is in the trench on one end and the reamer fully underground.
Second stage-
Third stage-
Fourth stage-
completed
surface
equipment according to their approved method statement
Equipment
Attachment
Cross-Section Sketches showing 3 # cases

students knowledge
362 of
#144
road North of Operating Authority
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
Desalinated Water at 3 # locations
Safety
Method
Trial pits shall be made manually on both ends of the proposed boring to ascertain the
Case 1
A sleeve 5 m long of required material dia 20 “is to be laid beneath the box culvert (about 3m x
sides of the culvert. The laying pertaining to the remaining portion of the pipes other than the

students knowledge
363 of
sleeve shall be carried out by ordinary approved procedures by excavation to the required
level, bedding, compaction and the filling above the portion over the pipe and tested
accordingly
Case 2
m below ground. 4 # existing services also have been exposed
A sleeve 7.3 m long has to pass beneath the box culvert (about 3m x 3m in section) ,1 m
below the base by directional boring so that 1 m projection remains on both sides of the
culvert & the existing 1.5 m GRP pipe approximately 2.5 m below the existing ground. . The
the filling above the portion over the pipe and tested accordingly after the pipes are laid
Case 3
Existing 1 box culvert and 2 # 60” dia ABB Cooling water pipe laying at about 10 m from the
culvert is in progress. Proposed 14 “ Desalinated water pipe has to cross over ABB pipes
keeping 1 m apart vertically
A sleeve 5 m long has to pass beneath the box culvert (about 3m x 3m in section) below the
base by directional boring so that 1 m projection remains on both sides of the culvert. The
pipes shall then be raised over the existing 2 #s 60” dia ABB cooling water lines at about 2. 3
m from the existing ground level so that the top of the pipes is 1.2 m from the ground level. The
the filling above the portion over the pipe and tested accordingly. The work for the portion to
cross over ABB pipes shall be carried out after the ABB pipes are laid and backfilled
De watering shall be carried out as per specification if necessary
First stage-
Second stage-
Third stage-
Fourth stage-
completed
surface

students knowledge
364 of
Equipment
Attachment
#145
road North of gup
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
Desalinated Water at 3 # locations. The concrete culverts are not in good condition and
directional drilling or thrust bore is the method preferred by Operator (RRD) for carrying out
this work
Safety

students knowledge
365 of
at the works for complete safety.
Method
Trial pits shall be made manually on both ends of the proposed boring to check for existing
services and protect these from any damage and shall also be used for the bentonite trial at
the receiving end
Case 1
A carbon steel sleeve 5 m long of dia 20 “is to be installed beneath the box culvert (about 3m x
sides of the culvert.
The 14” dia GRE pipe shall then pass through the installed sleeve
Case 2
m below ground. 4 # existing services
A sleeve 7.3 m long shall be installed beneath the box culvert (about 3m x 3m in section),
1 m below the base by directional boring so that 1 m projection remains on both sides of the
obstructions approximately 2.5 m below the existing ground.
Case 3
Existing 1 box culvert
A sleeve 5 m long shall be installed beneath the box culvert (about 3m x 3m in section) below
the base by directional boring so that 1 m projection remains on both sides of the culvert.
carried out
First stage-
Second stage-
Third stage-
Fourth stage-
completed
surface

students knowledge
366 of
Major Equipment
Attachment
#146
road North of gup
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
Desalinated Water at 3 # locations. The concrete culverts are not in good condition and
directional drilling or thrust bore is the method preferred by Operator (RRD) for carrying out
this work
Safety

students knowledge
367 of
at the works for complete safety.
Method
Trial pits shall be made manually on both ends of the proposed boring to check for existing
services and protect these from any damage and shall also be used for the bentonite trial at
the receiving end
Case 1
A carbon steel sleeve 5 m long of dia 20 “is to be installed beneath the box culvert (about 3m x
sides of the culvert.
Case 2
m below ground. 4 # existing services
A sleeve 7.3 m long shall be installed beneath the box culvert (about 3m x 3m in section),
1 m below the base by directional boring so that 1 m projection remains on both sides of the
obstructions approximately 2.5 m below the existing ground.
Case 3
Existing 1 box culvert
A sleeve 5 m long shall be installed beneath the box culvert (about 3m x 3m in section) below
the base by directional boring so that 1 m projection remains on both sides of the culvert.
Dewatering shall be carried out as per specification if necessary
First stage-
Second stage-
Third stage-
Fourth stage-
completed
surface

students knowledge
368 of
Major Equipment
Attachment
#147
Epoxy skirting in
Central control building
& sub stations on dry lining
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out epoxy skirting on
dry lining in areas not exposed to impact or abuse
Safety
Safety Supervision
Material
Master Builders Technologies
Concresive 1020 primer
Concresive 2020 Epoxy Mortar

students knowledge
369 of
Method
Surface Preparation
Surface shall be cleaned of all dust and dirt and other contaminants
A 5 mm groove shall be formed on the dry lining to cove in the skirting
Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted to ensure that the surface is clean and
contaminants free
Primer Coat
Mixing of the base and reactor components shall be carried out in a vessel using an electric
operated slow speed drill with a suitable paddle attachment making sure that the paddle
reaches to the bottom and sides of the vessel and mixing carried out for
1 to 2minutes until a uniform consistency and colour is achieved
Application
The mixed material shall be applied to the surface using a stiff brush according to the stated
coverage on the manufacturer’s datasheet
High Build Epoxy Resin Mortar
It is essential to apply the mortar while the primer being tacky otherwise a second priming coat
shall be applied
Thorough mixed mortar according to the manufacturer’s instruction shall be applied in a
3 mm layer to the primed surface with steel trowel pressed well into the surface
compacting to ensure positive and permanent adhesion. Finishing shall be carried out by a
steel trowel to bring the resin to the surface
Mastertop Resin as suggested by the manufacturer is not applicable in this case
Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted throughout the above operations
Equipment
Mixing Vessel
Electric drill with paddle attachment
Stiff brush
Steel trowel
Attachment
MBT method statement
#148
Epoxy skirting on dry lining
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment

students knowledge
370 of
Scope
Ref Specs Outline building specification Page
Safety
measures addressed to raise to a minimum standard . MBT instructions shall be adhered
strictly
Safety Supervision
Material
Concresive 2200 Epoxy Mortar 3mm thick
‘Mastertop 1230 is’ resin without aggregate component
Method
A sample was prepared on site in Central Control Building Battery Room
approved by EPC Contractor
Surface Preparation
Sandpaper shall be rubbed lightly on the acrylic wall coating followed by wiping with a clean
cloth to remove any residual dust & laitance
contaminants free
Concresive 2200
Base and the reactor components shall be mixed together using a trowel
The mixed material shall be applied in 3mm thickness on the surface to the required level
forming cove using the minimum of solvent on the trowel to aid workability
Surface shall be finished smooth using a paint brush dipped in cleaning solvent # 2
An allowance of 24 hours for curing shall be given prior to overcoating with
‘Mastertop 1230 is’ flooring compound using only resin without aggregate component
Overcoating with Mastertop ‘1230is’ Resin (500 microns)
The surface of the cured Concresive shall be rubbed lightly with sandpaper to remove any
rough edges
Areas prone to splashing with wet resin shall be protected and the free edges masked with 50-
mm wide tape
The surface shall be sealed with Mastertop 1200 resin diluted with 5 % volume of solvent # 2
prior to applying ‘Mastertop 1230 is’ resin as follows
Reactor shall be poured into base and mixed together for 1-2 minutes using a slow speed drill
fitted with a spiral mixer, then solvent added and mixed for 1 minute

students knowledge
371 of
The mixed material shall be applied on the surface ensuring total coverage using a spiked
roller. Sealer coat shall be allowed to cure to a tackfree state prior to applying ‘Mastercoat
1230 is’ resin coating
Reactor B and Base A shall be poured into a suitable mixer and mixed together using a slow
speed drill fitted with a suitable mixing paddle and mixed for about half a minute before
‘Mastertop 1230 is’ filler is added keeping the mixing on until a uniform colour is obtained free
of streaks or lumps of unmixed filler
Smooth Finish
For the base coat ‘Mastertop 1230 is’ shall be applied @ 1.1 liter per m2.
For the second coat ‘Mastertop 1230 is’ shall be mixed and applied @ 0.4 liter per m2
48 hours curing allowance shall be given
Equipment
Mixing Vessel, Electric drill with paddle attachment, Notched trowel, Soft brush,
Attachment
MBT method statement ref
#149
Epoxy skirting on dry lining
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
Ref Specs Outline building specification Page
Safety
measures addressed to raise to a minimum standard. MBT instructions shall be adhered
strictly

students knowledge
372 of
Safety Supervision
Material
Concresive 2200 Epoxy Mortar 3mm thick
‘Mastertop 1230 is’ resin without aggregate component
Method
A sample was prepared on site in Central Control Building Battery Room for inspection and
acceptance by EPC Contractor Civil Contractor shall co-ordinate with EPC Contractor
regarding moving of any UPS batteries that may be required prior to carrying out any skirting
Surface Preparation
Sandpaper shall be rubbed lightly on the acrylic wall coating followed by wiping with a clean
cloth to remove any residual dust & laitance
contaminants free
Concresive 2200
Base and the reactor components shall be mixed together using a trowel
The mixed material shall be applied in 3mm thickness on the surface to the required level
forming cove using the minimum of solvent on the trowel to aid workability
Surface shall be finished smooth using a paint brush dipped in cleaning solvent # 2
An allowance of 24 hours for curing shall be given prior to overcoating with
‘Mastertop 1230 is’ flooring compound using only resin without aggregate component
Overcoating with Mastertop ‘1230is’ Resin (500 microns)
The surface of the cured Concresive shall be rubbed lightly with sandpaper to remove any
rough edges
Areas prone to splashing with wet resin shall be protected and the free edges masked with 50-
mm wide tape
The surface shall be sealed with Mastertop 1200 resin diluted with 5 % volume of solvent # 2
prior to applying ‘Mastertop 1230 is’ resin as follows
Reactor shall be poured into base and mixed together for 1-2 minutes using a slow speed drill
fitted with a spiral mixer, then solvent added and mixed for 1 minute
The mixed material shall be applied on the surface ensuring total coverage using a spiked
roller. Sealer coat shall be allowed to cure to a tackfree state prior to applying ‘Mastercoat
1230 is’ resin coating
Reactor B and Base A shall be poured into a suitable mixer and mixed together using a slow
speed drill fitted with a suitable mixing paddle and mixed for about half a minute before
‘Mastertop 1230 is’ filler is added keeping the mixing on until a uniform colour is obtained free
of streaks or lumps of unmixed filler
Smooth Finish
For the base coat ‘Mastertop 1230 is’ shall be applied @ 1.1 liter per m2.

students knowledge
373 of
For the second coat ‘Mastertop 1230 is’ shall be mixed and applied @ 0.4 liter per m2
48 hours curing allowance shall be given
Equipment
Mixing Vessel, Electric drill with paddle attachment, Notched trowel, Soft brush,
Attachment
MBT method statement ref RF / 2833 / 2000 / SRH / NH / 30.10.2000
#150
Road surface Reinstatement
over box culvert crossings
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the
reinstatement to the existing road surfaces removed from the crossings effected portions
pertaining to Roads Avenue C, D, First Street, GUP Entrance etc.
Reference: Specification Section
Safety
measures addressed to raise to a minimum standard.
Safety Supervision
Material
Bitumen MC1
Asphalt Concrete for Base / Under Course
Tack Coat SS1h
Asphalt Concrete for Wearing Course
Method
Traffic Management

students knowledge
374 of
RRD Approved Traffic Management Scheme shall be implemented to the requirement
Surface Preparation
Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted for the backfill clearance
Primer
The portion of the backfilled earth 120mm deep shall be excavated from the existing road
surface level followed by compaction, testing and preparation for the primer
The approved compacted surface shall be made ready for applying MC1 primer
Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted to ascertain the suitability of the surface to
receive the primer
Primer shall be sprayed by tanker on the complete surface @ 0.8 to 1.4 litres / sqm
The surface shall be left for such time until the material dries out usually 24 hours post
application otherwise, sand shall be used to blot the excessive bitumen prior to commence to
lay the Base / Under course asphalt concrete
60 mm Thick Base / Under Course Asphalt Concrete
Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted to ascertain the suitability of the primed
surface to receive asphalt concrete
Asphalt concrete shall be laid on the approved surface to the prepared profile so that a uniform
60 mm compacted thickness is obtained after compaction by rolling
After spreading the material, the rolling shall be carried out by one 3 wheel roller, one
Pneumatic Tyre roller and one 2-axle Tandem rollers 8 to 10 tonnes capacity according to the
specified procedures giving 6 passes overlapping the previous pass by 300mm of the previous
trip using sufficient oil or water to moisten the wheels and fully compacted before asphalt
concrete reaches 80 C
An allowance for one hour shall be given to commence to lay the Wearing course after the
base course is compacted by rolling
Tack / Seal Coat using SS1h
An application of the tack coat @ 0.4 to 0.7 litres / sqm shall be carried out on the rolled
surface of the Base / Under Course
Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted to ascertain the correct Base Course
surface profile and the Tack Coat acceptability
60mm Wearing Surface Course
Asphalt Concrete shall be laid for the Wearing coat also in a similar manner ensuring that the
top of the compacted material is at the same level as the top of the existing road surface on
both sides of the culvert
Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted to ensure that the surface is to the
acceptable profile and compaction is carried out to the standards
The area shall be fully cleared to the normal requirement
The Traffic management scheme shall be removed and normal traffic restored
Equipment
Bitumen Tanker, Pressure boom, Asphalt Concrete Spreader and paver, Road Rollers
Attachment
None

students knowledge
375 of
#151
Repair to lift
Cladding panel
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to rectify the stainless
cladding lift panel in the Administration Building
Safety
measures addressed to raise to a minimum acceptable standard
Safety Supervision
Material
New stainless steel lift panel from OTIS
Method
New panel to be fixed over the damaged one shall be supplied by the factory
Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted to ensure that the new panel adheres to the
requirement
This panel shall be placed over the existing damaged panel to check the compatibility to fixing
Then the new panel shall be removed & glue applied on both surfaces to be adhered
Glue shall be allowed to dry for a few minutes and then both surfaces shall be bonded together
The protection film shall then be removed from the panel and surface cleaned using soft cotton
cloth
Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted to ensure that the new panel has been fixed
properly to the damaged one

students knowledge
376 of
Equipment
Attachment
OTIS method statement
#152
Fixing sheeting panels
Wall & roof cladding
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to fix the roof and the wall
panels for various structures to be cladded
Safety
Safety Supervision
Material
MAR 120- Formawall for wall panels, Trisomet for Roof Panels, Profile EP3-Corrugated steel
sheet (Single Skin)- by European Profiles (BS / HHR)
Three types of panels shall be used as follows
Maintenance Building-Roof Panels- Trisomet, Wall Panels- Formawall Flat
Car Parks- Corrugated Cladding
Work shall be carried out by M / S Khalidiya Intersystems
Method
Preparation
Prior to the commencement of the sheeting operations, the structural items including the door
posts and parapet etc shall be lined and levelled properly to the requirement within acceptable
tolerances

students knowledge
377 of
Wind brace clips shall be removed and the building cleaned
Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted to ensure that the structural elements are
aligned, levelled and fixed to the specified requirement
Fixing Roof Panels
Valley gutters shall be fixed and aligned
Internal ridge flashing shall be fixed in position
Insulated Trisomet panels shall be fixed starting from the valley and rising to the ridge and all
fixings fastened on the crown
All end laps shall be sealed with mastic to prevent capillary humidity rise
Procedure shall be repeated for the parapet wall by fixing and aligning the gutter
External ridge flashing shall be fixed
The entire roof shall be brush cleaned and colour caps fixed
Fixing Formawall Flat Panels
First Tier
Drip flashing shall be fixed at the base of the wall to be used as a straight datum line
The first formawall vertical panel shall be fixed to true plumb and fastened by steel screws
throughout the joints and the next panel fixed along side of the first panel by providing a tight
vertical joint & the process repeated till the end is reached
Special flashing shall be fixed to the entire length of the first tier of vertical panels
Second Tier
The second tier of the blue panels shall be fixed in the same manner as the lower panel
The procedure shall continue till all the sides are completed
Special corner flashing shall be used internally and externally to provide an aesthetic finish at
the corner joints
Car Park
Corrugated cladding
Single long panel shall be fixed fastened to the straight end of the structure through the crown
with one and a half profile overlapped on sides and mastic inserted between the sheets
The procedure shall be continued to the curve where sheets are to be racked and cut to
provide roof curvature
The entire roof shall be brush cleaned and colour caps inserted
Equipment
Attachment
Khalidiya method statement ref
MAR approval reference
#153
Fixing sheeting panels

students knowledge
378 of
Wall & roof cladding
Top
Index
Scope
Reference documents
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to fix the roof and the wall
metal panels for various structures to be cladded
Safety
Safety Supervision
Reference Specification (Metals) for fasteners,
Material
MAR
Formawall for wall panels,
Trisomet for Roof Panels, Profile EP3-Corrugated steel sheet (Single Skin)- by European
Profiles (BS / HHR)
Three types of panels shall be used as follows
Maintenance Building-Roof Panels- Trisomet, Wall Panels- Formawall Flat
Car Parks- Corrugated Cladding
Work shall be carried out by M / S Khalidiya Intersystems
Method
Preparation
Prior to the commencement of the sheeting operations, the structural items including the door
posts and parapet etc shall be lined and levelled properly to the requirement within acceptable
tolerances
Wind brace clips shall be removed and the building cleaned
All necessary documentation i.e Check List, RFI etc shall be completed and submitted prior to
the work commencement
Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted to ensure that the structural elements are
aligned, levelled and fixed to the specified requirement
Installation shall be carried out in accordance with the provisions in specification

students knowledge
379 of
Fixing Roof Panels
Valley gutters shall be fixed and aligned
Internal ridge flashing shall be fixed in position
Insulated Trisomet panels shall be fixed starting from the valley, rising to the ridge and all
fixings fastened on the crown to the specification requirement
All end laps shall be cleaned of all dust, dirt etc & sealed to the manufacturer’s instructions
with mastic to prevent capillary humidity rise
Procedure shall be repeated for the parapet wall by fixing and aligning the gutter
External ridge flashing shall be fixed
The entire roof shall be brush cleaned and colour caps fixed
Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted throughout the above operations to the ITP
requirements
Fixing Formawall Flat Panels
First Tier
Drip flashing shall be fixed at the base of the wall to be used as a straight datum line
The first formawall vertical panel shall be fixed to true plumb and fastened by steel screws
throughout the joints and the next panel fixed along side of the first panel by providing a tight
vertical joint & the process repeated till the end is reached
Special flashing shall be fixed to the entire length of the first tier of vertical panels
Second Tier
The second tier of the blue panels shall be fixed in the same manner as the lower panel
The procedure shall continue till all the sides are completed
Special corner flashing shall be used internally and externally to provide an aesthetic finish at
the corner joints
Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted throughout the above operations to the ITP
requirements
Car Park
Corrugated cladding
Single long panel shall be fixed & fastened to the straight end of the structure through the
crown with one and a half profile overlapped on sides and mastic inserted between the sheets
The procedure shall be continued to the curve where sheets are to be racked and cut to
provide roof curvature
The entire roof shall be brush cleaned and colour caps inserted
Walls
Field Check for water leakage
Upon completion of the installation the wall shall be checked for Water Penetration in
accordance with AAMA standard 501.2-83
“Field check of Metal Curtain Walls for water leakage” on the designated area
Site Clearance
All debris & excess material shall be removed making sure no weep holes and the drainage
channels are unobstructed and free of dust and the sealants
Equipment
Man Lift

students knowledge
380 of
Electric Drills
Attachment
M / S Khalidiya method statement ref
MAR approval reference
Note-QA Documentation Formats shall be submitted separately
#154
Road crossing
At fire station- first street
For laying
2 # 100 mm sleeves
For telephone cables
Top
Index
Scope
Safety
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the excavation &
lay the sleeves at the road crossings meant for the 2 # Telephone Cables
Safety
Safety Supervision
Phone number :
Shift Controller
Emergency Number
HSE Direct number

students knowledge
381 of
Machine Excavation
Method
subject to RRD approval
The road shall be excavated in one instance by diverting the traffic to North as shown
Procedures
seaming the area to detect the existence of cables
The formation shall be prepared to receive the bedding concrete
Civil Contractor QC Inspections shall be conducted to approve the formation
100mm thick bedding Concrete shall be poured & cured according to the approved procedures
2 # 100 mm  PVC sleeves shall be laid to the exact locations and the levels
Civil Contractor QC Inspections shall be conducted to approve the levels and the alignment
Haunch concrete shall be carried out according to the standard details followed by the curing
to the approved procedures

students knowledge
382 of
Backfilling up to the road formation shall be carried out up to the road asphalt bottom level
according to specifications
The removed asphalt portion shall be made good using new asphalt concrete to the approved
procedures
Major Equipment
Excavator, Dumper Trucks, Concrete Trucks, Concrete Pump, Vibrators, Compactors. Jack
Hammer, Compressor, Asphalt finisher, Road Rollers etc.
Attachment
Sketch showing the Traffic Management Scheme
#155
Closing the structural gap
On the roof, wall & base slab
Top
Index
Scope
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the repair to the
gaps created at the roof, wall and base slab movement joints due to the structural slide
Safety
All safety means recommended by the manufacturer MBT as well as required to be adopted by
the regulations shall be adhered to

students knowledge
383 of
Safety Supervision
Material
Concresive 1320 from MBT
Method
Roof Slab Joint Gap
The soffit portion of the joint shall be closed by using a form provided with a polystyrene baking
rod to suit the sealant profile
The internal surface and the external edges shall be cleaned using compressed air and the
hard brush
An Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted to ensure the cleanliness and that the
joint is ready to receive the material
The material Concresive 1320 shall be prepared according to the manufacturer’s instructions
and poured into the prepared space between the compressed filler and filled fully to the
required level
A bead shall be used to render a profile to suit the sealant
Next day the form shall be removed and the sealant applied to the required profile giving the
joint a smooth face
An Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted throughout the above operations
Base Slab Joint Gap
Similarly, the above operations shall be repeated for the base slab with the exception of the
soffit forms
An Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted throughout these operations
Wall Joint Gap
Similarly, the above operations shall be repeated for the wall with the exception of the soffit
form but side forms in stages shall be erected
An Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted throughout these operations
Major Equipment
Attachment
Catalogue Page Concresive 1320

students knowledge
384 of
#156
Hdpe pipes
Butt fusion
Top
Index
Scope
Safety
Method
Equipment
Attachment
Scope
The statement is aimed to propose the procedures to be adopted to carry out the welding by
fusion at joints between the HDPE pipes using COSMOPLAST advanced PE jointing
technology
Safety
All safety means recommended by the manufacturer COSMOPLAST (refer to page 14 & 35 on
the catalogue) as well as required to be adopted by the regulations shall be adhered to
Safety Supervision
Material
Pipes & fittings (COSMOPLAST)
Method
Electrofusion-Precautions
A check shall be made that the pipes to be joined are of the same size to Standard Dimension
Ratio (SDR) and material.
Only compatible material shall be used
The butt fusion machine shall be sited on a suitable clean, dry baseboard or ground inside a
shelter to minimise contamination and wind effect
It shall be ensured that the control box voltage is compatible with fitting
Alignment / restraining clamps shall be used
Pipe ends shall be cut square for electrofusion sockets

students knowledge
385 of
Pipe / or spigot surfaces shall be scraped fully & surfaces & fittings kept clean
It shall be ensured that correct fusion & cooling times are adhered to
The joint shall be assembled & fused immediately after scraping pipe
The joint shall be completed in one go
The fitting shall not be allowed to be out of protective bags
The dirty fittings shall not be used
Prepared pipe surfaces shall not be touched
Assemblies shall not be allowed to get damp before joining
During welding cycle the weld shall not be touched
The joint shall not be removed from the clamp unless full cooling time has elapsed
The integral cutter shall not be removed from the saddle once the main has been drilled
Pre jointing checks
The regularly serviced equipment in good condition only shall be used
It shall be ensured that correct joining parameters for the machine and the pipe being welded
are known and clearly understood
It shall be ensured that the generator has sufficient quantity of fuel for the duration of the
programmed work. Heater plate should be cleaned or washed using only clean and cold water
and dried with a clean lint free cloth or paper towel
A check shall be made to ascertain that the trimmer is clean with undamaged blades in good
condition
It shall be ensured that clamp liners and securing screws of the correct size are available for
the size of pipe to be joined. Lines must be clean and should sit fully in the pipe clamps to
ensure correct alignment.
A check shall be made to ensure that the heater plate is at correct temperature
Correct parameters shall be selected for the pipes to be joined
Making the Joint
In an emergency the ‘red stop reset button’ when put off shall stop all automatic cycles and set
the machine safe and return to start of the cycle
Dummy weld shall be made to remove any fine particles from the heater plate before every
welding session, after changing from one pipe size to another & also if heater has been
allowed to cool
Connection & Pipe selection
Heater, chassis and trimmer cables shall be connected to the computer
After ensuring that hydraulic connections are clean, connection shall be made to the controller
Generator shall be started & computer connected to the generator
The pipe to be connected shall be selected
The data shall be confirmed
Pipe Preparation
Pipe Preparation shall be carried out according to the description given on page on the
manufacturer’s catalogue
Making the weld
Making the weld shall be carried out according to the description on page on the
manufacturer’s catalogue
Quality checks shall be conducted according to the description on page

students knowledge
386 of
All Do’s described on page 13 shall be followed and don’ts on page 14 avoided
Joint assembly preparation shall be carried out to description on page
Pressure testing of joint shall be conducted to description on page
Quality Check
Quality shall be checked to description on page
Check (Butt Fusion)
That the fusion indicators have risen while fitted
That no melted material or wire has exuded from the fitting
That the pipe has not moved from the fitting
That the area around the joint is clean
Evidence of scraping shall be checked
That the saddles are square on pipe
That the print out is taken from control box and result checked
In case the weld fails any of these checks,
For sockets the joint shall be cut out and use another fitting
For saddles the main shall not be taped but a repeat weld carried out using a new fitting at
least 200mm from the failed joint
Civil Contractor QC inspection shall be conducted throughout the above operations according
to the ITP and procedural requirements
Major Equipment
Generator, Electrofusion control box, Restraining & alignment equipment, Welding tent /
shelter & ground sheet, Scraping equipment, Pipe cutter, Indelib

Engineering constructionmethodsguidelinescbs(2)

Engineering constructionmethodsguidelinescbs(2)

More Related Content

What's hot

Viewers also liked

Similar to Engineering constructionmethodsguidelinescbs(2)

Recently uploaded

Engineering constructionmethodsguidelinescbs(2)